Uhk Ccu-430 Operation Us 02

Products conforming to RoHS directive
INCOM/ND FILTER
HEAD
F1
F2
PGM/CC VF
CHAR
MIC
MENU
CCU
OFF
EXT
POWER
CABLE STATUS ALARM CAM:400V T5A

ID TALLY NORMAL OPEN SHORT COMM TEMP FAN
OPT RX LEVEL CCU STATUS

CAM GENLOCK APC SDI
CCU
POWER
INTERCOM MENU CAM CCU
PHONE
MIC PRV OPE
ON
OFF
PTT
COM OFF
USB
INIT/PM CALL
UHK-430
CCU-430
4K/HD
Portable Camera System
OPERATION MANUAL
OUTLINE 1
UHK-430 NAME and FUNCTION 2
CCU-430 INSTALLATION and
CONNECTION 3
4K/HD
OPERATION 4
OPERATION MANUAL
CAMERA SETTINGS and
ADJUSTMENT 5
CCU SETTINGS and
ADJUSTMENT 6
Helpful Technical
Information 7
TROUBLE SHOOTING
and MAINTENANCE 8
SPECIFICATIONS 9
CHANGING INFORMATION
1710 Edition (E)

Copyright © 2016 Ikegami Tsushinki Co., Ltd.
We reserve the copyright on the software we create.
1RSDUWRIWKLVSXEOLFDWLRQPD\EHPRGL¿HGRUUHSURGXFHGLQDQ\IRUPRUE\DQ\PHDQVZLWKRXWSULRUZULWWHQSHUPLVVLRQIURP
Ikegami Tsushinki Co., Ltd.
PRODUCTS CONFORMING TO RoHS DIRECTIVE
PRODUCTS CONFORMING TO RoHS DIRECTIVE

Following products described in this manual are products conforming to RoHS directive.
- UHK-430 Color Camera
- CCU-430 Camera Control Unit
- SE-U430 System Expander
- VFE741D, VFL701D, VFL201D 9LHZ¿QGHU
- OCP-300 Ethernet-Compatible Operation Control Panel
- MCP-300 Ethernet-Compatible Maintenance Control Panel
- CPH-200 Control Panel Hub
- BSH-200 Base Station Hub
3URGXFWVFRQIRUPLQJWR5R+6GLUHFWLYHLQFOXGHSURGXFWVWKDWGRQRWFRQWDLQVSHFL¿HGKD]DUGRXVVXEVWDQFHVVXFKDVOHDGPHUFXU\
cadmium, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB) and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE) in electrical and
electronic equipment excluding following exemption applications based on the EU directive.
* About RoHS Directive

7KH5R+6GLUHFWLYHVWDQGVIRUWKH5HVWULFWLRQRIWKH8VHRI&HUWDLQ+D]DUGRXV6XEVWDQFHVLQ(OHFWULFDODQG(OHFWURQLF(TXLSPHQW
DQGLVRQHRIHQYLURQPHQWDOGLUHFWLYHVLQ(XURSH7KLVGLUHFWLYHUHVWULFWVWKHXVHRIVSHFL¿HGKD]DUGRXVVXEVWDQFHVLQHOHFWULFDODQG
electronic equipment.
● Applications exempted from RoHS directive compliance

Followings applications are permitted as exemptions from RoHS directive compliance.
0HUFXU\LQFRPSDFWÀXRUHVFHQWODPSVQRWH[FHHGLQJPJSHUODPS
0HUFXU\LQVWUDLJKWÀXRUHVFHQWODPSVIRUJHQHUDOSXUSRVHVQRWH[FHHGLQJ
- halophosphate 10mg
WULSKRVSKDWHZLWKDQRUPDOOLIHWLPHPJ
- triphosphate with a long lifetime 8mg
0HUFXU\LQVWUDLJKWÀXRUHVFHQWODPSVIRUVSHFLDOSXUSRVHV
0HUFXU\LQRWKHUODPSVQRWVSHFL¿FDOO\PHQWLRQHGLQWKLV$QQH[
/HDGLQWKHJODVVRIFDWKRGHUD\WXEHVHOHFWURQLFFRPSRQHQWVDQGÀXRUHVFHQWWXEHV
/HDGDVDQDOOR\LQJHOHPHQWLQVWHHOFRQWDLQLQJXSWROHDGE\ZHLJKWDOXPLQXPFRQWDLQLQJXSWROHDGE\ZHLJKW
DQGDVDFRSSHUDOOR\FRQWDLQLQJXSWROHDGE\ZHLJKW
7. Lead in following items
/HDGLQKLJKPHOWLQJWHPSHUDWXUHW\SHVROGHUV LHWLQOHDGVROGHUDOOR\VFRQWDLQLQJPRUHWKDQOHDG
- Lead in solders for servers, storage and storage array systems
- Lead in solders for network infrastructure equipment for switching, signaling, transmission as well as network
management for telecommunication
/HDGLQHOHFWURQLFFHUDPLFSDUWV HJSLH]RHOHFWURQLFGHYLFHV
8. Cadmium plating except for applications banned under Directive 91/338/EEC amending Directive 76/769/EEC relating to
restrictions on the marketing and use of certain dangerous substances and preparations
9. Hexavalent chromium as an anti-corrosion of the carbon steel cooling system in absorption refrigerators
10. Lead used in compliant pin connector systems
11. Lead as a coating material for the thermal conduction module C-ring
/HDGDQGFDGPLXPLQRSWLFDODQG¿OWHUJODVV
13. Lead in solders consisting of more than two elements for the connection between the pins and the package of microprocessors
ZLWKDOHDGFRQWHQWRIPRUHWKDQDQGOHVVWKDQE\ZHLJKW
14. Lead in solders to complete a viable electrical connection between semiconductor die and carrier within integrated circuit Flip
Chip packages
'HFDEURPLQDWHGGLSKHQ\OHWKHU 'HFD%'( LQSRO\PHULFDSSOLFDWLRQV
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) i

MAINTENANCE OF PRODUCTS CONFORMING TO RoHS DIRECTIVE
MAINTENANCE OF PRODUCTS CONFORMING TO RoHS DIRECTIVE

Work with care about followings for maintenance of products conforming to RoHS directive.
1. Identification
- For products conforming to RoHS directive, the letter “E” is appended at the end of the serial number on the label. For models
that the letter cannot be appended to the serial number, the letter “E” will be described in a distinguishable position on the label.
$GHVFULSWLRQH[DPSOHRQDPDLQODEHOLVVKRZQEHORZ
MODEL UHK-430
SERIALNo. AA123456 E Product conforming to RoHS directive
Label
- The printed circuit boards of the RoHS compliant products have ether of the following marks with serigraph or label.
Phase 3A Phase 3
2. Soldering
6LQFHWKHPHOWLQJSRLQWRIOHDGIUHHVROGHUXVHGIRUWKHSURGXFWVFRQIRUPLQJWR5R+6GLUHFWLYHLVWRGHJUHHV&HOVLXVKLJKHU
than that of conventional solder with lead (Sn-Pb eutectic solder), a high temperature needs to be set to a soldering iron. Taking
allowable temperature limit of the parts and stable work into consideration, use a soldering iron with excellent thermal recovery
characteristics.
5HFRPPHQGHGVROGHUFRPSRVLWLRQLV³6Q$J&X´RUHTXLYDOHQW
- Separate the soldering iron exclusively for RoHS products and the soldering iron for conventional use.
6HWWKHWHPSHUDWXUHRIWKHVROGHULQJELWWRWRGHJUHHV&HOVLXV
7KHWHPSHUDWXUHPD\QHHGWREHDGMXVWHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHVL]HRIWKHFRSSHUIRLOODQGRQWKHSULQWFLUFXLWERDUGDQGWKHWLSZLGWK
of the soldering bit.
- Finish by a lead-free solder looks dull or whitish compared to conventional solder with lead.
- If the customer mixed the lead-solder with the main body wiring or the circuit board, it becomes guarantee off the subject.
Ikegami doesn't guarantee to do the repair work. Because the solder polluted with lead cannot be removed.
3. Parts
Be sure to use parts conforming to RoHS directive.
ii UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

INFORMATION TO THE USER
INFORMATION TO THE USER

7KLVHTXLSPHQWKDVEHHQWHVWHGDQGIRXQGWRFRPSO\ZLWKWKHOLPLWVIRUD&ODVV$GLJLWDOGHYLFHSXUVXDQWWR3DUWRIWKH)&&
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated
in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required
to correct the interference at his own expense.
&KDQJHVRUPRGL¿FDWLRQVQRWH[SUHVVO\DSSURYHGE\WKHSDUW\UHVSRQVLEOHIRUFRPSOLDQFHFRXOGYRLGWKHXVHU VDXWKRULW\WR
operate the equipment.
2. Declaration of conformity
7KH&(PDUNPHDQVWKDWWKHIROORZLQJSURGXFWVZLOOPHHWDQGWKH6WDQGDUGV(1(1(1(1
(( IRU(0& (1 IRU/9'
For European customer.
People’s Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard (SJ/T11364—2006)
Marking Styles for Names and Contents of Toxic or hazardous Substances and Elements
7R[LFRUKD]DUGRXV6XEVWDQFHVDQG(OHPHQWV
Hexavalent Polybrominated Polybrominated
Part Name Lead Mercury Cadmium
Chromium biphenyls diphenyl ethers
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd)
(Cr/(VI)) (PBB) (PBDE)
UHK-430 × ż ż ż ż ż
CCU-430 × ż ż ż ż ż
ż ,QGLFDWHVWKDWWKLVWR[LFRUKD]DUGRXVVXEVWDQFHFRQWDLQHGLQDOORIWKHKRPRJHQHRXVPDWHULDOVIRUWKLVSDUWLVEHORZWKHOLPLW
requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
î ,QGLFDWHVWKDWWKLVWR[LFRUKD]DUGRXVVXEVWDQFHFRQWDLQHGLQDWOHDVWRQHRIWKHKRPRJHQHRXVPDWHULDOVXVHGIRUWKLVSDUWLV
above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) iii

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This manual describes the precautions using various pictorial symbols for you to use the product safely. Please read these
SUHFDXWLRQVWKRURXJKO\EHIRUHXVH7KHV\PEROVDQGPHDQLQJVDUHDVIROORZV
The following hazard alert symbols are used to indicate the level of impact on the body or property
when you do not follow the precautions.
Indicates that mishandling of the product by ignoring this label may lead to a danger resulting in a
serious injury or death.
Indicates that mishandling of the product by ignoring this label may lead to a danger resulting in an
injury or property damage.
The following symbols are used to indicate the expected injury or hazards when you do not follow
the precautions.
Indicates general cautions on such matters as safe work, procedure, and installation location. Mishandling
may not directly lead to death, injury, or property damage.
Indicates that mishandling may cause an electric shock.
,QGLFDWHVWKDWPLVKDQGOLQJPD\FDXVHD¿UH
Indicates that mishandling may cause injury.
The following symbol is used to indicate other precautions to prevent damage or hazard from
occurring:
Indicates prohibited action.
iv UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
■ Handling Precautions
Regarding the Product

Do not disassemble or modify the product which is not described in this manual. Doing so may
FDXVH¿UHHOHFWULFVKRFNRULQMXU\
Regarding the Power

:KHQ\RXGLVFRQQHFWWKHFDEOHEHVXUHWRKROGWKHSOXJDQGSXOO)DLOXUHWRGRVRPD\FDXVHD¿UH
or electric shock due to a damaged cable.
To inspect or operate on the inside of the equipment, turn off the power and wait for one or two
minutes before starting work. High voltage is present in some modules and connectors of this
product.
:KHQ\RXZDQWWRLQWHUFHSWDSRZHUVXSSO\VXUHO\SOHDVHSXOODQ$&SOXJRIWKH&&8VLGH
Regarding the power voltage supplied to CCU
$OWKRXJKWKLVSURGXFWLVIDFWRU\VHWIRUWKH$&LQSXWYROWDJHWRPDWFKWKHVWDQGDUGYROWDJHRIWKH
GHVWLQDWLRQDUHDEHVXUHWRFRQ¿UPWKHSRZHUVXSSO\YROWDJHVHWWLQJE\WKHIROORZLQJSURFHGXUH
EHIRUHHQHUJL]LQJWKH&&8
:LWKWKHSRZHUVXSSO\YROWDJHVHWWLQJRIWKH&&8DW$&9a9LQSXWWLQJ$&9a9
voltage to the CCU may cause serious damage.
&RQ¿UPWKH$&YROWDJHRIWKHSRZHUVRXUFHWRWKH&&8PHDVXUHWKHYROWDJHLIXQFHUWDLQ7KH
IDFWRU\VHWWLQJRIWKH$&YROWDJHLVLQGLFDWHGRQDODEHORQWKHXSSHUOHIWFRUQHURIWKH&&8
,IWKHVHWWLQJRIWKH&&8PDWFKHVWKHYROWDJHRIWKHSRZHUVRXUFHFRQQHFWLRQRIWKH$&FDEOHLV
okay.
Please refer to “4.3 Turning On the Power” for further instruction.
CCU input voltage setting
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) v

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Do not lift or hold the camera by the projection parts.
,I\RXOLIWRUKROGWKHFDPHUDE\WKHYLHZ¿QGHURUWKHOHQV\RXDUHSURQHWRGURSSLQJLW0RUHRYHU
WKHFRQQHFWLRQSDUWVEHWZHHQWKHFDPHUDDQGWKHYLHZ¿QGHURUWKHFDPHUDDQGWKHOHQVPD\EH
exposed to unnecessary pressure, which may cause equipment damage.
$OZD\VLQVWDOOWKHDFFHVVRULHVRUFRQQHFWWKHFDEOHVDIWHUSODFLQJWKHFDPHUDRQD¿[HGSRVLWLRQ
:KHQLQVWDOOLQJVXFKDFFHVVRULHVDVOHQVRUPLFURSKRQH¿[WKHFDPHUDRQDVWDEOHSODFH HJRQD
table, a tripod, etc.).
$YRLGXVHRUVWRUDJHLQWKHIROORZLQJFRQGLWLRQV
- Extremely high/low temperature
- In direct sunlight for a long time, or near a heater
- High humidity or dusty
- Exposed to water or other liquid
- Strong vibration or shock
6WURQJPDJQHWLF¿HOGRUUDGLRZDYHV
- lightning
- In rain without the rain cover

Be sure to hold the plug and pull when you disconnect the cable.
)DLOXUHWRGRVRPD\FDXVHD¿UHRUHOHFWULFVKRFNGXHWRDEURNHQFDEOH
$YRLGPRYLQJWKHHTXLSPHQWVXGGHQO\IURPDQH[WUHPHO\FROGSODFHWRDZDUPSODFH
Condensation may occur in the optical block or other area of the camera.
Do not drop or insert a metal object such as a pin or a foreign object into the equipment.
Do not spread or spill water or other liquid on the equipment.
Do not subject the equipment to a strong shock or vibration.
Doing so may cause damage or malfunction of the equipment.
Since CMOS sensors are element is adopted as the imagers sensor in picture elements, no burning
occurs in ordinary operation. However, when shooting a subject which emits an excessive amount
of light (Sun, laser light, etc.) for long hours, take great care for temperature increase inside of the
sensors.
Laser beams may damage the sensors. If you shoot a scene that includes a laser beam, be careful
not to let a laser beam become directed into the lens of the camera.
Before connecting an accessories, make sure that the camera and equipment to be connected are
SRZHUHGRII$OVREHVXUHWRXVHGHGLFDWHGFDEOHV
Excessive sound pressure from the headset may cause a hearing loss.
Regarding the Power and the Lithium Battery

Use the product in compliance with the rating of the fuse within the product and that within the
product (Camera and CCU). Otherwise, a fault can occur.
'RQRWXVHDQXQVSHFL¿HGEDWWHU\
:URQJXVDJHRIEDWWHULHVPD\FDXVHOLTXLGOHDNH[SORVLRQDQGKHDWDQGDWZRUVWLQMXU\RU¿UH
When changing or discarding a battery, please contact Ikegami’s sales and service centers.
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to
the instructions.
vi UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Regarding the Fiber Connector and the Fiber Cable

)LEHUFDEOHFRQQHFWRUVDUHTXLWHVLPLODUWRHDFKRWKHULQVKDSH%HIRUHFRQQHFWLQJ¿EHUFDEOHV
thoroughly check male or female, the diameter, type and manufacturer of connectors.
If the ferrule is dirty, wipe the dirt off with cotton swabs soaked in alcohol.
7KH¿EHUFDEOHSRZHUVXSSOLHVRI$&9IURP&&8WRWKHFDPHUD
$OWKRXJKVDIHW\PHDVXUHVDUHIXOO\WDNHQVXFKDVWKHVDIHW\FLUFXLWWKDWVWRSVWKHSRZHUVXSSO\
IURPWKH&&8ZLWKLQDVKRUWWLPHDIWHUDQRSWLFDO¿EHUFDEOHLVUHPRYHGRUVKRUWFLUFXLWHGQHYHU
force to bend, twist, or damage the cable, and take great care when handling.
Regarding the Camera Connector and the Fiber Cable
7DNHFDUHIRUWKHIROORZLQJ
: KHQGLVFRQQHFWLQJWKH¿EHUFDEOHIURPWKHFDPHUDRUIURPWKH&&8DOZD\VKROGWKH¿EHU
connector (plug) and not the cable.
- Do not crush the cable.
- Since there can be various obstacles (such as a corner of a building, glass, rough ground
surface) in places where the cable is connected, do not drag the cable without winding.
7XUQRIIWKHSRZHUEHIRUHUHPRYLQJWKH¿EHUFDEOH
7KHDOORZDEOHUDGLXVRIFXUYDWXUHRI¿EHUFDEOHVLVDSSUR[LPDWHO\VL[WLPHVRIWKHRXWHU
GLDPHWHURIFDEOHV DSSUR[PPIRUDĳPPZLGHFDEOH 'RQRWIRUFHWRZLQGOHVVWKDQ
VSHFL¿HG)RUFLEOHZLQGLQJFDQEUHDN¿EHUOHDGVZLWKLQWKHFDEOH
Radius
Approx. 60mm
Fiber Cable
: KHQFRQQHFWLQJD¿EHUFDEOHWRD¿EHUFRQQHFWRUDQFKRUWKH¿EHUFDEOHZLWKDFDEOHFODPS
Cable Clamp Cable Clamp

RET-1 RET-2
/MIC
(optional)
Fiber Cable
7KHFDPHUDFRQQHFWRUDQG¿EHUFDEOHFRQQHFWRU SOXJ KDYHDVWUXFWXUHWKDWLVVXVFHSWLEOH

to dust, etc. Hence, if the camera is not in use, be sure to put the attached connector cover to
prevent from the dust.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) vii

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
■ Environmental Cautions
Regarding the product
When continuously operating the product in a rainy, cold or hot conditions, use a rain cover, cold-
weather cover, and shade cover respectively.
$YRLGVWRULQJWKHSURGXFWLQDGXVW\SODFHIRUDORQJWLPH,IXQDYRLGDEOHXVHDGXVWSURRIFRYHU
When shooting in places such as airports, military bases or transmitting stations where magnetic
DQGUDGLR¿HOGVDUHH[FHVVLYHO\VWURQJFRPSOHWHO\VKLHOGWKHFDPHUDE\FRYHULQJLWZLWKDOXPLQXP
foil.
■ Maintenance
Regarding the product
Before performing maintenance on the product, be sure to turn off the power for safety and for
protection against malfunction.
Clean the product using a dry and soft cloth.
If the stain is hard, soak the cloth with water or detergent, wring well and wipe. If you use
detergent, wipe off the detergent with a cloth that is soaked in just water and wrung well.
■ Notice for Use

- When carrying or storing the product, always use a carrying case.
- Before shooting important subjects, take test shots to obtain the desired effect.
$IWHUXVLQJWKHSURGXFWDOZD\VWXUQRIIWKHSRZHU
■ Regular Maintenance Recommended

This product includes parts that wear out and have a limited life even in proper use or storage. Therefore, regular maintenance is
recommended to extend the life and safe use of this product for a long time. Please contact Ikegami’s sales and service centers for
the regular maintenance and repair of our products.
viii UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

HOW TO READ THE OPERATION MANUAL

This page explains general notes on reading the UHK-430/CCU-430 Operation Manual, and the symbols and notations used in the
manual.
■ Notes on the Manual

- This manual is written for readers with a basic knowledge of handling broadcast cameras.
- The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice in the future.
■ Symbols
7KHV\PEROVXVHGLQWKLVPDQXDODUHDVIROORZV
CAUTION: Things you have to be careful during operation. Be sure to read.
Note: Supplementary information or guidance
Reference: Sections where related information is available
Term: Explains the meaning of a term you need to know.
■ Notations
The following notations are used in this manual.
This product Indicates UHK-430 and CCU-430.
Indicates UHK-430 Camera (UHK-430S Sensor Unit and UHK-430M

Camera
Main Unit).
CCU Indicate CCU-430 Camera Control Unit.
OCP Basically indicates OCP-300 Operation Control Panel.
MCP Basically indicates MCP-300 Maintenance Control Panel.
Fiber cable Indicates ¿EHUFRPSRVLWHFDPHUDFDEOH
Indicates the items enclosed by double quotes (“ ”) are to be selected

“”-“”-“”
DQGFRQ¿UPHGLQWKHRUGHUVKRZQ
4K indicates the video outputs with active image area of 3840 x 2160
4K
or 4096 x 2160. In this document, 4K indicates the 3840 x 2160 output.
6LJQDOVWKDWFRPSO\ZLWK6037(*EV6LJQDO'DWD6HULDO
HD (SDI)
Interface 1280×720, 1920 x 1080.
6LJQDOVWKDWFRPSO\ZLWK6037(*EV6LJQDO'DWD6HULDO
* 6',
,QWHUIDFHî /HYHO$%
Quad Link $PHWKRGWRFRQVWUXFWD.LPDJHZLWKOLQNV
■ Illustrations and Displays

The illustrations and displays in the text are provided for explanation and may be slightly different from the actual equipment or
image.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) ix

■ Related Manuals
- SE-U430 System Expander Instruction Manual
- OCP-300 Ethernet-Compatible Operation Control Panel Operation Manual
- MCP-300 Ethernet-Compatible Maintenance Control Panel Operation Manual
9)/'LQFK/&'&RORU9LHZ¿QGHU2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO
9)/'LQFK)XOO+'/&'&RORU9LHZ¿QGHU2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO
9)('LQFK2/('&RORU9LHZ¿QGHU2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO
x UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ Structure of Operation Manual

This manual is intended to help you operate the UHK-430/CCU-430 safely and smoothly. This manual consists of seven chapters.
We recommend you read them in sequence from Chapter 1 to Chapter 9 so that you can carry out all the work smoothly through the
installation to the operation of the camera equipment.
This system camera is consisted of a Camera and CCU (Camera Control Unit), making it suitable for various operations in studio
DQG¿HOGHQYLURQPHQWV
Chapter 1 OUTLINE
Explains the features and the main operating systems of this product.
If you are not familiar with UHK-430 Camera System, please start with this chapter.
Chapter 2 NAME and FUNCTION

Explains the name and function of each part of the Camera.
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION and CONNECTION

This chapter explains the installation method of this product and lenses, etc.
7DNLQJH[DPSOHVRIVWXGLRDQG¿HOGVKRRWLQJH[SODLQVKRZWRFRQQHFWWKLVSURGXFWWRWKHSHULSKHUDO
equipment.
Chapter 4 OPERATION
Explains the setup required before shooting.
%HIRUHVKRRWLQJIRUWKH¿UVWWLPHUHDGWKLVFKDSWHUDQGFKHFNWKDWWKLVSURGXFWLVRSHUDWLQJQRUPDOO\
Chapter 5 CAMERA SETTINGS and ADJUSTMENT

7KLVSURGXFWUHDOL]HVGHWDLOHGVHWWLQJVWRVXSSRUWDZLGHUDQJHRIRSHUDWLRQVDQGYDULRXVYLGHR
expressions through the menu window. This chapter explains the settings using switches of camera and
settings through the menu screen.
Chapter 6 CCU SETTINGS and ADJUSTMENT

This chapter explains the settings using switches of CCU and settings through the system menu screen.
Chapter 7 Helpful Technical Information

This chapter provides technical information that is helpful for using this product.
Chapter 8 TROUBLE SHOOTING and MAINTENANCE

When the alarm lamp lights during the operation of this product, read here to know the problem. This
chapter also explains the regular maintenance such as cleaning of connectors and resetting of breaker.
Chapter 9 SPECIFICATIONS
([SODLQVWKHVSHFL¿FDWLRQVRIWKLVSURGXFW
RQWDLQVUHYLVLRQLQIRUPDWLRQRIGHVLJQUHYLVLRQRUFXVWRPHUVSHFL¿FVSHFL¿FDWLRQUHTXHVWHG
&
E\FXVWRPHUV5HDGE\FRPSDULQJZLWKWKHPDLQWH[WRIWKHRSHUDWLRQPDQXDO ³&+$1*,1*
,1)250$7,21´PD\EHVHQWWR\RXODWHURQ
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) xi

CONTENTS
UHK-430/CCU-430
4K/HD
OPERATION MANUAL
PRODUCTS CONFORMING TO RoHS DIRECTIVE . . . i Chapter 3.

MAINTENANCE OF PRODUCTS CONFORMING TO
RoHS DIRECTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ii
INSTALLATION and CONNECTION
INFORMATION TO THE USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii 3.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Product Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
HOW TO READ THE OPERATION MANUAL . . . . . . . ix Make sure the Power Switch is OFF . . . . . . 37
3.2 Connecting the Power Cable and
Camera Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Chapter 1. OUTLINE Connecting the AC Power Cable
to the CCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.1 Overview of UHK-430/CCU-430 . . . . . . . . . . 3 Connecting the Optical fiber Cable
1.2 Features of This Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 to the CCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
System Versatility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3.3 Camera and Peripheral Installation and
Superb Operation and Ease of Use . . . . . . . . 5 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Employment of New Technology . . . . . . . . . . 5 Mounting/Removing the Camera
Other Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 on/from the Tripod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.3 Operating Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Mounting and Removing the Lens . . . . . . . . 42
1.4 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Mounting and Removing the Viewfinder . . . 44
Adjust the eypiece position of viewfinder . . 46
Chapter 2. NAME and FUNCTION Attaching a Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Connecting Headsets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.1 Camera and Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Attaching a Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Name and Function of the Connecting a Monitor to the Camera . . . . . . 51
Name and Function of the 3.4 Connecting the CCU and Camera . . . . . . . . 52
Camera Left Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting the Camera Cable
Name and Function of the (Fiber Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Camera Front Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Removing the Fiber Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Name and Function of the 3.5 System Setup Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Camera Rear Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 3.6 About the GENLOCK System . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Name and Function of the Viewfinder . . . . . 22
2.2 Displays in the Viewfinder (VFL201D) . . . . . 24 Chapter 4. OPERATION
LED Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Center Marker, Safety Marker, 4.1 Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Frame Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Initial Operation Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
ZEBRA Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Preparation Before Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Side Mask Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Shooting Settings and Adjustment. . . . . . . . 59
Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 4.2 Switch Position Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Viewfinder Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Camera right view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2.3 CCU-430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Camera rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
CCU-430 Name and Function of the CCU front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
front display (with cover fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . 28 4.3 Turning ON Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Names and Functions of CCU-430 Front To operate the power supply from CCU . . . . 61
Inside Part (Cover Removed). . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Activating the FIBER SINGLE MODE . . . . . 63
Names and Functions of CCU-430 (Back) . . 32 4.4 Output Signal Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Test Pulse (CAL Signal) Check . . . . . . . . . . 65
Color-Bar Signal Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
External Chart Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
xii UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

CONTENTS
4.5 Viewfinder Adjustment (VFL201D) . . . . . . . . 67 The setting status of the camera

Visibility and Screen Adjustments of the loaded from the USB memory. . . . . . . . . . . .119
Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 5.6 Setting the Items Controlled from OCP . . . .121
Checking the Display Mode of the Selecting the Shutter Speed . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Setting from the OCP-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Viewfinder Marker Display Settings . . . . . . . 68 Setting from the Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . 122
Display the Waveform Video and Setting the Digital Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Vector Video in the Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Setting from the OCP-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
4.6 Auto Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Setting from the Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . 123
4.7 Preparation for Shooting in Particular Switching the Video Gain (Step Gain) . . . . .124
Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 5.7 Controlling from the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.8 Scene File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Controlling the ND Filter and Color Filter . . 125
Assigning Functions to FUNTION
Chapter 5. Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Assigning the FUNTION Switch
CAMERA SETTINGS and ADJUSTMENT on the Right Side of the Camera . . . . . . . . 126
Assignment of the FUNTION buttons
5.1 Adjusting INTERCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 of Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Adjusting Headset Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Adjusting Intercom Receiver Volume . . . . . . 79
Adjusting Intercom PGM Volume . . . . . . . . . 80
Chapter 6.
5.2 Basic Operation of the Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 CCU SETTINGS and ADJUSTMENT
Operation of the menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Displaying User Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . 81 6.1 Basic Operation of Menu Screen . . . . . . . . .131
Displaying Normal Menu Screen Basic Operation of Menu Screen . . . . . . . . .131
(Main Menu Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Operating from MCP-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Menu Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Operating from OCP-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Displaying the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Operating from CCU Main Unit . . . . . . . . . 134
Exiting the Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 6.2 CCU Menu Configuration and Contents . . 135
About USER MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Sub Menu Setting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Initial Values of USER MENU . . . . . . . . . . . 83 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Displays the USER MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Customizing the USER MENU . . . . . . . . . . . 83 SYSTEM SETTING (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Moving in the USER MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Setting the SYSTEM SETTING (2/2) . . . . . .141
Deleting the USER MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Displaying ENGINEER MENU . . . . . . . . . . . 85 6.3 Setting of CCU Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
5.3 Menu Configuration and content . . . . . . . . . 86 Setting of PRESET FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Sub Menu Setting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 INTERCOM SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
MARKER CHRACTER(MARKER CHAR) . . 87
FOCUS ASSIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Chapter 7.
INTERCOM/AUDIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
VIDEO I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Helpful Technical Information
LENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
FUNCTION SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 7.1 4K Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
VIDEO ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 4K Format and HD Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
TALLY/INDICATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 7.2 Format Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
FAN CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Frame Field Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
FILE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 7.3 Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 7.4 Signal Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 7.5 Video Signal Format Output. . . . . . . . . . . . .161
MENU MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 7.6 Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
VF MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 7.7 Adjusting the Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
5.4 Creating a Lens File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 7.8 TRACKER function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Preparation for creating a lens file . . . . . . . .112 7.9 Simultaneous option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Creating the lens OFF file . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Overview and implementation
Creating lens files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
5.5 Using the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 The setting of the down-convert output
Inserting and removing the USB memory . .116 and cutout output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Saving the Setting Status of Video phase adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Camera to the USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Image setting for simultaneous operation . .176
Simultaneous operation during
HD double speed output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) xiii

7.10 12G SDI option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Overview and implementation
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Assigning video outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
How to assign outputs from the
CCU MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Combined application with
HD SIMUL option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
12G-SDI coaxial cable and
BNC connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Transmission distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Chapter 8.
TROUBLE SHOOTING and
MAINTENANCE
8.1 Alarm Lamp on the OCP or MCP Flashes ON
and OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
CCU Self Diagnostic Information . . . . . . . . 199
8.2 Indicator on the Front of CCU Lights . . . . . 202
8.3 “TEMP!!” or “FAN!!” Displays on the
VF Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
8.4 Initializing the Settings of this Product . . . . 204
8.5 Cleaning Camera Connectors . . . . . . . . . . 206
8.6 Replacing Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
8.7 Replace the fuse in the AC inlet. . . . . . . . . 210
Chapter 9. SPECIFICATIONS
9.1 UHK-430, CCU-430 Specifications . . . . . . .213
9.2 External Dimensions Diagram . . . . . . . . . . .215
CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
CCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
9.3 External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Camera to its CCU (Fiber Cable)
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Camera I/O Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
CCU I/O Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
CHANGING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

1
OUTLINE
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)
1.1 Overview of UHK-430/CCU-430
1.1 Overview of UHK-430/CCU-430

The UHK-430 employs a 3-chip optical system using 2/3-inch 4K CMOS for the imaging
1
VHQVRU,WSURYLGHVDVPRRWKVKRRWLQJH[SHULHQFHZLWKWKHIRFXVUDQJHDQGWKHGHSWKRI¿HOG
that production people have been used in the broadcasting industry.
OUTLINE
CCU-430 is Camera Control Unit (CCU) that connects the camera and optical composite CAUTION:
¿EHUFDEOHV WZRVLQJOHPRGH¿EHUVWZRSRZHUOLQHVWZRFRQWUROOLQHV WRVXSSO\SRZHUDQG The functionality of this
transmit and receive video, audio, and control signals. document includes items and
It has a structure in anticipation of function extension in the future; the construction and contents that are available in
RSHUDWLRQRIÀH[LEOHV\VWHPDUHSRVVLEOHRQWKHEDVLVRIWKHWUDQVLHQWSHULRGIURP+'WR. combination with options.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 3

1.2 Features of This Product

System Versatility
■Uncompressed 40 Gbps optical transmission between
the Camera and CCU
*ESVRSWLFDOWUDQVPLVVLRQV\VWHPLVHPSOR\HG7KLVV\VWHPWUDQVPLWV+'DQG.YLGHR
audio, and data between the Camera and CCU without compression.
■Various TRUNK lines with high capacity transmission

are included as standard.
$ELGLUHFWLRQDO+'6',WUXQNYLGHROLQHIURPKHDGWR&&8LVVWDQGDUGHTXLSPHQW
Moreover, the trunk video (HD-QTV) from the CCU to the Camera also corresponds to
asynchronous videos and asynchronous embedded audio (4 ch).
■ Multi return video input

)RUWKH5(7YLGHRLQSXWIRXUFKDQQHOVDUHSRVVLEOHZLWK*+'6',DXWRPDWLFUHFRJQLWLRQ
(DFKFKDQQHOLVHTXLSSHGZLWKWKHIUDPHV\QFKURQL]HUIXQFWLRQWKHUHIRUHHDFKFKDQQHO
supports asynchronous signals.
$WZRFKDQQHO$&7,9(7+528*+IXQFWLRQLVSURYLGHG6ZLWFKLQJEHWZHHQWKH
$&7,9(7+528*+IXQFWLRQDQGWKHIRXUFKDQQHOLQSXWIXQFWLRQLVSRVVLEOHE\&&8
menu selection.
■ Audio Signal Embedded in each SDI Output (Embedded

Audio Function)
$XGLRVLJQDOVFDQEHHPEHGGHGLQ6',VLJQDOVRIWKHPDLQRXWSXW
■ Remote Control to Support Network

In addition to the conventional Ikegami serial command (ICCP), controls by the Ethernet
connection is also available.
%\VHWWLQJXSDQ(WKHUQHWV\VWHPDZLGHYDULHW\RIRSHUDWLRQDOFRQ¿JXUDWLRQVLQFOXGLQJ
panel assignments become possible. In addition, it is also compatible with systems
corresponding to Ethernet, which allows wide expandability.
4 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

Superb Operation and Ease of Use

■ Application of Conventional Standard 2/3-inch Lenses 1
$VWKH%7$6%OHQVPRXQWLVXVHG3URGXFWLRQRI.+'LPDJHLVSRVVLEOHZLWKWKH
VDPHGHSWKRI¿HOGDVWKHFRQYHQWLRQDO+'FDPHUDDQGE\PDLQWDLQLQJWKHVDPHOHYHOV
OUTLINE
of handleability and operability.
■ Quietness
With an NC value of 20 or less in indoor conditions, you do not need to worry about noise
in TV studios, concert halls, etc.
■ Focus assist function

)RFXVDVVLVWDUHDLVSURYLGHGLQWKH9)YLGHRWRDOORZWKHFDPHUDPDQWR¿QGFULWLFDOIRFXV
The focus assist area can be displayed with auto triggering by focus operation or manual
triggering by VTR switch operation on the lens or lens controller.
■ Low center of gravity, light weight, and well-balanced

design
The low center of gravity, light weight, and well-balanced design provides perfect balance
when shooting on the shoulder, as well as, easy to hold at various angles.
■ Self diagnosis function

Self diagnosis function allows monitoring the statuses of circuits for video, control, optical
¿EHUWUDQVPLVVLRQV\QFKURQL]DWLRQVLJQDOVSRZHUVXSSO\7KHVWDWXVHVRIFDPHUDFDQEH
always checked.
■ Rotating Camera Connector

7KHFDPHUDHPSOR\VDURWDWLQJFDPHUDFRQQHFWRU7KLVHQDEOHVVWXGLRDQG¿HOGVKRRWLQJDW
various angles.
■ Return Button
RET-1/RET-2 selector button is also equipped on the camera handle. So, it is easy to operate
the Return switch when shooting from a low angle.
Employment of New Technology

■ Newly developed 4K CMOS sensor and video processor
2/3 inch 8 Megapixel 4K CMOS sensor and video processor LSI are newly introduced to
RXWSXWKLJKTXDOLW\DQGKLJKGH¿QLWLRQ5HDO.YLGHRV
■ Digital I/F and two-way communication with viewfinder (VF)

Since the control communication between the camera and the VF is accomplished by two-
ZD\56FRPPXQLFDWLRQWKH0(18RIWKHFDPHUDFDQEHRSHUDWHGIURP9)DQGWKH
MENU of VF can be operated from the camera.
Other Features
■ Gigabit Ethernet Trunk Line
$Q(WKHUQHW7UXQN %$6(7 LVDYDLODEOHDVDGDWDWUXQNOLQHEHWZHHQWKH&DPHUDDQG
CCU.
■ Independent 4K/HD video processing

1HZO\GHYHORSHG$6,&ZDVHPSOR\HGDQGWKHVLPXOWDQHRXVRSHUDWLRQRI+'DQG.
(optional) has become possible.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 5

1.3 Operating Systems

This product is equipped with interface functions with a control panel and control unit.
,WVXSSRUWVYDULRXVRSHUDWLRQIRUPVLQWKHVWXGLRRU¿HOGDVDV\VWHPFDPHUDZLWKWKH Note:
combination of SE-U430 System Extender. - By combining the Camera with
Each control panel to be connected to the CCU can be selected and operated depending on SE-U430 system expander
the use. (option), it can be mounted as a
full-scale studio camera with 7
■ Example of Minimum Configuration of System Camera (1 camera, 1 OCP) RULQFKYLHZ¿QGHUDQGIXOO
Camera studio lens
HD-SDI
INCOM/ND FILTER
HEAD
MONITOR PM Note:
For Minimum operating System,
F1
PGM/CC
MENU
F2
VF
CHAR
MIC
WFM
CAMERA no MCP needed when OCP-300
CCU
OFF
EXT
POWER
OCP
CP cable is used.
COMM If the MCP-300 is used,
CCU-430
(;7(51$/32:(5LV
required. Please refer to the
■ Example of System Camera Configuration (Up to 8 cameras, 1 MCP) operation manual of MCP-300 for
WKHVSHFL¿FDWLRQVRIWKHH[WHUQDO
Camera HD-SDI PM power supply.
MONITOR HD-SDI
CP cable
OCP
Term:
INCOM/ND FILTER
HEAD
F1
F2
PGM/CC VF
CHAR
MIC
MENU
CAMERA
CCU
OCP (Operation Control

OFF
EXT
POWER
COMM
CCU-430 CP cable
CCU-1 PM Panel)
OUT WFM
This control panel is used for
normal operation. Typically one
MCP
OCP is dedicated to one camera
CCU-8
chain.
CSU *1 Term:
MCP (Maintenance Control
Camera
MONITOR
PM Panel)
INCOM/ND
PGM/CC
FILTER
HEAD
F1
F2
VF
CHAR
MIC
OCP This control panel is used for
MENU
POWER
CCU
OFF
EXT
CAMERA the maintenance and precise

COMM adjustment of the camera in
CCU-430
studio shooting. By using a
memory card, you can save the
shooting condition on memory
and make setup easily. By using a
CSU together with an MCP, you
can maintain up to 32 cameras.
Term:
CSU (Camera Select Unit)
Used when controlling multiple
cameras. With using a MCP,
one CSU can control up to 8
cameras, and contains terminals
through which video is output
on the monitor from the selected
camera.
Caution:
*1 HD-SDI option must be
installed to monitor using
CSU.
6 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ Ethernet Connection (Expanded connection) Term:

PoE (Power over Ethernet)
SWITCH
*2
PoE is the technology to supply
SRZHUZLWK/$1FDEOH 1
Camera
HD-SDI
Caution:
OUTLINE
INCOM/ND FILTER
PM
HEAD
MONITOR
*2- When OCP is compatible
F1
MCP-300
F2
PGM/CC VF
CHAR
MIC
MENU
POWER
CCU
OFF
EXT
WFM LAN cable

CAMERA with PoE+ (IEEE 802.3at),
Ethernet
LAN cable
the PoE function can be used
LAN cable OCP-300
CCU-430 in this connection.
Camera
HD-SDI
MONITOR PM LAN cable
INCOM/ND FILTER
HEAD
F1
F2
OCP-300
PGM/CC
MENU
VF
CHAR
MIC
WFM
CCU
CAMERA
OFF
EXT
POWER
LAN cable
Ethernet
CCU-430
Camera
HD-SDI
INCOM/ND FILTER
MONITOR PM LAN cable OCP-300
HEAD
F1
F2
WFM
PGM/CC VF
CHAR
MIC
MENU
CCU
OFF
CAMERA
EXT
POWER
LAN cable
Ethernet
CCU-430
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 7

UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)
1.4 Connection Diagram
1.4 Connection Diagram

1
VF System
Cover Camera Control System
OUTLINE
7.4-inch OLED VF (VFE741D)
7.0-inch LCD VF (VFL701D) Studio Hood Field Hood
Headset
Dust Proof
Cover
CCU-430
Camera Control Unit
Carrying Case
PM
Fiber Cable ID TALLY NORMAL OPEN SHORT COMM TEMP FAN

CAM GENLOCK APC SDI
CCU
POWER
PHONE
MIC PRV OPE
ON
OFF
PTT
COM OFF
Rain Proof INIT/PM CALL

USB
Cover WFM
AC
Cold Weather
Cover
Attachment
CP Cable or Ethernet Cable
2-inch VF (VFL201D) Mic Holder
Lens
Manual Control
UHK-430S UHK-430M
2
Studio Lens
Prompter
Adaptor OCP-300 MCP-300
INCOM/ND FILTER
HEAD
F1
Teleside F2
PGM/CC VF Microphone
Converter CHAR
Script MENU
MIC
Lamp
Zoom Lens CCU
OFF
POWER
EXT
Headsets
Wide (PROD/ENG)
Attachment
12Pin SE-U430
Tripod Mount Plate
W/Diascope System Expander
Filter or
W/O Diascope HD
Monitor
(COLOR)
Coaxial Cable
Script Lamp
Tripod
Remote Focus Remote Zoom
Control Set Control Set
Tally Box
SE (Main Body)
RET SW Box
Case Zoom Remote

Control Box
Lens
LS (Lens Supporter)
Camera Carrying Case Soft Carrying Case
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 9

2
NAME and FUNCTION
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)
2.1 Camera and Viewfinder

This section explains the names and functions of the parts on the camera and viewfinder.
Name and Function of the Camera Right Side

2
■ Name of the camera right side
NAME and FUNCTION

RET-2/MIC button 3 4 RET-1 button 17 D-Tap connector
12V 1.5A
RET-2
RET-1
/MIC
1 View Finder (VF)
2 Camera handle
5 Shoulder Belt
Hooks
FILTER HEAD button 12

Function 1 button 13
INTERCOM PHONE Control knob/ FILTER
INCOM/ND
ND Filter Selector button 11 HEAD
Function 2 button 14 F1
INTERCOM PGM Control knob/

F2
Color Filter Selector button 10
PGM/CC VF
VF CHAR button 15 CHAR
MENU SEL knob/ENTER button 9 MIC
MENU
INTERCOM MIC button 16
CCU
OFF
EXT
POWER
8 Shoulder Pad 7 POWER Switch

6 POWER Indicator
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 13

■ Function of the camera right side

(1) View Finder (VF)
'LVSOD\VYLGHRVIURPWKHFDPHUDUHWXUQYLGHRVDQGYDULRXVFKDUDFWHUVDQGPDUNHUVRQWKHYLHZ¿QGHUVFUHHQLQFKSRUWDEOHFRORU
YLHZ¿QGHULQFKVWXGLRFRORUYLHZ¿QGHUDQGLQFK2/('VWXGLRFRORUYLHZ¿QGHUDUHDYDLODEOH
(2) Camera handle

Hold this handle to carry the camera.
(3) RET-2/MIC button

$VVLJQWKH5(70,&EXWWRQWRHLWKHURIWKHVHIXQFWLRQVVRWKDW\RXFDQWXUQWKHIXQFWLRQRQRIIZLWK\RXUKDQGRQWKHKDQGOH
● When set to RET-2
RET-2 video is displayed in the viewfinder only while this button is pressed. When this button is not pressed, the
video from the camera is displayed.
● When set to MIC
This button is used to turn on the intercom microphone of the headset plugged into the camera. While this button is
pressed, the microphone input is turned on.
Reference:
The assignment of functions is set on the menu screen. Please refer to "Chapter 5 : CAMERA SETTINGS and ADJUSTMENT"
"5.3 Menu Configuration and content" (P. 86) for setting methods.
(4) RET-1 button

5(7YLGHRLVGLVSOD\HGLQWKHYLHZ¿QGHURQO\ZKLOHWKLVEXWWRQLVSUHVVHG:KHQWKLVEXWWRQLVQRWSUHVVHGWKHYLGHRIURPWKH
camera is displayed.
(5) Shoulder Belt Hooks

Hooks to be used to attach a shoulder belt (option).
Reference:
Please refer to "Chapter 3 : INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION" "3.3 Camera and Peripheral Installation and
Connection" "Attaching a Shoulder Belt" (P. 50) for more information.
(6) POWER Indicator

Displays the status of power to the camera
*UHHQOLJKW 3RZHULVVXSSOLHG
5HGOLJKW 6WDQGE\VWDWXV
(7) POWER Switch

This switch is used to turn on/off the camera and select power sources.
&&8 3RZHULVVXSSOLHGIURPWKH&&8YLDWKHFDPHUD
2)) 3RZHULVWXUQHGRII
(;7 3RZHULVVXSSOLHGIURPDQH[WHUQDOSRZHUVRXUFH6HOHFWWKLVWRVXSSO\SRZHUYLDWKH'&,1FRQQHFWRU
Caution:
,I\RXWXUQRQWKHSRZHUDQGWXUQHGLWRQDJDLQZDLWIRUVHFRQGVEHIRUHWXUQLQJRQ
(8) Shoulder Pad

Place this on your shoulder when carrying the camera.
(9) MENU SEL knob/ENTER button

Turn the knob to select the operation you wish to use from the menu items displayed on the VF screen, and press this button to
select. The contents of the menu and setting methods are explained in "Chapter 5 : CAMERA SETTINGS and ADJUSTMENT".
(10) INTERCOM PGM Control knob/Color Filter Selector button

7KLVFRQWUROLVXVHGWRDGMXVWWKH3*0YROXPHRIWKHLQWHUFRPV\VWHPZKHQ(1*RU352'LVVHOHFWHGXVLQJWKH,17(5&20
)521795VHOHFWRUVZLWFKRQWKHEDFNRIWKHFDPHUD3UHVVWKH),/7(5+($'EXWWRQRQWKHULJKWVLGHRIWKHFDPHUDDQGXVHWKH
FRORU¿OWHUWRVZLWFKWKHFRORUWHPSHUDWXUHZKLOHWKHRSHUDWLRQULJKWLVRQWKHFDPHUDVLGH3OHDVHUHIHUWR"Chapter 5 : CAMERA
SETTINGS and ADJUSTMENT" "Controlling the ND Filter and Color Filter" (P. 125) for more information.
14 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

(11) INTERCOM PHONE Control knob/ND Filter Selector button

7KLVFRQWUROLVXVHGWRDGMXVWWKHLQWHUFRPUHFHLYHUYROXPHZKHQ(1*RU352'LVVHOHFWHGXVLQJWKH,17(5&20)521795
VHOHFWRUVZLWFKRQWKHEDFNRIWKHFDPHUD3UHVVWKH),/7(5+($'EXWWRQRQWKHULJKWVLGHRIWKHFDPHUDDQGXVHWKH1'¿OWHUWR
switch the transmittance while the operation right is on the camera side. Please refer to "Chapter 5 CAMERA SETTINGS and
ADJUSTMENT" "Controlling the ND Filter and Color Filter" (P. 125) for more information.
(12) FILTER HEAD button

7KLVVZLWFKDOORZVVHOHFWLQJWKHFRORU¿OWHUDQG1'HIIHFW¿OWHUDWWKHFDPHUD
2
(13) Function 1 (F1) button
Select one of the items prepared using the VF menu, and assign it to Function 1 button.
NAME and FUNCTION

Please refer to "Chapter 5 CAMERA SETTINGS and ADJUSTMENT" "FUNCTION SW" (P. 100) for setting items and
setting method.
(14) Function 2 (F2) button

Select one of the items prepared using the VF menu, and assign it to Function 1 button.
Please refer to "Chapter 5 CAMERA SETTINGS and ADJUSTMENT" "FUNCTION SW" (P. 100) for setting items and
setting method.
(15) VF CHAR button

7KHFKDUDFWHUGLVSOD\RQWKH9)VFUHHQGLVSOD\VLQIRUPDWLRQ FKDUDFWHUV XVHGWRFRQ¿UPWKHVWDWXVRIYDULRXVFRQWUROVRIWKH
FDPHUD3UHVVLQJWKH9)&+$5VZLWFKZLOOFDOOXSWKHIXOOFKDUDFWHUGLVSOD\RQWKHYLHZ¿QGHUVFUHHQ7KLVVZLWFKLVDOVRXVHGWR
call up the camera menu.
(16) INTERCOM MIC button

The INTERCOM MIC button is used to select ON/OFF of headset microphone (linked to INTERCOM selector switch) connected
to the camera.
(17) D-Tap connector

$SRZHURXWSXWFRQQHFWRU '&9$ WKDWVXSSOLHVSRZHUWRH[WHUQDOFRPSDFWPRQLWRUVHWF
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 15

Name and Function of the Camera Left Side
■ Name of the Camera left side

2 VF Connector Selectable
VF Cable Plug 3 1 Shoulder Belt Hooks
10 Fiber Cable Clamp
4 SDI OUT
5 VF Cable Clamp
9 CAMERA
Connector
MIC Cable Clamp 8 RET-1 RET-2
/MIC
RET-1 Button 7 6 RET-2/MIC Button
■ Function of the camera left side

(1) Shoulder Belt Hooks
Hooks to be used to attach a shoulder belt (option).
3OHDVHUHIHUWR$WWDFKLQJWKH6KRXOGHU%HOWLQ&KDSWHU
Reference:
Please refer to "Chapter 3 : INSTALLATION and CONNECTION" "3.3 Camera and Peripheral Installation and
Connection" "Attaching a Shoulder Belt" (P. 50) for more information.
(2) VF Connector
Used to connect a VF cable.
(3) VF Cable Plug

$FRQQHFWRUDWWDFKHGWRDFDEOHIURP9)7KHODWFKHVRQERWKVLGHVDUHIRUORFNLQJWKHFRQQHFWRULQSODFH7RUHPRYHWKH9)
connector, press in on both latches and then remove it.
(4) SDI OUT

Outputs the same video signal as the SDI OUT 3 connector.
(5) VF Cable Clamp

$FODPSXVHGWR¿[WKH9)FDEOH
(6) RET-2/MIC Button

$VVLJQWKH5(7VHOHFWRUIXQFWLRQRUWKH,17(5&200,&VZLWFKIXQFWLRQWRWKLVEXWWRQVRWKDW\RXFDQFRQWUROWKHDVVLJQHG
function at the side of the camera.
● When set to RET-2
The video of view finder is switched from the video of the camera to the RET-2 video while this button is pressed.
● This button is used to turn on the microphone of intercom when "ENG" or "PROD" is selected using the INTERCOM
FRONT VR selector switch on the back of the camera.
While this button is pressed, the intercom microphone is turned on.
16 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

(7) RET-1 Button

7KLVEXWWRQLVXVHGWRVZLWFKWKHYLGHRRIYLHZ¿QGHUIURPWKHYLGHRRIWKHFDPHUDWRWKH5(7YLGHR7KHYLGHRRIYLHZ¿QGHULV
switched to the RET-1 video while this button is pressed.
Reference:
The assignment of functions for RET-1 and RET-2/MIC buttons is set on the Menu screen. Please refer to "Chapter 5 CAMERA
SETTINGS and ADJUSTMENT" "5.3 Menu Configuration and content" (P. 86) for the setting methods.
(8) MIC Cable Clamp 2

$FODPSXVHGWR¿[DFDEOHIRUDPLFURSKRQH
(9) CAMERA Connector
NAME and FUNCTION

$FRQQHFWRUXVHGWRFRQQHFWWKH&DPHUDDQG&&8ZLWKD¿EHUFDPHUDFDEOH
Reference:
See “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” “Regarding the Camera Connector and the Fiber Optic Cable”IRUWKHURXWLQJDQG¿[LQJ
PHWKRGVRI¿EHUFDEOHV
(10) CAMERA Cable Clamp

$FODPSXVHGWR¿[D¿EHUFDPHUDFDEOH
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 17

Name and Function of the Camera Front Side
■ Name of the camera front side
UHK-430
LENS▼
Lens Connector 3
2 Lens Lock Lever
1 Lens Mount
■ Function of the camera front side

(1) Lens Mount
9DULRXVLQFKEURDGFDVWOHQVHVFDQEHXVHG7KHOHQVPRXQWLVFRPSDWLEOHZLWKWKH%7$VSHF
(2) Lens Lock Lever

$OHYHUXVHGWRORFNWKHOHQVPRXQW,QVHUWWKHOHQVDQGWKHQWXUQDQG¿[WKHOHQVPRXQWULQJZLWKWKHOHYHU
(3) Lens Connector

$FRQQHFWRUXVHGWRFRQQHFWDOHQVFDEOH SLQ ,WLVFRPSDWLEOHZLWK%7$VSHF
Reference:
Please refer to "Chapter 9 : SPECIFICATIONS" (P. 211) for pin functions of the lens connector.
Reference:
Please refer to "Chapter 5 : CAMERA SETTINGS and ADJUSTMENT" "5.2 Basic Operation of the Menu" (P. 81) for
the main screen display.
18 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

Name and Function of the Camera Rear Side
■ Name of the Camera rear side
2
INCOM Selector Switch 8 2 TALLY Switch
NAME and FUNCTION

LIGHT Selector Switch 1 3 CALL Button
LIGHT RET 1 RET 2 TALLY CALL
G TALLY Indicator 4 ON
OFF 2
3 4
2
3 4
ON
OFF
5 R TALLY Indicator
DIM DIM
RET 1 Selector Switch 6 1 1
7 RET-2 Selector Button
INCOM SEL
INTERCOM-1 INTERCOM Control Knob 9 INCOM 1
REAR
INCOM 2 14 INTERCOM-2 INTERCOM Control Knob
FRONT FRONT
INTERCOM-1 PGM2 Control Knob 10 INCOM INCOM
15 INTERCOM-2 PGM1 Control Knob
INTERCOM-1 PGM1 Control Knob 11 16 INTERCOM-2 PGM2 Control Knob
INTERCOM-1 TALK Selector Switch 13 ON
PGM 1
PROD
PGM 2
ON
PGM 1
PROD
PGM 2
18 INTERCOM-2 MIC Switch
OFF BOTH OFF BOTH
INTERCOM-1 MIC Switch 12 PTT ENG PTT ENG 17 INTERCOM-2 TALK Selector Switch
INTERCOM 1 INTERCOM 2
GL IN/SYNC OUT
INTERCOM-1 Connector 19 20 INTERCOM-2 Connector
23 GL IN/SYNC OUT
Stereo mini jack Connector 21
DC OUT Connector 22 DC OUT 12V 1A 26 SDI OUT 3 Connector
SDI OUT 2 Connector 25 SDI OUT 1 SDI OUT 2 SDI OUT 3 SDI I/O 4
SDI OUT 1 Connector 24 27 SDI I/O 4 Connector

OFF OFF USB REMOTE
MIC-1 POWER Switch 28 +12V +48V +12V +48V
32 USB Connector
MIC-2 POWER Switch 29 TRACKER 33 REMOTE Connector
DC-IN 11~17V
34 Gigabit ETHERNET TRUNK Connector
MIC-1 Connector 30
GbE TRK
MIC-2 Connector 31 MIC 1 MIC 2 36 DC IN Connector
35 TRACKER Connector
37 System extension connector
■ Function of the Camera rear side

(1) LIGHT Selector Switch
ON/OFF switch for rear illumination .
21 /LJKWLQJLVWXUQHGRQ
',0 /LJKWLQJLVWXUQHGRQZLWKUHGXFHGEULJKWQHVV
2)) /LJKWLQJLVWXUQHGRII
(2) TALLY Selector Switch

$&7 7$//<GLVSOD\LVDFWLYDWHG
2)) 7$//<GLVSOD\LVGHDFWLYDWHG IRUFHGOLJKWRII
(3) CALL Button

$EXWWRQXVHGWRFDOOWKH9( 9LGHR(QJLQHHU :KHQWKLVEXWWRQLVSUHVVHGWKH5('7$//<ODPSRI&&8DQGWKHFRQWUROSDQHO
OLJKWXSDQGWKHEX]]HUVRXQGV
(4) G TALLY indicator

/LJKWVXSZKHQWKH*7$//<VLJQDOLVLQSXWWHGWR7$//<,1FRQQHFWRURQWKHEDFNVLGHRI&&8
(5) R TALLY indicator

/LJKWVXSZKHQWKH57$//<VLJQDOLVLQSXWWHGWR7$//<,1FRQQHFWRURQWKHEDFNVLGHRI&&8$OVROLJKWVXSZKLOHWKH&$//
buttons of the camera or control panels (OCP, MCP, RCP, etc.) are pressed.
(6) RET-1 Selector Switch

$VZLWFKXVHGWRVHOHFWRQHRIIRXUUHWXUQYLGHRVLJQDOVFRQQHFWHGWRWKH&&8DV5(7YLGHR
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 19

(7) RET-2 Selector Switch

$VZLWFKXVHGWRVHOHFWRQHRIIRXUUHWXUQYLGHRVLJQDOVFRQQHFWHGWRWKH&&8DV5(7YLGHR
(8) INTERCOM Selector Switch

$VZLWFKXVHGWRVHOHFWZKHWKHUWRXVHWKHVLGHFRQWUROSDQHO ,17(5&203*0FRQWURONQRE,17(5&203+21(FRQWURONQRE
of the Camera or controls on the back of the camera to adjust the volume of intercom.
,17(5&20 $GMXVWWKHYROXPHIRU,17(5&20XVLQJWKHFRQWUROSDQHORQWKHVLGHRIWKHFDPHUD7KHYROXPH
adjustment for INTERCOM-2 is performed using the controls on the back of the camera.
2)) $OOYROXPHDGMXVWPHQWLVGRQHDWWKHUHDUFRQWUROSDQHO
,17(5&20 $GMXVWWKHYROXPHIRU,17(5&20XVLQJWKHFRQWUROSDQHORQWKHVLGHRIWKHFDPHUD7KHYROXPH
adjustment for INTERCOM-1 is performed using the controls on the back of the camera.
(9) INTERCOM-1 INTERCOM Control Knob

$FRQWUROWRDGMXVWWKHYROXPHRILQWHUFRPUHFHLYHUIRU,17(5&20
(10) INTERCOM-1 PGM2 Control Knob

$FRQWUROWRDGMXVWWKHYROXPHRI3*0RILQWHUFRPV\VWHPIRU,17(5&20

(12) INTERCOM-1 MIC Switch

ON/OFF switch of the intercom microphone for the INTERCOM-1 headset.
21 7XUQV21WKHLQWHUFRPPLFURSKRQH
2)) 7XUQV2))WKHLQWHUFRPPLFURSKRQH
377 7XUQV21WKHLQWHUFRPPLFURSKRQHZKLOHWKLVVZLWFKLVSUHVVHG
(13) INTERCOM-1 TALK Selector Switch

$VZLWFKXVHGWRVHOHFWWKH7$/.FKDQQHORI,17(5&20
352' 3URGXFWLRQFKDQQHO
%27+ 3URGXFWLRQ (QJLQHHULQJFKDQQHOV
(1* (QJLQHHULQJFKDQQHO
(14) INTERCOM-2 Control Knob

$FRQWUROWRDGMXVWWKHYROXPHRILQWHUFRPUHFHLYHUIRU,17(5&20


(17) INTERCOM-2 TALK Selector Switch

$VZLWFKXVHGWRVHOHFWWKH7$/.FKDQQHORI,17(5&20
352' 3URGXFWLRQFKDQQHO
%27+ 3URGXFWLRQ (QJLQHHULQJFKDQQHOV
(1* (QJLQHHULQJFKDQQHO
(18) INTERCOM-2 MIC Switch

ON/OFF switch of the intercom microphone for the INTERCOM-2 headset .
21 7XUQV21WKHLQWHUFRPPLFURSKRQH
2)) 7XUQV2))WKHLQWHUFRPPLFURSKRQH
377 7XUQV21WKHLQWHUFRPPLFURSKRQHZKLOHWKLVVZLWFKLVSUHVVHG
(19) INTERCOM-1 Connector

$FRQQHFWRUXVHGWRFRQQHFWDKHDGVHWIRU,17(5&20
(20) INTERCOM-2 Connector

$FRQQHFWRUXVHGWRFRQQHFWKHDGVHWVRILQWHUFRPV\VWHPIRU,17(5&20
(21) Stereo mini jack Connector (EARPHONE Jack)

$MDFNXVHGWRFRQQHFWDKHDGVHWZLWKPLQLSOXJVSHFL¿FDWLRQV,WLVSRVVLEOHWROLVWHQWRLQWHUFRPDQG3*0FKDQQHOV
(22) DC OUT Connector

$'&9 $ RXWSXWFRQQHFWRUIRUJHQHUDOSXUSRVH
20 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

(23) GL INPUT/SYNC OUT connector

,QVHOIFRQWDLQHGRSHUDWLRQD*(1/2&. V\QFKURQRXVFRXSOLQJ VLJQDOFDQEHLQSXWWRV\QFKURQL]HWKHFDPHUD
,Q&&8RSHUDWLRQDV\QFKURQL]DWLRQVLJQDOLVRXWSXWIRURWKHUFDPHUDVPRQLWRUVHWF
(24) SDI OUT 1 Connector

$FRQQHFWRUXVHGWRRXWSXWDQ+'6',VLJQDOWRDQH[WHUQDOV\VWHP8VHGWRRXWSXWYLGHRVLJQDOVRI0219)5(7WRDQG+'
QTV-1 to 2.
(25) SDI OUT 2 Connector 2

QTV-1 to 2.
NAME and FUNCTION

(26) SDI OUT 3 Connector
QTV-1 to 2.
(27) SDI I/O 4 Connector

$FRQQHFWRUXVHGWRLQSXWRURXWSXWWKHDQ+'6',VLJQDO8VHGWRRXWSXWYLGHRVLJQDOVRI0219)5(7WRDQG+'479WR
Note:
7KHYLGHRWUXQN +'7581. FKDQQHOIURPWKHFDPHUDWR&&8LVFRPSDWLEOHZLWKV\QFKURQL]HG(PEHGGHGDXGLR FK EXWQRW
FRPSDWLEOHZLWKDV\QFKURQL]HG(PEHGGHGDXGLR FK
(28) MIC-1 POWER Switch

$VZLWFKWRFKDQJHWKHSRZHUVXSSO\IRUWKHPLFURSKRQHWKDWLVFRQQHFWHGWRWKH0,&FRQQHFWRUV
Select it depending on the type of microphone to be used.
9 6XSSOLHVSRZHUWRWKHPLFURSKRQHIRU9$%SRZHU
2)) 'RHVQRWVXSSO\SRZHUWRWKHPLFURSKRQH,IWKHPLFURSKRQHGRHVQRWUHTXLUHSRZHUVXSSO\XVHLWLQWKLVSRVLWLRQ
9 6XSSOLHV9SKDQWRPSRZHUWRWKHPLFURSKRQH
(29) MIC-2 POWER Switch

$VZLWFKWRFKDQJHWKHSRZHUVXSSO\IRUWKHPLFURSKRQHWKDWLVFRQQHFWHGWRWKH0,&FRQQHFWRUV
Select it depending on the type of microphone to be used.
9 6XSSOLHVSRZHUWRWKHPLFURSKRQHIRU9$%SRZHU
2)) 'RHVQRWVXSSO\SRZHUWRWKHPLFURSKRQH,IWKHPLFURSKRQHGRHVQRWUHTXLUHSRZHUVXSSO\XVHLWLQWKLVSRVLWLRQ
9 6XSSOLHV9SKDQWRPSRZHUWRWKHPLFURSKRQH
(30) MIC-1 connector

$FRQQHFWRUXVHGWRFRQQHFWDPLFURSKRQHDQGLQSXWDQDXGLRVLJQDOIRUOLQHRXWSXWDWWKH&&8
(31) MIC-2 connector

$FRQQHFWRUXVHGWRFRQQHFWDPLFURSKRQHDQGLQSXWDQDXGLRVLJQDOIRUOLQHRXWSXWDWWKH&&8
(32) USB connector

8VHGWREDFNXSVHWWLQJVGDWDIRUWKHFDPHUDXVLQJD86%PHPRU\WRXSJUDGH LQVWDOO WKH¿UPZDUHYHUVLRQ
(33) REMOTE connector

$FRQQHFWRUXVHGWRFRQQHFWYDULRXVUHPRWHFRQWUROSDQHOV 2&30&3
(34) Gigabit ETHERNET TRUNK connector

$Q(WKHUQHWFRPPXQLFDWLRQOLQHEHWZHHQ&&8DQG&DPHUD9DULRXVQHWZRUNGHYLFHVFDQEHFRQQHFWHGIRUXVH7KLVOLQHRSHUDWHV
independently from video and control of the camera.
(35) TRACKER connector

Used for the external interface of the Intercom and Tally.
(36) DC IN connector
$FRQQHFWRUXVHGWRFRQQHFW32:(5DQGVXSSO\9'&SRZHUWRWKHFDPHUD
(37) System extension connector

&RQWDLQVDFRQQHFWRUWKDWFRQQHFWVWKH6<67(0(;3$1'(5 6(8 DQGWKHFDPHUD
Reference:
Refer to Chapter 9 for connector pin out information.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 21

Name and Function of the Viewfinder

This document provides a description concerning the VFL201D. Please refer to the operation manual of each device for more
details on the VFL201D, VFL701D, and VFE741D.
■ VFL201D View
Left View Top View Right View
Attachment Hall (1/4”) 14 12 REAR TALLY Lamp
Diopter Adjustment 3
(with switch)
lever
1 VF cable
EYEPIECE Release lever 2

MIC HOLDER 13
attaching mount
Front View
MENU knob 10 11 FRONT TALLY Lamp
PEAKING knob 4 6 BRIGHTNESS knob
CONTRAST knob 5 9 F3 switch

F1 switch 7 8 F2 switch
Bezel display
! EXT
22 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ Function of the VFL201D

(1) VF cable
$FDEOHXVHGWRFRQQHFWWKHYLHZ¿QGHUWRWKHFDPHUD
(2) Eyepiece release lever

$OHYHUXVHGWRUHPRYHWKHH\HSLHFHWRFOHDQLQVLGHWKHYLHZ¿QGHU
(3) Diopter adjustment lever

2
$OHYHUXVHGWRDGMXVWWKHIRFXVRIWKHYLHZ¿QGHU,WLVDGMXVWHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHFDPHUDPDQ VH\HVLJKWVRWKDWYLGHRTXDOLW\RIWKH
YLHZ¿QGHULVFOHDU
NAME and FUNCTION

(4) Peaking knob
$NQREXVHGWRHQKDQFHWKHVKDUSQHVVRIWKHYLHZ¿QGHUVFUHHQ$GMXVWVWKHOHYHORIRXWOLQHHQKDQFHPHQWVRWKDW\RXFDQEULQJWKH
FDPHUDLQWRIRFXV7KLVLVQRWUHÀHFWHGRQWKHRXWSXWVLJQDOVRIWKHFDPHUD
(5) Contrast knob

$NQREXVHGWRDGMXVWWKHLPDJHFRQWUDVWRIYLHZ¿QGHUVFUHHQ
7KLVLVQRWUHÀHFWHGRQWKHRXWSXWVLJQDOVRIWKHFDPHUD
(6) Brightness knob

$NQREXVHGWRDGMXVWWKHLPDJHEULJKWQHVVRIWKHYLHZ¿QGHUVFUHHQ
7KLVLVQRWUHÀHFWHGRQWKHRXWSXWVLJQDOVRIWKHFDPHUD
(7) F1 (Function 1) switch

7KLVVZLWFKFDQEHDVVLJQHGWRDIUHTXHQWO\XVHGIXQFWLRQDPRQJYDULRXVYLHZ¿QGHUIXQFWLRQV
7KHDVVLJQDEOHLWHPVLQFOXGH212))IXQFWLRQVIRU0DUNHU=(%5$=RRPLQGLFDWRUVHWFXVLQJWKH0HQX


(10) Menu knob (with switch)

The menu control provides navigation of the camera menu.
(11) FRONT TALLY lamp

/LJKWVXSZKHQWKH57$//<VLJQDOLVLQSXWWRWKH&&8,WGRHVQRWOLJKWXSZKHQWKH7$//<VZLWFKLVVHWWR2))
(12) REAR TALLY Lamp (with switch)

7KH5($57$//<ODPSLVLQWHUORFNHGZLWKWKH57$//<LQGLFDWRURIWKHYLHZ¿QGHUDQGOLJKWVGXULQJUHFRUGLQJZLWKWKH
UHFRUGHURUZKHQ57$//<LVLQSXWWRYDULRXVH[SDQVLRQGHYLFHV6LQFHWKH5($57$//<ODPSVHUYHVDVWKHVZLWFKLWFDQEH
turned ON/OFF by sliding.
(13) MIC HOLDER attaching mount

$WWDFKHVDQH[WHUQDOPLFURSKRQHKROGHU
(14) Attachment Hall (1/4'')

For attaching external attachment.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 23

2.2 Displays in the Viewfinder (VFL201D)

,QDGGLWLRQWRWKH/('LQGLFDWRUVRQWKHYLHZ¿QGHUPDUNHUVDQGFKDUDFWHUVDUHDOVRGLVSOD\HGRQWKHYLHZ¿QGHUVFUHHQ'HWDLOVDUH
SURYLGHGEHORZ3OHDVHUHIHUWR9LHZ¿QGHUGHWDLOVRSHUDWLRQPDQXDOIRUGLIIHUHQFHVZLWKWKHVWXGLRYLHZ¿QGHUV
LED Indicator
*7$//< $QLQGLFDWRUIRU*5((17$//< G TALLY R TALLY
57$//< $QLQGLFDWRUIRU5('7$//<
(;7 /LJKWVXSZKHQWKHOHQVH[WHQGHULVHQJDJHG
/LJKWVXSZKHQDFDPHUDVHWWLQJLVGLIIHUHQWIURP
the standard setting value.
Setting item Setting value

AWB selector switch OFF
KNEE MODE MANUAL
SKIN DTL ON
SHUTT/SUP-V ON
Backlight correction for Other than OFF ! EXT
auto-iris mode.
Center Marker, Safety Marker, Frame Marker

- The Center Marker is used to ascertain the center of the
VFUHHQRUDOLJQWKHFDPHUDKRUL]RQWDOO\DQGYHUWLFDOO\7KH
center marker is selected from three types of shapes on the
Menu screen. Center Marker
- The Safety Markers are used to check the action safety area
or title safety area. Switching between the action area and the Safety Marker
title area is made from the menu. Frame Maker
- The Frame Marker is used to ascertain the frame of the image
being shot.
$VSHFWUDWLR FDQEHVHWWRWKH6DIHW\ ! EXT
Markers and Frame Marker separately.

Reference: Title Area
Please refer to "Chapter 5 : CAMERA SETTINGS and
ADJUSTMENT" "5.3 Menu Configuration and content"
"MARKER CHRACTER(MARKER CHAR)" (P. 87) for
the setting method of each marker.
ZEBRA Indicator
Zebra Pattern means an stripe pattern displayed over the video.
7KHUHDUHWZRW\SHVRI=HEUDVLJQDOV7KH¿UVW=HEUDVLJQDO
displays the part where the video level of the subject exceeds
the setting value, and the second Zebra signal displays the
part where the video level matches with the setting value. The
=(%5$LQGLFDWRUFDQEHWXUQHGRQRIIZKHQDVVLJQHGWRD
)XQFWLRQVZLWFKRQIURQWVLGHRIYLHZ¿QGHU
Reference:
Please refer to "Chapter 5 : CAMERA SETTINGS and ! EXT
"TALLY/INDICATOR" (P. 104) for the setting method of
]HEUDVLJQDO
24 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

Side Mask Function

:KHQWKHFDPHUDRXWSXWDVSHFWUDWLRLVVHWWRWKHSLFWXUH
RQWKHYLHZ¿QGHULVGLVSOD\HGZLWKDDVSHFWUDWLR,Q
FRQVLGHUDWLRQRIFRQYHUWLQJWRDSLFWXUHWKHFRQWUDVWRIWKH
picture outside the frame marker area can be adjusted. The side
mask is displayed when the frame marker is set to the
IROORZLQJUDWLR
:LWKPRGH 2
Reference:
NAME and FUNCTION

See "Chapter 5 : CAMERA SETTINGS and
"MARKER CHRACTER(MARKER CHAR)" (P. 87) for
Brightness of the picture outside the frame marker can be adjusted.
how to set the side mask.
Display Mode
7KHGLVSOD\PRGHVHWVWKHPDUNHUVDQGFKDUDFWHUVWREHGLVSOD\HGLQWKHYLHZ¿QGHU
Reference:
See "Chapter 5 : CAMERA SETTINGS and ADJUSTMENT" "5.3 Menu Configuration and content" "MARKER
CHRACTER(MARKER CHAR)" (P. 87) for the display mode is set from the menu.
Viewfinder Display
■ Status Display
SCAN FORMAT 1 2160P59

2$&
Camera Fan status 2 FAN!! =, ) 20 OAC Indicator
Camera temperature warning 3 TEMP!!!
AWB color temperature 4 3.2K ZFR 12 LENS REMOTE
External Power Voltage 5 12.0V 13 OPT LEVEL
SKIN DTL ON 6 SK OPT NG Z37 14 ZOOM Indicator
GAIN UP value 7 +12dB SV F58 15 FOCUS Indicator
2B A x1 MIC 1/100 16 SHUTTER Indicator
19 Super V Indicator
INTERCOM MIC ON
17
18 Digital Extender
11 Fiber Cable OPT level
10 AWB Memory Channel
9 Operational control of the filter

8 ND, CC filter indication
■ Display in the Viewfinder Function

(1) SCAN FORMAT
Displays the setting values for the operation format of the camera.
(2) Camera Fan Status

The fan status is displayed.
$872 )DQLVLQWKH$872PRGH
'LVSOD\HGZKHQWKH9)&+$5EXWWRQLVSUHVVHG
)$1 'LVSOD\HGÀDVKLQJZKHQWKHIDQKDVVWRSSHGDEQRUPDOO\
(3) Camera temperature warning

Displays when the temperature inside the Camera exceeds the recommended maximum.
(4) AWB color temperature

7KH$:%FRORUWHPSHUDWXUHLVDOVRGLVSOD\HGZKHQWKH$:%$%%VZLWFKDQG),/7(5VZLWFKLVRSHUDWHG7KHFRORUWHPSHUDWXUH
VWRUHGLQ$FKRU%FKPHPRU\LVGLVSOD\HGIRUVHFRQGVZKHQWKH$:%$%%VZLWFKLVRSHUDWHG 6HOHFWLRQEHWZHHQ$FKDQG
%FKLVPDGHE\WKH$:%6(/(&7VZLWFK 7KH$:%FRORUWHPSHUDWXUHLVDOVRGLVSOD\HGZKHQWKH),/7(5VZLWFKLVRSHUDWHG
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 25
(5) External power supply voltage

Displays the external power supply voltage when the external power supply voltage is used to operate the camera.
(6) SKIN DTL ON

“SK” is displayed when the SKIN DTL function is ON.
(7) GAIN UP value

Displays for 2 seconds when the increment of the step gain is switched.
7KHVWHSSRVLWLRQLVRQHRIWKHIROORZLQJG%G%G%G%G%G%
(8) ND and CC filter numbers

1 2 3 4
ND
&/($5 1/4 1/8 1/16 1/64
$ B C D E
CC
3200 K 4300 K 6300 K CROSS OPTION
(9) Operational control of the filters

"*" displayed when the camera has operational right control the filters.
(10) AWB memory channel

7KHPHPRU\VHOHFWHGE\WKH$:%6(/(&7VZLWFKLVGLVSOD\HG
$ $FKPHPRU\
% %FKPHPRU\
2 : KLWHEDODQFHDGMXVWPHQWLVLQWKHSUHVHWFRQGLWLRQ .
(11) Fiber Cable OPT level

'LVSOD\V2371*ZKHQWKHRSWLFDOUHFHLYHUOHYHORIWKH¿EHUFDEOHLVEHORZWKHPLQLPXPOHYHO
(12) LENS REMOTE

Displayed when the operation of the lens is remote controlled (at theOCP-300, etc.). The remote operation of the lens is acquired or
released using the operation control panel.
(13) OPT level

2SWLFDOVLJQDOOHYHORIWKH¿EHUFDEOHLVGLVSOD\HGLQEDUJUDSKIRUPZKHQWKH&&8LVFRQQHFWHGWRWKHFDPHUD
(14) ZOOM indicator

'LVSOD\VWKHOHQV]RRPSRVLWLRQ WR
(15) FOCUS indicator

Displays the lens focus position (0 to 100).
(16) Shutter indicator

Displays the shutter speed value when the Shutter is turned on.
(17) INTERCOM MIC

Displays when the intercom microphone is set to "ON".
(18) Digital Extender

7KHPDJQL¿FDWLRQLVGLVSOD\HGZKHQWKHGLJLWDOH[WHQGHULV21
(19) Super V Indicator

$SSHDUVIRUVHFRQGVZKHQWKH6XSHU9LVWXUQHGRQ$OVRLWLVGLVSOD\HGZKLOH9)&+$5EXWWRQLVSUHVVHG
(20) OAC Indicator

'LVSOD\VZKHQ2$&*8,'(0$5.LVVHWWR21LQWKH0HQXVHWWLQJ 9,'(2$'-8670(17ĺ237,&$/
$%(55$7,21&255
2$& 'LVSOD\VIRUVHFRQGVZKHQWKHDEHUUDWLRQFRUUHFWLRQYDOXHLVSURSHUO\UHFHLYHGIURPWKHVHULDOOHQV7KHGLVSOD\FRQWLQXHV
WRÀDVKZKHQHLWKHURI=,)LVGLVSOD\HG$OVRLWLVGLVSOD\HGZKLOH9)&+$5EXWWRQLVSUHVVHG
2$&
= )ODVKHVZKHQWKH]RRPSRVLWLRQLQIRUPDWLRQRIWKHOHQVLVQRWOLQNHGQRUPDOO\3OHDVHPRYHWKH]RRP
2$&
, )ODVKHVZKHQWKHLULVSRVLWLRQLQIRUPDWLRQRIWKHOHQVLVQRWOLQNHGQRUPDOO\3OHDVHPRYHWKHLULV
2$&
) )ODVKHVZKHQWKHIRFXVSRVLWLRQLQIRUPDWLRQRIWKHOHQVLVQRWOLQNHGQRUPDOO\3OHDVHPRYHWKHIRFXV
26 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ Auto Setup Display
ABB 1 Auto setup function
O K 2 Execution result of auto setup

BLKSET
2
3 Adjustment item of auto setup
NAME and FUNCTION

(1) Auto setup function
Executing auto setup function is displayed.
³$:%´
³$%%´
“FULL SETUP”
“LEVEL SETUP” etc.
(2) Execution result of auto setup

([HFXWLRQUHVXOWRIDXWRVHWXS $:%DQG$%%LQFOXGLQJ LVGLVSOD\HG
2. $XWRVHWXSKDVEHHQFRPSOHWHG
1* $XWRVHWXSZDVQRWFRPSOHWHG
6723 $XWRVHWXSZDVGLVFRQWLQXHG
/(9(/29(5 ,QSXWVLJQDOOHYHOLVWRRKLJK
/(9(/81'(5 ,QSXWVLJQDOOHYHOLVWRRORZ
&+*),/7(5 2SWLFDO¿OWHULVQRWDSSURSULDWH
(3) Adjustment item of auto setup

The item to which adjustment is being made is displayed during auto setup.
³)/$5(*$00$*$,1´
“PED”
“IRIS” etc.
■ Return Video Channel Display
RE T-1 Return video input channel
- Return video input channel

Displays the selected channel of the return video signals..
5(7 5HWXUQYLGHRLVVHOHFWHG
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 27

2.3 CCU-430
2.3 CCU-430
CCU-430 Name and Function of the front display (with cover fitted)
Tally display indicator 2 4 Cable status indicator
ID display 1 6 Alarm indicator
5 CCU status indicators


7 AC line fuses for transmitting
CAM
CCU
GENLOCK APC SDI
power to the camera
OPT RX LEVEL indicators 3 POWER
9 INTERCOM control
PHONE
MIC PRV OPE
ON
OFF
12 Power indicator
Intercom headset connector 8 PTT
COM OFF
USB
INIT/PM CALL 14 CCU power switch
INIT/PM switch 15 13 Camera power switch

Call switch 16 10 Menu switch
17 USB connector
Menu control switch 11


CAM GENLOCK APC SDI
CCU
POWER
PHONE
MIC PRV OPE
ON
OFF
PTT
COM OFF
USB
INIT/PM CALL
(1) ID display
Displays camera program number.
,WLVVHWLQWKH3*012LWHPXQGHUWKH&21),*85$7,21SDJHRQWKH&&8PHQX
'LVSOD\VDVHWWLQJYDOXHRIIRU&$03*01R
(2) TALLY indicators

7KH7$//<LQGLFDWRUGLVSOD\V5HGWDOO\*UHHQWDOO\DQG<HOORZWDOO\
57$//</LJKWVZKHQWKH57$//<VLJQDOLVLQSXWWRWKH7$//<,1FRQQHFWRURQWKHUHDURIWKH&&8,WDOVR
OLJKWVZKLOHWKH&$//EXWWRQRQWKHFDPHUDRURQDQ\FRQWUROSDQHO VXFKDV2&30&3DQG5&3 LV
pressed.
*7$//</LJKWVZKHQWKH*7$//<VLJQDOLVLQSXWWRWKH7$//<,1FRQQHFWRURQWKHUHDURIWKH&&8
<7$//</LJKWVZKHQWKH<7$//<VLJQDOLVLQSXWWRWKH7$//<,1FRQQHFWRURQWKHUHDURIWKH&&8
28 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

2.3 CCU-430
(3) OPT RX LEVEL indicators

OPT RX LEVEL &$0RIWKHRSWLFDOUHFHLYHUOHYHOLQGLFDWRULQGLFDWHVWKHUHFHSWLRQVWDWXVRIWKHFDPHUDVLGH
CAM and "CCU" indicates the reception status of the CCU side.
CCU
Lighting Status Light Reception Status

5<O*U*U OK Optical signal reception status is good. 2
ƔƔżż
5<O*U*U $77(17,21 The optical reception level is low.
NAME and FUNCTION

ƔżżƔ $OWKRXJKWKHUHLVQRSUREOHPZLWKWKHUHFHSWLRQRIVLJQDOVWUDQVPLWWHGFOHDQLQJWKH¿EHUFRQQHFWRU
may be required, unless attenuation is due to very long cable length.
5<O*U*U :$51,1* The optical reception level is very low.
ƔżƔƔ 7KHUHPLJKWEHDSUREOHPZLWKWKHUHFHSWLRQRIVLJQDOVWUDQVPLWWHG,PPHGLDWHFOHDQLQJWKH¿EHU
connector is recommended.
5<O*U*U 1* The optical cannot be received.
żƔƔƔ 7KHUHLVDSUREOHPZLWKWKHUHFHSWLRQRIVLJQDOVWUDQVPLWWHG&OHDQLQJWKH¿EHUFRQQHFWRULV
required; or replace the cable since the camera cable might be broken.
ż Ɣ
( : ON/ : OFF)
(4) Cable status indicators
CABLE STATUS The indicator that displays the status of the Hybrid Optic Camera Cable status.
3RZHULVVXSSOLHGIURPWKH&&8WRWKH&DPHUDRQO\ZKHQWKH1250$/OLJKWLVRQ
NORMAL OPEN SHORT * Please check the camera cable status when OPEN or SHORT lights are on.
1250$/ JUHHQ ,WOLJKWVZKHQWKH+\EULG)LEHU2SWLF&DPHUD&DEOHLVQRUPDO

23(1 UHG ,WOLJKWVZKHQWKH+\EULG)LEHU2SWLF&DPHUD&DEOHLVQRWFRQQHFWHGRULVEURNHQ
6+257 UHG ,WOLJKWVZKHQWKHSRZHUOLQHRI¿EHUFDEOHLVGDPDJHGRUWKHFRQQHFWRUMRLQWSDUWKDVJURXQGLQJIDXOW
due to water.
(5) CCU status indicators

CCU STATUS *(1/2&. JUHHQ /LJKWVXSZKHQWKHSURSHUV\QFKURQRXVFRXSOLQJRFFXUUHGWRDQ
H[WHUQDOV\QFKURQL]LQJVLJQDOWKDWZDVLQSXWWRWKH&&8
GENLOCK APC SDI $3& JUHHQ /LJKWVZKHQWKHSKDVHV\QFKURQL]DWLRQEHWZHHQWKHFDPHUDDQG
the CCU is in normal status.
6', JUHHQ /LJKWVZKHQWKHGDWDWUDQVPLVVLRQWKH&&8LVQRUPDOO\UHFHLYHG
from the camera.
(6) Alarm indicator

&200 UHG /LJKWVZKHQDQDEQRUPDOLW\LVIRXQGLQWKHGDWDFRPPXQLFDWLRQ
ALARM
7(03 UHG /LJKWVZKHQWKHWHPSHUDWXUHRIWKH&&8LVDEQRUPDOO\KLJK
COMM TEMP FAN )$1 UHG /LJKWVZKHQWKHPRWRUIDQ IDQIRUFRROLQJ LQWKH&&8SRZHUVXSSO\LV
stopped. (*2)
Caution :
,IWKH7(03DODUPLVWXUQHGRQLPPHGLDWHO\VWRSWKHRSHUDWLRQRIWKH&&8DQGFKHFNLIWKHYHQWKROHLQWKHIURQWDQGWKHH[KDXVW
hole in the back are not clogged with dust, etc.
,IWKH)$1DODUPOLJKWVXSVWRSWKHRSHUDWLRQLPPHGLDWHO\DQGWXUQRIIWKHPDLQSRZHUVZLWFK
(7) AC line fuse for transmitting power to the Camera

)XVHIRU$&SRZHUOLQHWRWKH&DPHUD
Fuse to be used
97$ UDWLQJ
("T" in the rating indicates a time lag fuse.)
(8) INTERCOM HEADSET connector

Connects the intercom headset.
7KHFRQQHFWRUW\SHYDULHVGHSHQGLQJRQWKHGHVWLQDWLRQRIGHOLYHU\DQGWKHRUGHUVSHFL¿FDWLRQ
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 29

2.3 CCU-430
(9) Intercom control

3+21( $GMXVWVWKHKHDGVHWYROXPH
0,& 7XUQVRQRIIWKHKHDGVHWPLFURSKRQH7KH377VLGHLVWXUQHGRQRQO\ZKLOHLWLVSUHVVHG
359&20 6ZLWFKHVWKHVWDWXVRI,17(5&20
PRV => Intercom only enabled between CCU and camera.
COMM => Intercom enabled with the entire system.
(10) Menu switch

Controls the operation the CCU menu.
23( (QDEOHV&&8PHQXGLVSOD\RQWKH30RXWSXWV
2)) 'LVDEOHVWKHPHQXGLVSOD\RQWKH30RXWSXWV7KH0(18FRQWUROVZLWFKGHVFULEHGLQ LVGLVDEOHG
The menu is closed when the switch is changed from OPE to OFF while the menu is displayed.
(11) Menu control switch

The Menu switch presses the Menu control switch for 3 seconds on the "OPE" side , the CCU The
MENU menu is displayed on the the PM OUT (monitor output).
OPE While checking the picture monitor outputs, turn the knob of the Menu control switch to move the
FXUVRU7KHQSUHVVWKH0HQXFRQWUROVZLWFKLQWKHRSHUDWLRQLWHPWRFRQ¿UP
OFF
Menu switch
Menu control switch
(12) Power indicator (green)

POWER The Power indicator displays the power supply statuses of the Camera and CCU.
CAM CCU Each lights (green) when power is supplied to the corresponding unit.
(13) Camera power switch

$VZLWFKXVHGWRVXSSO\SRZHUWRWKH&DPHUD
:KHQLWLVVHWWR21$&YROWDJHLVVXSSOLHG6HWWKLVVZLWFKWR21ZKHQRSHUDWLQJLQWKH)LEHU6LQJOHPRGH
:KHQLWLVVHWWR2))WKHVWDQGE\SRZHUVXSSO\RI$&9LVVXSSOLHG
(14) CCU power switch

ON/OFF switch for CCU power supply.
21 3RZHULVVXSSOLHGWRWKH&&8$OVRVWDQGE\SRZHULVVXSSOLHGZKHQWKH3RZHUVZLWFKRIWKH&DPHUDLVVHWWR2))
2)) 6WRSVSRZHUWRWKH&&8
Caution:
,I\RXWXUQRIIWKHSRZHUVZLWFKDQGWKHQWXUQLWRQDJDLQZDLWIRUVHFRQGVEHIRUHWXUQLQJLWRQ
(15) INIT/PM switch

INIT/PM switch displays and switches various information including diagnosis information (failure diagnosis) on the picture
monitor output.
(16) Call button

7KH57$//<LQGLFDWRUVIRUWKH&DPHUDDQGFRQWUROSDQHOVOLJKWRQO\ZKLOHWKLVEXWWRQLVSUHVVHG
%X]]HUVRXQGVLIWKHGHYLFHKDVDEX]]HU
(17) USB connector

7KH86%FRQQHFWRULVXVHGWR¿OHRSHUDWLRQV
30 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

2.3 CCU-430
Names and Functions of CCU-430 Front Inside Part (Cover Removed)

This section describes the modules mounted with the front cover of the CCU-430 removed.
■ Name of Module
NAME and FUNCTION

1 HD_VP module 2 TRX_VP module 4 PLS/AUX module 3 RET_PRC module
. module holder
(1) HD_VP module
This module is optional.
HD video signal processing is performed with down converter output or CUT OUT output.
(2) TRX_VP module

Performs 4K video signal processing.
(3) RET_PRC module

3HUIRUPVSURFHVVLQJRIUHWXUQYLGHRVLJQDOVDQGYLHZ¿QGHUYLGHRVLJQDOV
(4) PLS/AUX module

3HUIRUPVSURFHVVLQJRIV\QFKURQL]DWLRQVLJQDOVDQGLQWHUFRPDQGDXGLRVLJQDOV
Caution:
%HVXUHWKHPRGXOHVWRSSHULVDOZD\VLQVWDOOHGH[FHSWZKHQUHSODFLQJWKHPRGXOH
7KHVZLWFKHVLQVLGHWKHPRGXOHYDULDEOHUHVLVWRUDQG/('LQGLFDWRUDUHXVHGGXULQJVHUYLFHLPSOHPHQWDWLRQNever change the
settings when using a general specification.
6RPHPRGXOHVDUHFRQQHFWHGZLWKRSWLFDOFDEOHVIURPWKHPDLQXQLWRIWKH&&8So please do not take it out the module
unless you need to replace it. Otherwise, it may cause problems.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 31

2.3 CCU-430
Names and Functions of CCU-430 (Back)

■ Names of CCU-430 (Back)
15 HD RETURN IN 12 SDI OUT-3, 4
2 Main power 1 Fan motor 5 Camera Connector 6 Option area Return video input connector HD video output connector (option)
switch 13 SDI OUT-1, 2 (The output configuration may be changed due to the change in specifications.)
Main line output connector 14 Gigabit ETHERNET TRUNK connector
SDI-OUTPUT-3 SDI-OUTPUT-4
*** CAMERA
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
HD_OUT
1 2 3 4 1 2 4
GbE TRK VP_OUT
HD RETURN IN HD QTV IN MON OUTPUT

16 HD QTV video input connector
HD TRK OUT
17 HD TRUNK OUT connector

1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
RET_MON
18 MONI OUT connector
REFERENCE LAN OCP CSU
22 CSU connector
MPU
21 OCP connector
AES OUT SYNC OUT DATA TRK-1 TALLY OUT COMMUNICATION I/F REMOTE SYS_IF
25 COMMUNICATION
4 Ground terminal AUDIO OUT 1, 2 7 10 DATA TRUNK connector 23 REMOTE connector
connector 19 REFERENCE I/F connector 24
3 AC inlet connector 20 LAN connector
AES OUT connector 8 9 SYNC OUT
connector 11 TALLY OUT connector
Caution:
The connectors on the back include optional contents. The module to be inserted may be different (could be not inserted) depending on
\RXUVSHFL¿FDWLRQV,QWKLVGRFXPHQWWKHPRGXOH RXWSXWVORW WKDWRXWSXWV+'YLGHRLQVLPXOWDQHRXVRSHUDWLRQVLVLQVHUWHG
■ Function of CCU-430 (Back)

(1) Fan motor
Fan motor to cool inside of the CCU.
(2) Main power switch

Main switch for CCU power supplies.
(3) AC inlet
$&LQOHWXVHGWRLQSXW$&WR9$&DQGWR9$&FRPPHUFLDOSRZHUVXSSO\WR&&8
(4) Ground terminal

$IUDPHJURXQGWHUPLQDOIRU&&8
It is connected to the housing rack frame of the CCU-430.
(5) Camera Connector

&RQQHFWVWKH&&8DQGWKHFDPHUDZLWKDK\EULGRSWLFDO¿EHUFDPHUDFDEOH
It supplies power to the camera, in addition, it sends and receives various data including main line video signals and communication
commands, etc.
(6) Option area

$SDQHOIRUVSHFLDOVSHFL¿FDWLRQ
(7) Audio OUT (Analog) connector 1, 2

2XWSXWVWKHDXGLRVLJQDOVWKDWKDYHEHHQLQSXWWRWKH0,& $8',2,1 FRQQHFWRUVRIWKHFDPHUD
(8) AES OUT Digital audio output connector

2XWSXWVWKHDXGLRVLJQDOVWKDWKDYHEHHQLQSXWWRWKH0,& $8',2,1 FRQQHFWRUVRIWKHFDPHUD7KHVLJQDOVDUHFRPSOLDQW
ZLWK$(6(%8IRUPDW
(9) SYNC OUT (Synchronization signal output)connector

2XWSXWVWKHVLJQDOVIRUH[WHUQDOGHYLFHV\QFKURQL]DWLRQ 7ULOHYHOV\QF
(10) Data trunk connector

This is a connector for RS-422 signal transmission between camera and CCU. (Channel #1)
(11) TALLY output connector

2XWSXWWKH7$//<287VLJQDOVWKDWDUHXVHGIRUPRQLWRUVHWF
32 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

2.3 CCU-430
(12) SDI OUT (HD video output)- 3, 4 connector

Outputs two HD signals.
(13) SDI OUT (Main line video output)- 1, 2 connector

Outputs two 4K/HD video signals.
(14) Gigabit ETHERNET TRUNK connectors

7KHFRQQHFWRUIRU*LJDELW(WKHUQHWOLQHEHWZHHQWKHFDPHUDDQGWKH&&8
2
(15) HD RETURN IN (Return video input) connectors
Inputs return signals to the Camera.
NAME and FUNCTION

,I$&7,9(7+528*+LVXVHGWKHUHWXUQYLGHRVLJQDOVDUHLQSXWWHGE\WZRV\VWHPV &+DQG&+ DQGRXWSXWWHGE\WZRV\VWHPV
(CH2 and CH4).
(16) HD QTV IN connectors

Inputs the HD-SDI QTV, SMPTE 292M, video signal (for promter) to be sent to the camera.
(17) HD TRUNK OUT connector

It outputs the HD-SDI TRUNK signal from the camera.
(18) MON OUTPUT (Monitor video output) connector

Connects to the picture monitor (PM), etc.
7KH30RXWSXWVXSHULPSRVHVWKHFKDUDFWHUVRI&&80(18DQG',$*1267,&,1)250$7,217KH9)RXWSXWLVDYLGHRVHQWWR
WKHYLHZ¿QGHURIWKHFDPHUD7KH30RXWSXWDQG9)RXWSXWFDQEHDVVLJQHGWRHDFKRIOLQHV
(19) REFERENCE (Synchronization signal) connector

It inputs the V\QFKURQL]DWLRQVLJQDO +'79WULOHYHO6<1&RU6'799%6%%6
/RRSWKURXJKFRQQHFWLRQ EULGJHFRQQHFWLRQ LVSRVVLEOHDQGDȍWHUPLQDWRULVUHTXLUHG
(20) LAN connector (Ethernet RJ45 (8P8C)

Connects the network compatible remote controller via HUB.
(21) OCP connector

Used to connect CCU and OCP. They are connected with a CP cable.
Equivalent to CSU connector mentioned in (22), and possible to connect to CSU.
(22) CSU connector

Connects CSU with a CP cable.
Equivalent to CSU connector mentioned in (21), and possible to connect to CSU.
(23) REMOTE connector

This is a connector used to externally control the microphone volume of the camera.
(24) I/F connector

)XQFWLRQVLQFOXGLQJ'$7$7581.&DPHUD3RZHULQGLFDWRURXWSXW35(9,(:RXWSXWDUHDVVLJQHG
(25) Communication connector

,QSXWVRXWSXWV,17(5&20DQG7$//<,WDOVRLQSXWV3*0
Refrence:
Refer to Chapter 9 for terminal sequences of a connector for external connection and terminal functions.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 33

UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)
INSTALLATION 3
and CONNECTION
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)
3.1 Preparation
3.1 Preparation
Product Use
Please read “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” described at the beginning of this manual for precautions on use of this product.
Make sure the Power Switch is OFF

Be sure the Power switch is turned off before connecting this product (camera and CCU) to peripherals.
CCU Rear View 3

*** CAMERA
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
HD_OUT
Main power switch 1 2 3 4 1 2 4

GbE TRK VP_OUT
HD RETURN IN HD QTV IN HD TRK OUT MON OUTPUT
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
RET_MON
AC power input
MPU
connector
Check the Main Power switch is turned off.
CCU Front View


CAM GENLOCK APC SDI
CCU
POWER
POWER
CAM CCU
PHONE
MIC PRV OPE
ON
OFF
PTT
COM OFF
USB
INIT/PM CALL
CCU power switch

Camera power switch
Check the CCU POWER switch on the front and the

camera POWER switch are turned off.
Camera Right View
Power switch
INCOM/ND FILTER
CCU
HEAD
F1
F2
PGM/CC VF
CHAR
MIC
OFF
MENU
EXIT
CCU
OFF
EXT
POWER
POWER
Check the camera power switch is turned off.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 37

3.2 Connecting the Power Cable and Camera Cable
3.2 Connecting the Power Cable and Camera Cable

Connecting the AC Power Cable to the CCU
AC cable
Ground 1 Connect the AC cable to the AC INPUT connector on the
terminal rear of the CCU.
2 Insert the AC plug into the power outlet.
CAUTION
Do not turn on the main power switch.
AC cable
3 Connect the grounding terminal on the housing rack
using a ground wire.
Ground
terminal
To the ground
To the AC outlet
Note:
,IDJURXQGLQJOLQHLVSURYLGHGDWWKH$&RXWOHWWKHJURXQGLQJWHUPLQDOGRHVQRWQHHGWREHFRQQHFWHG
Caution:
Be sure the power supply voltage for the device operating region and the input power voltage settings of CCU are correct. For details,
UHIHUWR³6$)(7<35(&$87,216´
Connecting the Optical fiber Cable to the CCU

Refer to "3.4 Connecting the CCU and Camera"IRUKRZWRFRQQHFWWKH¿EHUFDEOHWRWKHFDPHUD
*** CAMERA
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
HD_OUT
1 2 3 4 1 2 4
GbE TRK VP_OUT
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
RET_MON
MPU
Ground
wire
AC cable
Fiber cable
38 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

3.3 Connecting the CCU and Camera Head
3.3 Camera and Peripheral Installation and Connection

Mounting/Removing the Camera on/from the Tripod
■ Mounting the Camera on the Tripod

This section explains how to install the camera on the tripod. There are various types of tripods depending on the application and
purpose. See the user's manual of your tripod for details on the tripod. This section is based on using a VIDEO-18 as an example.
1 Loosen the fixing knob and extend the tripod legs.

$GMXVWWKHKHLJKWWRVXLW\RXUSUHIHUHQFHV
Tripod 3
1, 2:
Lock the legs after

adjusting the
height
2 Check the level gauge on the pan head, and adjust
the ball mount for a level head.
Fixing knob
3 Check that the Tilt lock and Pan lock are secured.
If the locks are not secured or loose, tighten them.
Caution: Tilt lock
%HVXUHWRWLJKWHQWKH¿[LQJNQREEHIRUHPRXQWLQJWKLV Pan lock
product on the tripod.
If the tripod is not stable, the camera may fall off when
mounting, resulting in damages or injury. 3：
Make sure the
tikt lock and
pan lock are
locked.
4 Attach the tripod plate to the pan head. Insert the Camera right view
edge of the rear wedge of the camera into the slot
on the mounting plate.
Push it toward the rear, to hook the edge. INCOM/ND FILTER
HEAD
F1
F2
PGM/CC VF
CHAR
MIC
MENU
CCU
OFF
EXT
POWER
Camera front wedge

Camera
rear wedge
Insert the
camera wedges.
Mount plate
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 39

5 Lower the camera front wedge into its slot, and

tighten the lock lever to fix the camera.
7XUQLWXQWLO\RXKHDUDFOLFN<RXKHDUDFOLFNZKHQWKH
lock lever is locked.
6 Secure the camera on the tripod so that it does not Lock

rattle. Lock lever
5：Tighten the lock lever to fix the camera.
Caution:
If the camera and tripod rattle, the camera may fall off,
resulting in damages or injury. Camera right view
&DXVHVRIUDWWOLQJPD\LQFOXGH/RRVHORFNOHYHU
abnormality in the front/back edge, mounting brackets,
and tripod.
$OVRFKHFNLIWKHVKDSHRIWKHWULSRGPRXQWLQJSODWHLV
okay.
Tilt lock
7 Loosen the Tilt lock and Pan lock to adjust the tilt
Pan lock
and direction of the camera.
The friction is less when the Pan brake and Tilt brake
are turned to the direction with a small number, so the
camera moves smoothly. On the other hand, the friction 7：Loosen the Tilt lock and Pan lock to
adjust the tilt and angle orientation
is greater when they are turned to the direction with a of the camera.
big number, so the camera does not rotate easily.
8 When the tilt and angle orientation of the camera

is determined, tighten the Tilt lock and Pan lock to
secure it.
Pan brake
Tilte brake
01234567
Loosen Tighten
8：Tighten the Tilt lock and Pan lock
to secure it.
40 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ Dismounting the Camera from the Tripod

This section explains how to dismount the camera from a tripod.
1 Press the red button on the lock lever to release the lock.
Be sure to hold the camera handle when dismounting so that the camera does not fall.
2 Slightly lift the front part of the camera and push it forward to remove the rear edge. Then, lift the camera to
dismount from the tripod.
Camera right view 3

INCOM/ND
FILTER
HEAD

F1
F2
PGM/CC
VF
CHAR
MIC
MENU
CCU
OFF
EXT
POWER
OK 2 ! X
1
Mount plate
Caution:
If you try to pull the camera towards the back without removing the rear edge, the camera wedge or tripod plate may be
GDPDJHG7RGLVPRXQWWKHFDPHUDEHVXUHWRUHOHDVHWKHORFNOHYHU¿UVW DQGSXVKWKHIURQWSDUWRIWKHFDPHUDIRUZDUGWR
remove the rear wedge, and then lift the camera to dismount (2)
.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 41

Mounting and Removing the Lens
■ Mounting the Lens

This section explains how to mount the lens to the camera.
3ODFHWKHFDPHUDRQWKHWULSRGRULQDVWDEOHDQGKRUL]RQWDOSRVLWLRQZKHQPRXQWLQJWKHOHQV
$OVRWKHOHQVPRXQWRIWKHFDPHUDLVFRPSDWLEOHZLWKWKH%7$PRXQWV\VWHP
1 Lift the Lens lock lever and remove the lens cap in
advance.
2 Align and horizontally insert the pin of the lens into

the notch of the camera lens mount.
3 Push down the Lens lock
Put a hand on the lens to prevent it from falling. lever to secure the lens.
3 Secure the lens to the camera.

Push down the Lens lock lever to secure the lens to the
camera.
2 Align and insert it into the notch.
4 Connect the pigtail cable to the lens connector.

The pigtail cable is automatically locked when it is
aligned with the connector pin and pushed in.
5 Secure it to the cable clamp.
5 Secure the pigtail cable to the cable clamp so the

cable is properly positioned.
Caution:
Do not hold and carry the entire camera by the housing
SDUWRIWKHOHQV$EQRUPDOIRUFHRQWKHOHQVPRXQWPD\
cause failure.
4 Connect the pigtail cable.
42 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ Removing the Lens

This section explains how to remove the lens from the camera.
3ODFHWKHFDPHUDRQWKHWULSRGRULQDVWDEOHDQGKRUL]RQWDOSRVLWLRQZKHQUHPRYLQJWKHOHQV
1 Remove the pigtail cable from the lens connector.

Pull on the connector ring of the pigtail cable to release
the lock and remove the connector.
5 Remove the pigtail cable
from the cable clamp.

4 Remove the pigtail cable.
2 Remove the lens from the camera.

Push down the Lens lock lever and remove the lens
IURPWKHOHQVPRXQWRIWKHFDPHUDLQDKRUL]RQWDO
direction.
Put a hand on the lens to prevent it from falling.
3 Push up the Lens lock lever
to remove the lens.
3 Remove the pigtail cable from the cable clamp.
4 Attach the lens cap at the lens opening when no

lens is mounted.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 43

Mounting and Removing the Viewfinder
■ Mounting the Viewfinder

7KLVVHFWLRQH[SODLQVKRZWRPRXQWWKHYLHZ¿QGHU 9)/'
1 Check the Power switch of the camera is turned Tilt the eyepiece
upward 90 degrees
off.
If the POWER switch of the camera is set to "CCU" VF lock mount
or "EXT", set it to "OFF".
VF lock knob
2 To attach the viewfinder from the left side of the

camera, stand up the eyepiece at a 90 degree
angle. Slide rail
Insert the Slide rail of the viewfinder into the VF
lock mount on the handle.
Retaining pin guide lever
Slide it to the right until you hear a click. When it is
locked by the lock pin of the guide, you hear a click.
VF front-back lock lever
3 Connect the VF cable to the VF connector on VF movement direction
the camera handle.

$OLJQWKHFRQQHFWRUDQGLQVHUWLWXQWLOKHDUDFOLFN
VF connector
When it is locked by the connector latches, you hear
a click.
Caution:
%HFDUHIXOQRWWRFDWFK\RXU¿QJHUVLQWKH/RFN
OHYHURU*XLGH5DLOZKHQDWWDFKLQJWKHYLHZ¿QGHU
you may get injured.
VF fixing lock knob VF front-back lock lever
■ Adjusting the position of the viewfinder (left and right, back and forth)
1 Loosen the "VF lock knob" and hold and slide the VF left and right to adjust the position of the viewfinder. After
determining the desired position, tighten the "VF lock knob" to fix the VF.
2 Loosen the "VF front-back lock lever" and hold and slide the VF back and forth to adjust the position of the
viewfinder. After determining the desired position, tighten the "VF front-back lock lever" to fix the VF.
Caution:
When adjusting the VF left and right, adjust it with the "Retaining Pin" engaged. If the left and right adjustment is performed
without the "Retaining Pin" engaged, the VF may fall off
44 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ Removing the Viewfinder

1 Check the power of the camera is turned off.
2 Remove the VF connector.
3 Loosen the VF fixing knob.
4 Slide the VF retaining guide lever and release the lock of the lock pin. Then, slide the viewfinder to remove it.
Turn the eyepiece 90 degrees and stand it up when removing the viewfinder, so that you can remove it easily.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 45

Adjust the eypiece position of viewfinder
■ Adjusting the Angle of Eyepiece

Move the eyepiece to adjust the position so that you can
FRPIRUWDEO\VHHWKHYLHZ¿QGHUVFUHHQ7KHH\HSLHFHFDQEH
rotated up to 160 degrees upward and 90 degrees downward.
$GMXVWWKHDQJOHLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHFDPHUDDQJOH
Adjust the angle to upward and downward.
■ Removing the Eyepiece

This section explains how to remove the eyepiece.
1 Pull the eyepiece release lever and turn the

Pull
eyepiece in the direction of arrow.

The lock of the eyepiece is released.
Eyepiece release lever

2 Pull out the eyepiece.
■ Attaching the Eyepiece

This section explains how to attach the eyepiece.
1 Align △ mark on the viewfinder with △ mark on

the eyepiece, and the eyepiece.
2 Turn the eyepiece in the direction of arrow.

Turn it until you hear a click. mark
<RXKHDUDFOLFNZKHQWKHH\HSLHFHLVORFNHG
46 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

Attaching a Microphone
The camera supports connection of two microphones (MIC-1 and MIC-2), depending on the application.
7KLVVHFWLRQH[SODLQVKRZWRDWWDFKDPLFURSKRQHWRWKHPLFURSKRQHKROGHURQWKHYLHZ¿QGHU
Note:
The microphone holder is optional.
1 Check if a microphone holder is attached Microphone

holder Screw
to the viewfinder.
If a microphone holder is not attached,
attach the holder to the microphone holder
PRXQWRQWKHYLHZ¿QGHU
3

2 Loosen the microphone fixing screw on
2 Open the microphone holder
the microphone holder to open it.
3 Put the microphone in the opened Open

microphone holder and tighten the screw
Close
to secure it in place.
4 Connect the microphone cable to the

MIC-1 connector on the back of the
camera.
(Same for the MIC-2 connector.)
5 Secure the microphone cable with the

cable clamps to remove any slack.
Reference:
The power supply method is different depending on the types of the microphone used. Please refer to "Chapter 4 :
OPERATION" "4.2 Switch Position Check" (P. 60) for switching the power supply.
$OVRUHIHUWRWKHRSHUDWLRQPDQXDORI\RXUPLFURSKRQHIRUPRUHLQIRUPDWLRQRQWKHPLFURSKRQH
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 47

Connecting Headsets
7KHLQWHUFRPV\VWHPRIWKLVSURGXFW FDPHUDDQG&&8 LQFOXGHVWZRLQWHUFRPOLQHV (1*DQG352'
3OHDVHVHOHFWHLWKHURUERWKRIWKHLQWHUFRPFKDQQHOVGHSHQGLQJRQ\RXUDSSOLFDWLRQ7KLVVHFWLRQH[SODLQVWKHFDVHZKHUHWKH(1*
channel is used.
■ Connect a the Headset to the CCU

Turn the INTERCOM PHONE control to set the volume at minimum level, and take the headset off your ears.


CAM GENLOCK APC SDI
CCU
INTERCOM control POWER

PHONE
MIC PRV OPE
ON
OFF
INTERCOM connector PTT
COM OFF
USB
INIT/PM CALL
48 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■Connecting a Headset to the Camera

1 Connect a headset to the INTERCOM-1 connector.
2 Set the INTERCOM-1 TALK selector switch to "ENG".

Camera rear view
3
3 4 3 4
ON ON
OFF 2 2 OFF
DIM DIM
1 1
INCOM SEL
REAR
INCOM 1 INCOM 2
FRONT FRONT
INCOM INCOM
PGM 1 PGM 2 PGM 1 PGM 2

ON PROD ON PROD
OFF BOTH OFF BOTH
PTT ENG PTT ENG

GL IN/SYNC OUT
INTERCOM connector
Enlarged View of Rear Operation Panel
DC OUT 12V 1A
SDI OUT 1 SDI OUT 2 SDI OUT 3 SDI I/O 4
2 Set the switch to "ENG".

+12V
OFF
+48V +12V
OFF
+48V
USB REMOTE
1 Connect the headsets
TRACKER
DC-IN 11~17V
connector to the INTERCOM
MIC 1 MIC 2
GbE TRK connector.
INCOM SEL
REAR
INCOM 1 INCOM 2
FRONT FRONT
INCOM INCOM
PGM1 PGM2 PGM1 PGM2

ON PROD ON PROD
OFF BOTH OFF BOTH
PTT ENG PTT ENG
INTERCOM 1 INTERCOM 2 Headset
Caution:
Ensure that the volume is initially set at a minimum level.
Note:
7KH,17(5&20FRQQHFWRUVDUHFRPSDWLEOHZLWK;/5VHULHVRULQFKW\SHSKRQHMDFNE\WKHVSHFL¿FDWLRQVDWWKHWLPHRI
delivery.
Caution:
Do not set the volume of intercom receiver to near maximum level from the beginning. Using the headset with loud volume
may cause a ruptured or damaged eardrum.
Reference:
$GMXVWWKHYROXPHZKHQWKHVRXQGIURPWKHLQWHUFRPUHFHLYHULVGLI¿FXOWWRKHDURUWRRORXG6HH“Chapter 5 : CAMERA
SETTINGS and ADJUSTMENT" "Adjusting Headset Volume” (P. 79) for the audio volume adjustment of intercom.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 49

Attaching a Shoulder Belt

The camera includes hooks to attach a shoulder belt. Please use the shoulder belt depending on your operating conditions.
1 Press the upper part of the shoulder belt tab to

1 Open the attachment.
2 Attach the shoulder belt.
open the attachment.
2 With the attachment open, align the hole in the Push
attachment with the camera shoulder belt hook

(right side rear, left side front), and pull the The attachment opens.
shoulder belt upwards. Shoulder belt
Hole
hook
Check the shoulder belt attachments are securely
attached to the shoulder belt hooks. Camera left view
Caution:
If the shoulder belt attachments are not securely INCOM/ND FILTER
HEAD
attached to the shoulder belt hooks, the camera may PGM/CC

F1
F2
VF
CHAR
fall, resulting in damages or injury.

MIC
MENU
CCU
OFF
EXT
POWER
50 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

Connecting a Monitor to the Camera

There are four connectors on the camera to output various image signals. The video output signal from each connector can be
independently set. The setting of the output video signals is performed in the Menu. One of four lines is used for video output or
video input. Switching is performed in the Menu.
■ I/O connector
- SDI OUT 1
- SDI OUT 2
- SDI OUT 3
- SDI-I/O 4
3
■ I/O video signal
9) 2XWSXWVWKHVDPHYLGHRVLJQDOVDVWKHYLHZ¿QGHU

021, 2XWSXWVWKHPRQLWRUYLGHRVLJQDOV
5(7 2XWSXWVWKHUHWXUQYLGHRVLJQDO
479 2XWSXWV479YLGHRVLJQDOV
479 2XWSXWV479YLGHRVLJQDOV
5(76(/ 2XWSXWVWKHUHWXUQYLGHRVLJQDOVVHOHFWHGE\³5(7VHOHFWRUVZLWFK´RQWKHEDFNVLGHRIWKHFDPHUD
+'7581. ,QSXWVWKH+'6',VLJQDOV7KHLQSXWVLJQDOVDUHRXWSXWWHGIURPWKH+'7581.FRQQHFWRURI&&8
Note:
+'7581.FDQEHDVVLJQHGWR6',,2RQO\7KHLQSXWVLJQDOVQHHGWREHV\QFKURQL]HGZLWKWKHV\VWHPDQGORFNHG
■ Example
- When QTV signals are outputted to SDI OUT 1
- When used as external video signals in SDI I/O 4

3 4 3 4
ON ON
OFF 2 2 OFF
DIM DIM
1 1
INCOM SEL
REAR
INCOM 1 INCOM 2
FRONT FRONT
INCOM INCOM

ON PROD ON PROD
OFF BOTH OFF BOTH
PTT ENG PTT ENG
GL IN/SYNC OUT
DC OUT 12V 1A
OFF OFF USB REMOTE

+12V +48V +12V +48V
TRACKER
DC-IN 11~17V
GbE TRK
MIC 1 MIC 2
External video signal input
75Ω termination
Video signal
output
HD-SDI input H LM905W C S H D
HD monitor
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 51

3.4 Connecting the CCU and Camera

Connecting the Camera Cable (Fiber Cable)
Camera rear view CCU rear view
*** CAMERA Camera connector

3 4 3 4
ON ON
OFF 2 2 OFF
DIM DIM
1 1
INCOM SEL
REAR
INCOM 1 INCOM 2
FRONT FRONT
INCOM INCOM

ON PROD ON PROD
OFF BOTH OFF BOTH
PTT ENG PTT ENG
GL IN/SYNC OUT
DC OUT 12V 1A
OFF OFF USB REMOTE

+12V +48V +12V +48V AES OUT SYNC OUT DATA TRK-1 TALLY
TRACKER
DC-IN 11~17V
GbE TRK
MIC 1 MIC 2
Camera connector
Fiber cable
1 Connect the CAMERA connector on the back of the CCU and the CAMERA connector on the back of the camera
with a fiber cable (hybrid fiber camera cable).
Caution:
- The camera cable has a male plug connector on one end and a female socket connector on the other end. Be sure to connect
the female plug connector to the camera and the female socket connector to the CCU.
6HFXUHWKH¿EHUFDEOH K\EULG¿EHUFDPHUDFDEOH ZLWKWKH&$0(5$&$%/(FODPSRQWKHFDPHUDWRUHGXFHVWUHVV6HH
³6$)(7<35(&$87,216´GHVFULEHGDWWKHEHJLQQLQJRIWKLVPDQXDOIRUKRZWRVHFXUHWKHFDEOHZLWKWKHFDEOHFODPSDQG
KRZWRKDQGOHWKH¿EHUFDEOH
Cable clamp Cable clamp

(option)
RET-1 RET-2
/MIC
Fiber cable
52 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

Removing the Fiber Cable

7KLVVHFWLRQH[SODLQVKRZWRUHPRYHWKHFDPHUDFDEOH ¿EHUFDEOH
Caution:
:KHQ\RXUHPRYHWKHFDEOHEHVXUHWRKROGWKHSOXJDQGSXOO)DLOXUHWRGRVRPD\GDPDJHWKH¿EHULQWKHFDEOH
■ Camera
Camera rear view
LIGHT RET 1
4
RET 2
4
TALLY CALL
CAMERA connector
(socket )
3
ON 3 3 ON
OFF 2 2 OFF
DIM DIM
1 1
INCOM SEL

REAR
INCOM 1 INCOM 2
FRONT FRONT
INCOM INCOM

ON PROD ON PROD
OFF BOTH OFF BOTH
PTT ENG PTT ENG
GL IN/SYNC OUT Unlock ring
DC OUT 12V 1A
OFF OFF USB REMOTE

+12V +48V +12V +48V
Plug
TRACKER
DC-IN 11~17V
GbE TRK
MIC 1 MIC 2
Fiber cable
1 Remove the cable from the camera while pulling the unlocking ring on the fiber cable plug (female) toward you.
,IWKHFRQQHFWRULVORFNHGWKH¿EHUFDEOHFDQQRWEHUHPRYHG,ILWLVORFNHGSXVKWKH¿EHUFDEOHWRZDUGWKH&$0(5$
connector, and then remove as described above.
■ CCU
CAMERA connector
(plug)
Socket
Fiber cable
Unlock ring
2 Remove the cable from the CCU-430 while pushing the unlocking ring of the CAMERA connector on the rear of
CCU-430.
,IWKHFRQQHFWRULVORFNHGWKH¿EHUFDEOHFDQQRWEHUHPRYHG,ILWLVORFNHGSXVKWKH¿EHUFDEOHWRZDUGWKH&$0(5$
connector, and then remove as described above.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 53

3.5 System Setup Diagram

■ Basic system
MIC-1
MIC-2
Headset
INCOM/ND FILTER
HEAD
F1
F2
(ENG/PROD)
PGM/CC VF
CHAR
MIC
MENU
CCU
OFF
EXT
POWER
UHK-430 Camera
Max. 4000m
Fiber Cable
Headset
(ENG/PROD)
CCU-430
ID TALLY NORMAL
CAM
CCU
OPEN
OPT RX LEVEL
SHORT COMM
GENLOCK
TEMP
CCU STATUS
APC
FAN
SDI HD-SDI
POWER
PHONE
MIC PRV OPE
ON
OFF
PTT
COM OFF
USB
INIT/PM CALL
3G/HD-SDI
CSU-110 with SDI SELECT module (option)

CP Cable
MCP cable
HD-SDI
OCP-300 MCP-300
Multiple Camera Operation
Caution:
5HIHUWRWKHRSHUDWLRQPDQXDORI2&30&3DQG&68IRUWKHPD[LPXPOHQJWKRIWKHXVDEOH&3FDEOHDQG0&3FDEOH
7KHPD[LPXPXVDEOHOHQJWKRIWKH¿EHUFDEOHLVWKHGLVWDQFHLQWKHFDVHRIWKHVWDQGDUGFRQELQDWLRQZKLFKLVFRQQHFWHGWRD
portable lens and a 2inch VF. The maximum length is limited by the use of the utility power supply at the camera side, the load
increases and the characteristics of the commercial power supply input to the CCU.
54 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ ETHERNET compatible system

MIC-1
MIC-2
Headset
INCOM/ND FILTER
HEAD
F1
(ENG/PROD)
F2
PGM/CC VF
CHAR
MIC
MENU
CCU
OFF
EXT
POWER
UHK-430 Camera
Max. 4000m
Fiber Cable
Headset
(ENG/PROD) 3

CCU-430
PM
HD-SDI

CAM GENLOCK APC SDI
CCU
POWER
PHONE
MIC PRV OPE
ON
OFF
PTT
COM OFF
USB
INIT/PM CALL
3G/HD-SDI
WFM
LAN Cable
Ethernet HUB with PoE+

LAN Cable
LAN Cable
LAN Cable
LAN Cable
OCP-300 MCP-300
Caution:
5HIHUWR2&30&32SHUDWLRQ0DQXDOVIRUPRUHGHWDLOVRQWKH(7+(51(7FRQQHFWLRQ
7KHPD[LPXPH[WHQVLRQGLVWDQFHRIWKH/$1FDEOHLVPUDQJH
2QQHWZRUNRSHUDWLRQFRPPDQGVFDQEHVZLWFKHGIURP2&30&3RU&3+,WLVDOVRSRVVLEOHWRVZLWFKWKHYLGHRVLJQDOIURP&68
110. However, when using the MCP-200 and the cable length is long, an external power supply (DC+12 V) is required.
7KHPD[LPXPXVDEOHOHQJWKRIWKH¿EHUFDEOHLVWKHGLVWDQFHLQWKHFDVHRIWKHVWDQGDUGFRQELQDWLRQZKLFKLVFRQQHFWHGWRD
portable lens and a 2inch VF. The maximum length is limited by the use of the utility power supply at the camera side, the load
increases and the characteristics of the commercial power supply input to the CCU.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 55

3.6 About the GENLOCK System
3.6 About the GENLOCK System

7KLVVHFWLRQH[SODLQVWKHLQSXWFRQQHFWRURXWSXWFRQQHFWRUDQGFRQQHFWLRQH[DPSOHVRIWKH*(1/2&.V\VWHPRIWKLVSURGXFW
■ Input synchronization signals

7KHRXWSXWYLGHRVLJQDOVDUHV\QFKURQRXVO\FRXSOHGWRWKHVWDQGDUGV\QFKURQL]DWLRQVLJQDOLQSXWWRWKH5()(5(1&(FRQQHFWRU
7KHSKDVHEHWZHHQWKHRXWSXWYLGHRVLJQDOVDQGVWDQGDUGV\QFKURQL]DWLRQVLJQDOVFDQEHFKDQJHGLQKRUL]RQWDORUYHUWLFDOIURPWKH
Menu.
Two types of signals below can be input to the REFERENCE connectors.
- HDTV PS/S (Tri-level sync)
6'799%6%%6 176&3$/
■ Output synchronization signal

7KH6<1&287FRQQHFWRURXWSXWVDV\QFKURQL]DWLRQVLJQDOWKDWPDWFKHVZLWKWKHRXWSXWYLGHRVLJQDOV
■ Synchronization signal input (REFERENCE) connector (loop through)

,QSXWUHIHUHQFHV\QFKURQL]DWLRQVLJQDOVWRWKH5()(5(1&(FRQQHFWRUV
(1) When an external synchronization signal generator is used.
CCU-430
SYNC OUT
REFERENCE A䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷B䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷C
Synchronization signal
generator
CCU-430
REFERENCE
CCU-430
REFERENCE
75Ω termination
56 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

4
OPERATION
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)
4.1 Operating Procedures
4.1 Operating Procedures

This chapter explains how to operate the UHK-430 camera.
■――――――――――――――
Initial Operation Check
:KHQ\RXXVHWKHFDPHUDIRUWKH¿UVWWLPHDIWHUSXUFKDVHHQVXUHWKDWLWZRUNVSURSHUO\
◆ Switch Position Check .....................(P. 60)

◆ Turning ON Power ...........................(P. 61)
◆ Output Signal Check .......................(P. 65)
7HVW3XOVH&KHFN &$/6LJQDO
- Color-Bar Signal Check
- Check by Use of External Chart
4
■―――――――――――――――――
Preparation Before Shooting
OPERATION
Studio Operation Outdoor operation
◆ Shooting in a Particular Environment .. (P. 75)

◆ Viewfinder Adjustment....................... (P. 67) ◆ Viewfinder Adjustment....................... (P. 67)
'LRSWHU$GMXVWPHQWDQG6FUHHQ$GMXVWPHQW 'LRSWHU$GMXVWPHQWDQG6FUHHQ$GMXVWPHQW
- Display Mode Check - Display Mode Check
◆ Output Signal Check ......................... (P. 65) ◆ Output Signal Check ......................... (P. 65)
- Color-Bar Signal Check - Color Bar Signal Check
7HVW&KHFN &$/6LJQDO 7HVW&KHFN &$/6LJQDO
- Check by Use of External Chart - Check by Use of External Chart
◆ Auto Setup ......................................... (P. 69) ◆ Auto Setup ......................................... (P. 69)
<Pattern 1> <Pattern 1>
1/(9(/$XWR6HWXS 148,&.$XWR6HWXS
2 Black Shading 2$XWR:KLWH%DODQFH $:%

1$XWR%ODFN%DODQFH $%% 1$XWR%ODFN%DODQFH $%%
2$XWR:KLWH%DODQFH $:% 2$XWR:KLWH%DODQFH $:%

1$XWR:KLWH%DODQFH $:% 1$XWR:KLWH%DODQFH $:%
(Execute one of the above patterns.) (Execute one of the above patterns.)
■――――――――――――――――――――
Shooting Settings and Adjustment
Make IRIS and pedestal adjustments and various function settings according to the environment in which the
camera is used.
◆ Camera menu settings

5HIHUWR&KDSWHU&$0(5$6(77,1*6DQG$'-8670(17" (P. 77)
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 59

4.2 Switch Position Check
4.2 Switch Position Check

:KHQ\RXXVHWKLVSURGXFWIRUWKH¿UVWWLPHSOHDVHVHWWKHVZLWFKHVRIWKHFDPHUDDVIROORZVDQGFKHFNLILWRSHUDWHVQRUPDOO\
$IWHU¿QLVKLQJWKHRSHUDWLRQFKHFNVHWWKHVZLWFKHVDVQHHGHGIRU\RXURSHUDWLQJHQYLURQPHQWDQGVKRRWLQJFRQGLWLRQV
■ Camera right view

Turn the camera power switch to the CCU
position to be prepared for the power
activation after connecting the camera cable INCOM/ND FILTER
HEAD
F1
F2
and other cables. PGM/CC
MENU
VF
CHAR
MIC
CCU
OFF
CCU
EXT
OFF
EXT
POWER
POWER
■ Camera rear view

,17(5&20VZLWFK 2)) INTERCOM ON
LIGHT
3
RET 1
4
RET 2
3 4
TALLY
ON
CALL
,17(5&200,&VZLWFK 21
OFF 2 2 OFF
switch DIM
1 1 DIM
,17(5&200,&VZLWFK 21 INTERCOM 1

INTERCOM SEL
REAR
INTERCOM 2
FRONT FRONT
- MIC-1 POWER switch, MIC-2 POWER switch INTERCOM INTERCOM
Depending on the type of microphone to use, the power supply INTERCOM-1 PGM 1 PGM 2 PGM 1 PGM 2
ON PROD ON PROD
settings differ. MIC switch OFF

PTT
BOTH
ENG
OFF
PTT
BOTH
ENG
GL IN/SYNC OUT
INTERCOM-2
Switch Position Description MIC switch
$%9 6XSSOLHV9$%SRZHUWRWKHPLFURSKRQH DC OUT 12V 1A
OFF 6XSSOLHVQRSRZHUWRWKHPLFURSKRQH$SSOLFDEOHIRU
MIC-1 SDI OUT 1 SDI OUT 2 SDI OUT 3 SDI I/O 4
a dynamic microphone or a microphone with built-in POWER

power supply which requires no power supply. switch
OFF OFF USB REMOTE
P.+48V Supplies +48V Phantom power +12V +48V +12V +48V
MIC-2 TRACKER
POWER
DC-IN
switch
Reference: GbE TRK
MIC 1 MIC 2
For details on the microphone, refer to the instructions
accompanying the microphone to be used.
■ CCU front view INTERCOM MIC switch

,17(5&20VZLWFK 2))
&DPHUD32:(5VZLWFK2))
&&832:(5VZLWFK 2)) ID TALLY NORMAL
CABLE STATUS
OPEN SHORT COMM
ALARM
TEMP FAN
CAM:400V T5A

CAM GENLOCK APC SDI
CCU
POWER
PHONE
MIC PRV OPE
ON
OFF
PTT
COM OFF
USB
INIT/PM CALL
Camera
POWER switch
CCU POWER switch
60 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

4.3 Turning ON Power

The procedure for turning on the power is different depending on how to supply power to the camera. This section explains how to
supply power from the CCU or from the POWER connector (external power supply) to the camera. If the power supply needs to be
WHUPLQDWHGLPPHGLDWHO\UHPRYHWKHFDEOHFRQQHFWHGWRWKH&$0(5$FRQQHFWRURU$&LQOHW
To operate the power supply from CCU

Before turning on this product, set the switches as follows.
Switch Switch Position
Camera Camera POWER switch CCU
CCU &&80$,132:(5VZLWFK OFF

Camera POWER switch I
OCP (*) &$032:(5VZLWFK ON
(*) When the OCP-300 is used, the setting for the camera POWER switch on the CCU is not necessary.
4
■ To operate the power supply of the camera from the CCU
OPERATION
1 Turn ON the MAIN POWER switch on the CCU
rear side. ***
MAIN POWER switch

Caution:
:KHQWKH0$,132:(5VZLWFKLVVHWWR2))WKH
power will not be supplied even if the POWER switch AC POWER input
connector
on the front of CCU or the POWER switch of the
camera are turned on.
2 Set the [MAIN POWER] switch on the front of CCU to "ON".
Caution:
)RU¿UVWWLPHXVHDIWHULQVWDOODWLRQRUDIWHUUHLQVWDOOLQJLQDQHZORFDWLRQFRQ¿UPWKH$&YROWDJHRIWKHSRZHUVRXUFHWRWKH
&&8PDWFKHVWKHSRZHUVHOHFWLRQVHWWLQJRIWKH&&8EHIRUHFRQQHFWLQJWKH¿EHUFDEOHWRWKHFDPHUD
&RQ¿UPWKH$&YROWDJHRIWKHSRZHUVRXUFHWRWKH&&8PHDVXUHWKHYROWDJHLIQHFHVVDU\
&RQ¿UPWKH&&8SRZHUVHOHFWLRQVHWWLQJE\FRQQHFWLQJDQ+'PRQLWRUWRWKH021,287RQWKH&&8DQGFDOOLQJXSWKH
&&80HQX1DYLJDWHWR',$*1267,&6WKHQREVHUYH$&92/7$*(6(/(&725WRVHHWKHYROWDJHVHWWLQJ)RUGHWDLOVRQ
Menu operation, refer to “6.1 Basic operation of menu screen”.
,IWKH$&YROWDJHRIWKHSRZHUVRXUFHPDWFKHVWKH$&YROWDJHVHWWLQJRIWKH&&8\RXPD\SURFHHGWRWXUQWKH&DPHUDSRZHU
On. If the voltage does not match, switch Off the CCU and Main power, and contact Ikegami for service information regarding
the CCU voltage setting.
7KH&&8FKHFNVWKH¿EHUFDEOHFRQQHFWLRQDQGVXSSOLHVSRZHUWRWKHFDPHUDLIWKHFDEOHLVSURSHUO\FRQQHFWHG7KH
&$%/(LQGLFDWRURQWKH&&8ZLOOLQGLFDWHWKHFRQQHFWLRQVWDWXVRIWKH¿EHUFDEOH
1250$/ JUHHQ /LJKWVZKHQWKH¿EHUFDEOHLVQRUPDOO\FRQQHFWHG7KH&&8FKHFNVWKHFDPHUDFRGHWUDQVPLWWHGIURP

WKHFDPHUDWRFRQ¿UPWKDWWKHFDPHUDLVDQDSSOLFDEOHPRGHODQGWKHQVXSSOLHVSRZHUWRWKHFDPHUD
23(1 UHG /LJKWVZKHQWKH¿EHUFDEOHLVQRWFRQQHFWHGRUWKHUHLVDQ³RSHQ´LQWKH¿EHUFDEOH
6+257 UHG /LJKWVZKHQDVKRUWFLUFXLWRFFXUVLQWKH¿EHUFDEOHGXHWRDFDXVHVXFKDVZDWHU
3 When the [Camera POWER] switch of the front of CCU is set to "ON", the power is supplied to the camera, and
the "CAM" POWER indicator lights up.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 61

4 To turn off the power of the camera from the CCU side, set the [Camera POWER] switch of the front of CCU to
"OFF".
CCU front panel

CABLE indicator

CAM APC
POWER
GENLOCK SDI
CAM CCU
CCU
POWER
PHONE
MIC PRV OPE
ON
OFF
PTT
COM OFF
USB
INIT/PM CALL
CCU POWER switch

Camera POWER switch
5 Make sure that the ALARM indicator on the OCP or MCP is not flashing.
:KHQWKHFDPHUDVHOIGLDJQRVWLFIXQFWLRQGHWHFWVHUURUVWKH$/$50LQGLFDWRUÀDVKHVDQGWKHVHOIGLDJQRVLVLQIRUPDWLRQ
will be displayed for 20 seconds on the MON output.
OCP-300 MCP-300
PM IND button
ALARM indicator
Caution:
The self diagnostic information is not displayed on the PM unless the PM IND of the OCP is set to "ON".
62 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ To Control Power ON/OFF from OCP (Remote control)

OCP-300
CAM POWER switch
1 To change the status of power supply to the camera from "ON" (switch light on) to "OFF",
press and hold the [CAM PWR] switch of the OCP for 2 seconds.
2 To change the status of power supply to the camera from "OFF" (switch light off) to "ON",
4
press the [CAM PWR] switch of OCP.
OPERATION
Note:
Function will change according to the control panel to be used.
Activating the FIBER SINGLE MODE

7KH),%(56,1*/(02'(LVXVHGWRH[WHQGWKHWUDQVPLVVLRQGLVWDQFHEHWZHHQWKHFDPHUDDQG&&8RULQDSSOLFDWLRQVZKHUH
VLQJOHPRGH¿EHUVDUHDYDLODEOH7KHWUDQVPLVVLRQGLVWDQFHLVGHWHUPLQHGE\WKHSRZHUORVVDQGWKHDWWHQXDWLRQRIWKHOLJKW,IWKH
SRZHUORVVLVWRRJUHDWSRZHUQHHGVWREHVXSSOLHGWRWKHFDPHUDZLWKDVHSDUDWHSRZHUVRXUFH:KHQWKH),%(56,1*/(02'(
is set to ON, the power will not be supplied from CCU, but two-way optical transmission is operable as usual.
7KHFDPHUDDQG&&8QHHGVWREHVHWLQGLYLGXDOO\WRRSHUDWHLQ),%(56,1*/(02'(7KHIROORZLQJGHVFULEHVWKHVHWWLQJ
PHWKRG7KLVSURGXFWFDQEHH[WHQGHGRQXSWRNPRI60¿EHU

FILTER OPEN
INCOM/ND
HEAD ID TALLY NORMAL SHORT COMM TEMP FAN

CAM GENLOCK APC SDI
F1 CCU
F2
POWER
Fiber Cable
PGM/CC VF PHONE
MIC PRV OPE
CHAR
ON
OFF
PTT
MIC COM OFF
MENU
USB
INIT/PM CALL
POWER
CCU
OFF
EXT
DC Power
AC
AC
1 Set the output voltage of the external power supply to +12V (Supply voltage range: +11 to 17V).
2 Turn the POWER switch to the "OFF" position.
INCOM/ND FILTER
HEAD
F1
F2
PGM/CC VF
CHAR
MIC
MENU
CCU
OFF
EXT
POWER
CCU
OFF
EXIT
POWER
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 63

3 Connect the connector from an external power supply to the DC IN connector on the back of the camera.
Connect the camera cable from CCU to the camera connector on the back of the camera.

3 4 3 4
ON ON
OFF 2 2 OFF
DIM DIM
1 1
INCOM SEL
REAR
INCOM 1 INCOM 2
FRONT FRONT
INCOM INCOM

ON PROD ON PROD
OFF BOTH OFF BOTH
PTT ENG PTT ENG
GL IN/SYNC OUT
DC OUT 12V 1A
OFF OFF USB REMOTE

+12V +48V +12V +48V
TRACKER
DC-IN 11~17V
GbE TRK
MIC 1 MIC 2
Fiber cable
DC Power cable
4 Turn on the CCU power supply.
5 Turn on "FIBER SINGLE MODE" in the CCU Menu setting.
Reference:
Please refer to "6.1 Basic Operation of Menu Screen" (P. 131) and "6.2 CCU Menu Configuration and Contents",
"Setting the SYSTEM SETTING (2/2)", "CONFIGURATION" (P. 143)IRUWKHVHWWLQJRI),%(56,1*/(02'(
6 Turn on the camera power switch of the CCU side.
7 Turn on the external power switch.
8 Turn the POWER switch on the right side of the camera to the "EXT" postion.
7XUQRQ),%(56,1*/(02'(LQWKH&$0(5$(QJLQHHU0HQXVHWWLQJ
INCOM/ND FILTER
HEAD
F1
F2
PGM/CC VF
CHAR
MIC
MENU
CCU
OFF
EXT
POWER
CCU
OFF
EXIT
POWER
64 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

4.4 Output Signal Check

$IWHUWXUQLQJ21WKHSRZHUHQVXUHWKDWVLJQDOVDUHFRUUHFWO\RXWSXWRQWKH30DQG:)0,IWKHYLGHRVLJQDOVDUHQRWRXWSXWUHIHU
to Chapter 8 and check the following points before determining that it is a device failure.
$UHWKHFDEOHVSURSHUO\FRQQHFWHG"
$UHWKHVZLWFKHVFRUUHFWO\VHW"
,VWKHEUHDNHUWKURZQ"
,VWKH32:(5VZLWFKVHWWR21"
Reference:
See "Chapter 3 : INSTALLATION and CONNECTION" (P. 35) for connection of peripheral equipment.
Test Pulse (CAL Signal) Check

Check if the level of the video system is normal.
4
1 Set the CAL button on the OCP or MCP to ON.
OPERATION
2 Check if a test signal with 100% level is output to the R, G, and B channels on the waveform monitor.
MCP-300
CAL button
"ON"
PM
OCP-300
CAL button WFM

"ON" (R.G.B)
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 65

Color-Bar Signal Check
1 Set the BARS button on the OCP or MCP to ON.

Check a normal color bar signals is are output on the output lines.
MCP-300
BARS button
"ON"
COLOR MONITOR
OCP-300
BARS button WFM

"ON"
External Chart Check

Shoot an external chart and ensure that the image is normal.
1 Shoot external charts including grayscale.

INCOM/ND FILTER
HEAD
F1
F2
PGM/CC VF
2
CHAR
MIC
MENU
Check video signals for abnormality on the

CCU
OFF
EXT
POWER
waveform monitor (WFM) and picture monitor

(PM).
66 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

4.5 Viewfinder Adjustment (VFL201D)

7RPDNHWKHYLGHRTXDOLW\RIWKHYLHZ¿QGHUSLFWXUHFOHDUDGMXVWWKHYLHZ¿QGHUDFFRUGLQJWR\RXURSHUDWLQJHQYLURQPHQW7KLV
edition of the manual explains the case where the VFL201D is used.
Reference:
Please refer to "Chapter 3 : INSTALLATION and CONNECTION" "Mounting and Removing the Viewfinder" (P. 44) for
WKHDGMXVWPHQWRIWKHYLHZ¿QGHUSRVLWLRQVDQGDQJOHV
Visibility and Screen Adjustments of the Viewfinder
■ Visibility adjustment
7KHIRFXVRIWKHYLHZ¿QGHULVDGMXVWHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHFDPHUDPDQ VH\HVLJKW
Eyepiece
1 While pressing the diopter adjustment lever of the viewfinder, slide it in the 4
direction of the arrow for best focus .
OPERATION
Visibility adjustment lever
■ Screen adjustment
$GMXVWWKHSLFWXUHTXDOLW\RIWKHYLHZ¿QGHUVFUHHQ
1 Adjust each control knob on the viewfinder.

3($.,1*NQRE $GMXVWVWKHVKDUSQHVVRIWKHLPDJH
&2175$67NQRE $GMXVWVWKHFRQWUDVWRIWKHLPDJH
%5,*+71(66NQRE$GMXVWVWKHEULJKWQHVVRIWKHLPDJH BRIGHTNESS knob
CONTRAST knob
PEAKING knob
Checking the Display Mode of the Viewfinder

9DULRXVPDUNHUDQGFKDUDFWHUGLVSOD\VLQWKHYLHZ¿QGHUVFUHHQFDQEHVHW7KHGLVSOD\PRGHLVVHWDFFRUGLQJWRWKHXVDJHVLWXDWLRQ
■ Viewfinder (VFL201D) switch

The functions of the following items are assigned to the function switch (F1, TALLY display
)) RIWKHYLHZ¿QGHUIURPWKH0HQX
0212 6HWVWKH9)SLFWXUHWREODFNDQGZKLWHVFUHHQ
7$//< 7$//<GLVSOD\
8650$.(5 )RUFKHFNLQJIUDPLQJ
:)0 9LGHRZDYHIRUPGLVSOD\
96& 9HFWRUVFUHHQGLVSOD\
=220,1' =RRPSRVLWLRQRIOHQV
Function switch (F1, F2, F3)
=(%5$ 9LGHROHYHOLQGLFDWLRQ
3($.83 (QKDQFHWKHVKDUSQHVVRIWKHYLHZ¿QGHUSLFWXUH
Reference:
The settings of Display mode is performed on the Menu screen. Please refer to "Chapter 5 : CAMERA SETTINGS and
ADJUSTMENT" "5.3 Menu Configuration and content" (P. 86) for more information.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 67

Viewfinder Marker Display Settings

9DULRXVPDUNHUVDUHDYDLODEOHIRUWKHYLHZ¿QGHU
Use the Menu screen to select and turn on/off the markers On and Off.
■ Marker types
SAFETY CROSS5 CROSS10
C.CROSS ASPECT ASP+SAFE
FRM+SAFTY CENTER
- Frame marker
6HOHFWRU
- Safety marker
6HOHFWWKH$&7,210$5.(5RU7,7/(0$5.(5
<RXFDQVHWWKHPDUNHUSRVLWLRQ
- Cross marker
6HOHFWWKH&&52266&5266RU&5266
$VSHFWPDUNHU
6HOHFWRU
- Center marker
6HOHFW7<3(7<3(RU7<3(
Center marker types

TYPE1 TYPE2 TYPE3
Display the Waveform Video and Vector Video in the Viewfinder

7KHYLHZ¿QGHUFDQGLVSOD\ZDYHIRUPPRQLWRULQJ ZDYHPRQLWRU LPDJHVDQGFRORUPRQLWRULQJ YHFWRUVFRSH LPDJHVDVVXSSRUWLQJ
functions.
The position, brightness, and display colors of the monitoring images can
be set in the Menu setting screen.
㻝㻜㻜
㻡㻜
68 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

4.6 Auto Setup
4.6 Auto Setup

The camera is equipped with an auto setup function that automatically adjusts various levels and settings using the CPU of the
camera and CCU.
■ Auto Setup function

(1) FULL auto setup
Executes all auto setup items in the camera. This is mainly executed after maintenance and inspection. The auto setup chart is
required.
(2) LEVEL auto setup

Set the video processing levels. This process can be executed daily before using the camera. The auto setup chart is required.
(3) FULL QUICK auto setup

Because the FULL QUICK auto setup use an electrical test pulse signal built in the camera, you do not need an external chart.
Setup is possible even when you cannot shoot a chart.
(4) QUICK auto setup 4

Because the QUICK auto setup uses a test pulse, the setup does not include adjustment of some circuits, CCDs, lens, etc. which are
in the path prior to the point of injection of the test signal.
OPERATION
(5) Auto White Balance (AWB)
Sets the white level of the R and B signals. White balance needs to be readjusted when the color temperature of the light source
FKDQJHVRURSWLFDO¿OWHUVDUHFKDQJHGEHFDXVHZKLWHEDODQFHLVDIIHFWHGE\WKHFRORUWHPSHUDWXUHRIWKHOLJKWVRXUFHDQGE\RSWLFDO
¿OWHUV
(6) Auto Black Balance (ABB)

6HWVWKHEODFNOHYHORIWKH5*DQG%VLJQDOV7KRXJKEODFNEDODQFHLVDIIHFWHGQHLWKHUE\WKHFRORUWHPSHUDWXUHRIWKHOLJKWVRXUFH
QRUE\RSWLFDO¿OWHUVLWQHHGVWREHUHDGMXVWHGZKHQ*$,1LVFKDQJHGRUWKHDPELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHKDVFKDQJHGVLJQL¿FDQWO\
Note:
$XWRVHWXSDGMXVWVWKHFDPHUDEDVHGRQDUHIHUHQFH¿OH7KLVUHIHUHQFH¿OHLVFUHDWHGLQWKHPHPRU\SULRUWRVKLSPHQW7KHUHIHUHQFH
¿OHQHHGVWREHFUHDWHGDJDLQLI\RXZDQWWRFKDQJHWKHUHIHUHQFHIRUDXWRVHWXSRIWKHFDPHUD
$XWRVHWXSFDQEHDFWLYDWHGIURPWKHFDPHUD2&3DQG0&36HHWKHWDEOHLQWKHQH[WSDJHIRUZKLFKGHYLFHFDQDFWLYDWHZKLFKDXWR
setup function.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 69

4.6 Auto Setup
■ Auto Setup Function List

Control Item Auto Setup Function
FULL LEVEL FULL QUICK QUICK AWB ABB
REF INT/EXT EXT INT/EXT EXT EXT EXT
LEVEL
BLK SET R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B
PED R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B
GAIN R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B R, B
GAMMA R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B
FLARE R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B
WHITE CLIP R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B
AUTO KNEE
SLOPE R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B
POINT R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B
MANU KNEE
SLOPE R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B
POINT R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B
WHITE SHADE
H SAW R, G, B
H PARA R, G, B
V SAW R, G, B
V PARA R, G, B
CAL × 100 R, G, B R, G, B R, G, B
(GAIN, PED)
Reference:
- INT (internal reference) REF is the factory setting value by software.
- EXT (external reference) REF is the value set by the reference set function.
7KHLWHPVIRUWKH*FKDQQHOZLWKDEODFNVTXDUHRQO\ZRUNVZKHQLWLVVHWZLWKDGLDVFRSH OHQVRSWLRQ :KHQ\RXXVHDQH[WHUQDO
FKDUWVHWWKH*PDQXDOO\
■ Auto Setup Screen

:KHQYDULRXVDXWRVHWXSIXQFWLRQVH[HFXWHWKHVWDWXVLVGLVSOD\HGLQWKHYLHZ¿QGHUDQGRQWKH30RXWSXW7KHFXUUHQWO\H[HFXWLQJ
item is indicated by the cursor.
Note:
:KHQDXWRVHWXSVXFFHVVIXOO\FRPSOHWHV³2.´DSSHDUVEHVLGH³-XGJHPHQW:KHQLWIDLOV³1*´DSSHDUVEHVLGH³-XGJHPHQW´ZLWKWKH
cursor on the failed item.
[Auto Setup Monitor Execution Display Screen]
$8726(783021,725 >8+.0@ - Executing auto setup type

)XQFWLRQ$8726(783
- Setup result
0RGH/HQV1R2))&KDUW',$
-XGJHPHQW6HWWLQJ3RVLWLRQ+9

- Executing auto setup
*DLQ5*%:6KDGLQJ6DZ5*%
*DPPD5*%:6KDGLQJ3DUD5*%
)ODUH5*%
3HGHVWDO5*%&KDUW6(5&+
- Auto setup control item
%ODFN6HW&175/
,ULV5*%
:KLWH&OLS5*%
.QHH6ORSH5*%
.QHH3RLQW5*%
$XWR.QHH6ORSH5*%
$XWR.QHH3RLQW5*%
6NLQ +XH 5 %
70 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

4.6 Auto Setup
■ FULL Auto Setup

The FULL auto setup can be activated from the camera menu, CCU front side, OCP, or MCP. This section explains how to activate
from the camera menu.
1 Shoot an external auto setup chart.

0DNHVXUHWKDWWKHFKDUWLVDOLJQHGZLWKWKHFDPHUDKRUL]RQWDOO\DQGYHUWLFDOO\$OVREHVXUHWRSURYLGHHYHQOLJKWRQWKH
whole chart.
2 Use the CC FILTER switch and ND FILTER switch on the right side of the camera to set the optical filter which
suits the light source.
,IWKHRSHUDWLRQDOSULRULW\IRUWKH¿OWHULVQRWJLYHQWRWKHFDPHUDSUHVVWKH),/7(5+($'VZLWFKWRVZLWFKWKHRSHUDWLRQDO
SULRULW\WRWKHFDPHUD:KHQWKHSULRULW\LVJLYHQWRWKHFDPHUDDQDVWHULVN LVGLVSOD\HGLQWKHYLHZ¿QGHU
3 Select and activate “FULL” from the camera menu “AUTO SETUP MODE” - “AUTO SETUP”.
Note:
4
7RSHUIRUPWKH)8//$XWR6HWXSIURP2&3RU0&3DOLJQWKH1'),/(75DQG&2/25),/7(5WRWKHOLJKWVRXUFHWKHQIROORZWKH
next procedures.
OPERATION
1. Press the SETUP button in the function switch part.
3UHVVWKH$8726(783EXWWRQRQWKH/&'
3. Press the Full button on the LCD.
4. Press the Start button on the LCD.
■ LEVEL Auto Setup

The LEVEL auto setup can be activated from the camera menu, CCU front side, OCP, or MCP. This section explains how to
activate from the camera menu.
1 Shoot an external auto setup chart.

0DNHVXUHWKDWWKHFKDUWLVDOLJQHGZLWKWKHFDPHUDKRUL]RQWDOO\DQGYHUWLFDOO\$OVREHVXUHWRSURYLGHHYHQOLJKWRQWKH
whole chart.
2 Use the CC FILTER switch and ND FILTER switch on the right side of the camera to set the optical filter which
suits the light source.
,IWKHRSHUDWLRQDOSULRULW\IRUWKH¿OWHULVQRWJLYHQWRWKHFDPHUDSUHVVWKH),/7(5+($'VZLWFKWRVZLWFKWKHRSHUDWLRQDO
SULRULW\WRWKHFDPHUD:KHQWKHSULRULW\LVJLYHQWRWKHFDPHUDDQDVWHULVN LVGLVSOD\HGLQWKHYLHZ¿QGHU
3 Select and activate “LEVEL” from the camera menu “AUTO SETUP MODE” - “AUTO SETUP”.
Note:
7RSHUIRUPWKH/(9(/$XWR6HWXSIURP2&3RU0&3DOLJQWKH1'),/(75DQG&2/25),/7(5WRWKHOLJKWVRXUFHWKHQIROORZWKH
next procedures.
1. Press the SETUP button in the function switch part.
3UHVVWKH$8726(783EXWWRQRQWKH/&'
3. Press the Level button on the LCD.
4. Press the Start button on the LCD.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 71

4.6 Auto Setup
■ FULL QUICK Auto Setup

The FULL QUICK auto setup can be activated from the camera menu, CCU front side, OCP, or MCP. To perform the FULL
QUICK auto setup from an OCP or MCP, perform the following steps.
1 Press the SETUP button in the function switch part.
2 Press the AUTO SETUP button on the LCD.
3 Press the Full Quick button on the LCD.
4 Press the Start button on the LCD.
■ QUICK Auto Setup

6HOHFW³48,&.ÍURPWKHFDPHUDPHQX³$8726(78302'(´³$8726(783´7RSHUIRUPWKH48,&.DXWRVHWXSIURPDQ
OCP or MCP, perform the following steps.
1 Press the SETUP button in the function switch part.
2 Press the AUTO SETUP button on the LCD.
3 Press the Quick button on the LCD.
4 Press the Start button on the LCD.
72 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

4.6 Auto Setup
■ Auto White Balance

The auto white balance can be performed from camera or CCU front menu operation display and from the OCP or MCP. This
section explains how to perform auto white balance from the OCP.
1 Select a memory to save execution results of auto white balance using the AWB selector switch.
7KHUHDUHWZRPHPRULHV $FKDQG%FK 8VHWZRVHSDUDWHZKLWHEDODQFHYDOXHVDVQHHGHG
$ 6HOHFWV$FKPHPRU\
% 6HOHFWV%FKPHPRU\
2)) 7KHZKLWHEDODQFHFRUUHFWLRQLVSUHVHW . ,QWKLVVWDWXV$:%FDQQRWEHSHUIRUPHG
Note:
The previously saved data will be overwritten.
2 Selects color filter and ND filter according to the light source.
3 Shoot the subject which contains white color. 4

6HOHFWWKHVXEMHFWLQZKLFKRUPRUHRIWKHVFUHHQDUHDLVRFFXSLHGZLWKZKLWHFRORUZKHQVKRRWLQJ
OPERATION
4 Press the AWB switch on the camera function operation panel of OCP to perform the auto white balance.
5 Check the results.

³2.´RU³1*´ZLOOEHGLVSOD\HGRQWKHSLFWXUHPRQLWRURUWKHYLHZ¿QGHUVFUHHQ ＡＷＢＡｃｈ
when completing the auto white balance.
:KHQ³1*´LVGLVSOD\HGFKHFNLIWKHVXEMHFWVDWLV¿HVWKHDERYHUHTXLUHPHQWV ＯＫ
DQGWKHRSWLFDO¿OWHULVFRUUHFW7KHQUHSHDWWKHSURFHGXUHIURPVWHS
Caution:
0DNHVXUHWKDWWKH5DQG%*$,1FRQWURONQRERI2&3RU0&3LVLQWKHFHQWHUSRVLWLRQEHIRUHSHUIRUPLQJWKHDXWRZKLWHEDODQFH,I
the control knob is not in the center position, the control range will be biased to one side.
Note:
3UHVV$:%RQWKH/&'VHFWLRQWRSHUIRUPLWIURP0&3
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 73

4.6 Auto Setup
■ Auto Black Balance

The auto black balance can be performed from the camera or the CCU front menu operation control and from the OCP or the MCP.
This section explains how to perform auto black balance from the OCP.
1 Press the ABB switch on the OCP.

ABB
7KHVWDWXVLVDXWRPDWLFDOO\FKDQJHGWRWKH&$3VWDWXVDQGWKHQWKHDXWREODFN
balance will be performed. BL K SET
2 Check the results.

:KHQWKHDXWREODFNEDODQFHLVFRPSOHWH2.RU1*LVGLVSOD\HGRQWKH30
3LFWXUH0RQLWRU VFUHHQRUWKHYLHZ¿QGHUVFUHHQ
Caution:
%HVXUHWRVHWWKH5*%3('DQG0$67(53('(67$/FRQWURONQREVRQWKH2&3
to the center position before activating the auto black balance from the camera. If the
control knobs are not at the center position, the control range will be biased to one ABB
O K
side.
74 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

4.7 Preparation for Shooting in Particular Environment
4.7 Preparation for Shooting in Particular Environments

When the camera is used in a particular environment such as where the temperature is extremely low, where the camera is subject
WRGLUHFWVXQOLJKWWKURXJKRXWWKHGD\RUZKHUHWKHHOHFWURPDJQHWLF¿HOGLVVRVWURQJWKDWWKHHOHFWURQLFFLUFXLWVPDOIXQFWLRQLWLV
necessary to take the following protective measures for proper operation of the camera.
■ Shooting in an extremely cold location

Check the lubricants are intended for cold districts in advance. Cold-weather cover
2WKHUZLVHWKHPRYHPHQWRIWKHWULSRGIRFXV]RRPDQGLULV
will become heavy. Put a cold-weather cover on the camera,
and fully warm up the camera before using it.
■ Shooting in a dusty place or in the

rain Dust cover
The camera is designed to resist dust and rain. However, when
shooting in a dusty place or in the rain, put a dust cover or a
rain cover on the camera.
4
■ Shooting where the electromagnetic
OPERATION
field is strong Rain cover
:KHQVKRRWLQJZKHUHWKHHOHFWURPDJQHWLF¿HOGLVH[FHVVLYHO\
strong, such as in airports, military bases or transmitting
stations, shield the camera by covering it an RFI resistant cover
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 75

4.8 Scene File
4.8 Scene File

■ Save condition of a UHK-430 scene file
Item Save Data
*$,1 -6dB to +12dB
*$00$ 2))
1250$/&,1(WR
*$00$7<3(
&86720WR
)/$5( ON/OFF
KNEE ON/OFF
$872.1(( ON/OFF
WHITE CLIP ON/OFF
DTL ON/OFF
+$5''7/ 62)7'7/2)) ON/OFF
SKIN DTL ON/OFF
0$75,; OFF/MTX1 to 3
PRESET SHUTTER OFF, 1/100 to 1/2000
9$5,$%/(6+877(5 ON/OFF
%/$&.675(&+ 2))WR
ND FILTER 1'WR1'
CC FILTER &&$WR&&(
&2/256$7 ON/OFF
WHT Shade ON/OFF
COLOR DTL ON/OFF
COLOR CORRECT ON/OFF
SUPER KNEE 2))/2:0,'+,*+
+,/,*+7'7/ ON/OFF
SMOOTH KNEE 2))7<3(WR7<3(
ZOOM DTL ON/OFF
ZOOM SKIN DTL ON/OFF
9$5,$%/(&70(3 ON/OFF
■ UHK-430 Scene File Saving Item

7KHRSHUDWLRQRIVFHQH¿OHVLVSHUIRUPHGXVLQJ2&33OHDVHUHIHUWR³2&32SHUDWLRQ0DQXDOÍRULQVWUXFWLRQVRQKRZWR
RSHUDWHVZLWFKHVDQGVDYHWKH¿OHVWRPHPRU\FDUGV
76 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

CAMERA SETTINGS 5
and ADJUSTMENT
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)
5.1 Adjusting INCOM
5.1 Adjusting INTERCOM

Adjusting Headset Volume
This section explains how to adjust the headsets volume.
Caution:
'RQRWVHWWKH,17(5&20FRQWURONQRE,17(5&20FRQWURONQRE,17(5&203*0FRQWURONQREDQG,17(5&20
3*0FRQWURONQREWRQHDUPD[LPXPOHYHOIURPWKHEHJLQQLQJ6HWWLQJWKHYROXPHOHYHOWRRKLJKZLWKWKHLQWHUFRPKHDGVHWRQ
your ears may damage your eardrums. If you suddenly set the volume level too high, it may also damage the headset. Excessive sound
pressure from the headset may cause a hearing loss.
Camera Rear Side View Camera Right Side View
INTERCOM select switch INTERCOM PHONE

control knob
INCOM/ND FILTER
HEAD
LIGHT RET 1 RET 2 TALLY CALL LIGHT RET 1 RET 2 TALLY CALL
ON 3 4 3 4
ON
3 4 3 4
OFF
DIM
2 2 OFF
DIM
ON ON
1 1
OFF 2 2 OFF
INCOM SEL DIM DIM F1
INCOM 1
REAR
INCOM 2 1 1
FRONT FRONT
INCOM INCOM
INCOM SEL
REAR F2
ON
OFF
PROD
BOTH
ON
OFF
PROD
BOTH INCOM 1 INCOM 2
PTT ENG PTT ENG
FRONT FRONT
INTERCOM 1 INTERCOM 2 INCOM INCOM
GL IN/SYNC OUT
PGM/CC VF
CHAR
DC OUT
SDI OUT 1
12V 1A
SDI OUT 2 SDI OUT 3 SDI I/O 4

ON
OFF
PTT
PGM 1
PROD
BOTH
ENG
PGM 2
ON
OFF
PTT
PGM 1
PROD
BOTH
ENG
PGM 2
MENU
MIC 5
OFF OFF USB REMOTE
+12V +48V +12V +48V
TRACKER
CAMERA SETTINGS and ADJUSTMENT

DC-IN 11~17V INTERCOM-1 INTERCOM-2
MIC 1 MIC 2
GbE TRK control knob control knob
INTERCOM-1 PGM INTERCOM-2 PGM INTERCOM PGM

control knob control knob control knob
■ Adjusting Intercom Receiver Volume

The volume of intercom receiver is adjusted using knobs on the back side and the right side of the camera.
If using the knob on the back side of the camera, follow Procedure 2, or if using the knob on the right side of the camera, follow
3URFHGXUHDQG
- Adjust the INTERCOM volume on the back side of the camera.
1 Set the INTERCOM FRONT VR selector switch to "REAR".
2 Turn the INTERCOM-1 control knob and the INTERCOM-2 control knob on the back side of the camera to adjust
the volume.
- Adjust the INTERCOM volume on the side of the camera.
3 Set the INTERCOM switch to "INTERCOM1 FRONT" or "INTERCOM2 FRONT".
4 Cancel the operation right on the ND and the camera of the color filter. (The "*" mark is not displayed on the VF
screen.).
5 Turn the INTERCOM PHONE control knob on the right side of the camera to adjust the volume.
Caution:
Be sure to adjust the volume to the appropriate level while listening to sound through the headset.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 79

5.1 Adjusting INCOM
■ Adjusting Intercom PGM Volume

The volume of intercom receiver is adjusted using knobs on the back side and the right side of the camera.
If using the knob on the back side of the camera, follow Procedure 2, or if using the knob on the right side of the camera, follow
3URFHGXUHDQG
- Adjust the INTERCOM PGM volume on the back side of the camera.
1 Set the INTERCOM selector switch to "REAR".
2 Turn the INTERCOM-1 PGM-1/2 control knob and INTERCOM-2 PGM-1/2 control knob on the rear of the camera
to adjust the volume.
3 Turn the INTERCOM-1 PGM control knob and the INTERCOM-2 PGM control knob on the back side of the
camera to adjust the volume.
- Adjust the INTERCOM PGM volume on the side of the camera.
4 Set the INTERCOM selector switch to "INTERCOM1 FRONT" or "INTERCOM2 FRONT".
5 Set the PGM lines of the intercom system using the INTERCOM-1 PGM-1/PGM-2 switch and INTERCOM-2
PGM-1/PGM-2 switch on the back side of the camera.
Note:
,IWKH,17(5&20VHOHFWRUVZLWFKLVVHWWR)5217\RXFDQPDNHHLWKHU3*0RU3*0FRQWUROODEOHIURP)5217RQWKH
0HQXVFUHHQXVLQJ,17(5&20$8',2,17(5&20)81&7,21DQG3*0)521795,WLVVHWWR3*0E\GHIDXOW
6 Push the INTERCOM selector switch on the back side of the camera to the "INTERCOM-1" or "INTERCOM-2"
side.
7 Turn the INTERCOM PGM control knob on the right side of the camera to adjust the volume.
Caution:
Be sure to adjust the volume to the appropriate level while listening to sound through the headset.
80 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

5.2 Basic Operation of the Menu

9DULRXVVHWWLQJLWHPVWKURXJKWKH0HQXVFUHHQDUHGLVSOD\HGRQWKH9) YLHZ¿QGHU DQGYDULRXVFDPHUDIXQFWLRQVFDQEH
arbitrarily set. Select and set various items while looking at the Main Menu screen and Sub Menu screen displayed on VF.
The menu has a hierarchical structure. It includes the User menu, Main menu, and Engineer menu.
INCOM/ND FILTER
HEAD
F1
F2
VF CHAR button
PGM/CC VF
CHAR
MIC
MENU
MENU selector knob SET button
Caution:
MENU selector knob 8VHGWRVHOHFWDVHWWLQJLWHPLQYDULRXVVHWWLQJVRIFDPHUDIXQFWLRQV
SET button 3UHVVWKLVEXWWRQWRFRQ¿UPWKHVHOHFWLRQDQGVHWWLQJVLQYDULRXVVHWWLQJVRIFDPHUDIXQFWLRQV
5
VF CHAR button 'LVSOD\VYDULRXVLQIRUPDWLRQRQWKH9)VFUHHQ

Caution
The menu setting items are displayed on the camera in the above operation, the menu items of the camera are displayed, but not the
CCU menu items. Please refer to Chapter 6 for the CCU menu setting items.
Operation of the menu screen
■ Displaying User Menu Screen

3UHVVWKH6(7EXWWRQIRUVHFRQGVWRGLVSOD\WKHXVHUPHQX
■ Displaying Normal Menu Screen (Main Menu Screen)

Simultaneously press the VF CHR button and the SET button to display.
■ Menu Setting Screen

Each setting item on the menu screen has a hierarchical
structure.
7KHVHWWLQJLWHPVDUHDOVRFODVVL¿HGLQWRXVHUVHWWLQJLWHPDQG
engineer setting item.
8VHUVHWWLQJLWHP 'DLO\RSHUDWLRQLWHP
(QJLQHHUVHWWLQJLWHP 5HJXODUPDLQWHQDQFHLWHPE\XVHU
Caution Menu screen example

(1) The main menu screen is indicated as "TOP MENU" in this manual.
(2) Various setting items and setting value select screen are indicated as sub menu screen.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 81

■ Displaying the Main Menu

Follow the instructions below to display the menu.
1 Press the "VF CHAR" switch and SET button on 7230(18

the right side of the camera for simultaneous to
display the main menu screen of MAIN MENU (TO 86(50(18
MENU). 0$5.(5&+$5
)2&86$66,67
2 Turn the menu select knob in the menu on the ,17(5&20$8',2
right side of the camera to move the cursor mark 9,'(2,2
of the main menu screen to the setting item. /(16
7KHQWKHLWHPZKHUHWKHFXUVRUZDVPRYHGWRÀDVKHV )81&7,216:
9,'(2$'-8670(17
3 Press the "SET button" on the right side of the 7$//<,1',&$725
camera to change the screen to the sub menu )$1&21752/
screen of the setting item selected. ),/(23(5$7,21
In this example, the screen was changed to the sub 6<67(0
menu screen of "VIDEO I/O".
Frash display
Cursol mark
4 Turn the menu select knob in the menu on the
Return mark
right side of the camera to move the cursor mark
of the sub menu screen to the setting item. Then,
the item where the cursor was moved to flashes. 9,'(2,2

5 Press "SET button" on the right side of the 6',2876(/ 9)
6',2876(/ 021,
camera, then the setting value of the setting item
flashes. Turn the menu select knob to change the 6',2876(/ 479
setting value. 6',2876(/ 2))
[Example] %$5602'( ( )8//
VF MAIN RETURN
%$56 ( 2))
+'6',(0%$8',2 ( 2))
6 Press "SET button" when the desirable setting value

is displayed to confirm it. When the setting value is
confirmed, the screen is returned to the sub main
menu.
7 To return to the main menu half way through the 9,'(2,2

setting, move "cursor mark" to "return mark" and
press "SET button 6',2876(/ 9)
6',2876(/ 021,
Caution:
If you do not press the SET button after changing the mode 6',2876(/ 479
setting, the change may be effective. 6',2876(/ 2))
%$5602'( ( )8//
Note:
- Select “ ” and press the SET button to return to the main
%$56 ( 2))
menu. +'6',(0%$8',2 ( 2))
- The pages of the "top menu screen" and "sub menu screen"
with multiple items are changed directly with their cursor
marks.
- The "menu select knob" and "SET button" on the right side of
WKHFDPHUDDQGWKHVDPHVZLWFKDQGEXWWRQRQWKHYLHZ¿QGHU
can be used.
82 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ Exiting the Menu

7KLVVHFWLRQH[SODLQVKRZWRH[LWWKHPDLQPHQXVXEPHQXLQWKHYLHZ¿QGHURUPRQLWRU
1 Press the VF CHAR button on the right side of the

camera.
Exit the main menu screen/sub menu screen.
About USER MENU

The operation items frequently used in daily operation are registered in "USER MENU", so the setting screen can be displayed
with a quick operation.
7KHLQLWLDOYDOXHVFXVWRPL]DWLRQWUDQVIHUDQGGHOHWLRQRI86(50(18DUHGHVFULEHG
■ Initial Values of USER MENU

The factory settings of USER MENU include the following items.
0$5.(5&+$5
5
)2&86$66,67

,17(5&20$8',2
- VIDEO I/O
- FUNCTION SW
7$//<,1',&$725
,1)250$7,21
■ Displays the USER MENU

"USER MENU" can be displayed in two ways.
6HOHFWLWIURP0$,10(18 7230(18 WRGLVSOD\
3UHVVDQGKROGWKH6(7EXWWRQIRUVHFRQGVWRGLVSOD\
■ Customizing the USER MENU

8SWRLWHPVFDQEHUHJLVWHUHGLQ86(50(183HUIRUPWKHIROORZLQJSURFHGXUHVWRUHJLVWHU
1 Select [USER MENU CUSTOM] from "MAIN

MENU (TOP MENU)".
2 When the numbers from 1 to 20 (includes scrolled

area) are displayed, move the cursor to the
number you wish to register and press the SET
button.
3 When [SELECT], [MOVE], [DELETE], and

[CANCEL] are displayed, move the cursor to
[SELECT] and press the SET button.
4 When the list of the TOP MENU items are

displayed, move the cursor to select the number
(item) you wish to register.
7KHVHOHFWDEOHLWHPVDUHJRLQJWRÀDVKZKHQWKHFXUVRULVPRYHGRYHUWKHLWHPV
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 83

5 If the selected item has sub items, [SET], [EXPAND], and [CANCEL] are displayed.
Select [SET] to register the selected menu item in the USER MENU.
6HOHFW>(;3$1'@WRH[SDQGWKHVHOHFWHGPHQXLWHP
When the menu list is displayed, select items from among them.
6 If there are no sub items under the selected item or the item cannot be expanded (the lowermost item), the item
is registered as it is.
7 If you wish to continue to register, repeat the procedures (2) to (5) or (6).
■ Moving in the USER MENU

3HUIRUPWKHIROORZLQJSURFHGXUHVWRPRYHWKHUHJLVWHUHGPHQXLWHPVWRDQRWKHUQXPEHU
1 Select [USER MENU CUSTOM] from "MAIN MENU (TOP MENU)".
2 When the numbers from 1 to 20 (includes scrolled area) are displayed, move the cursor to the number (item) you
wish to move and press the SET button.
3 When [SELECT], [MOVE], [DELETE], and [CANCEL] are displayed, move the cursor to [MOVE] and press the
SET button.
4 When the list of the destinations that items are moved to is displayed, move the cursor and press the SET button.
The item is going to be moved.
5 If there are more items to move, repeat the procedures (2) to (4).
Caution:
If the registered items already exist in the destination that items are moved to, they will be overwritten, therefore; they cannot be
retrieved.
The items in the original location will be blank. (This action only moves items, not replace them.)
)RUH[DPSOH>$@DQG>%@DUHUHJLVWHUHGLQ1RDQGUHVSHFWLYHO\,IWKHLWHPLQ1RLVPRYHG >029(@ WR1RWKHLWHPLQ1R
EHFRPHVEODQNDQGWKH1REHFRPHV>$@
■ Deleting the USER MENU

3HUIRUPWKHIROORZLQJSURFHGXUHVWRGHOHWHWKHUHJLVWHUHGPHQXLWHPV
1 Select [USER MENU CUSTOM] from "TOP MENU".
2 When the numbers from 1 to 20 (includes scrolled area) are displayed, move the cursor to the number (item) you
wish to delete and press the SET button.
3 When [SELECT], [MOVE], [DELETE], and [CANCEL] are displayed, move the cursor to [DELETE] and press the
SET button.
4 If there are more items to move, repeat the procedures (2) and (3).
84 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

Displaying ENGINEER MENU

3HUIRUPWKHIROORZLQJSURFHGXUHVWRGLVSOD\WKH>(1*,1((50(18@LWHPV
1 Move the cursor from [MAIN MENU (TOP MENU)] 7230(18

to [MENU MODE], and press the SET button.
,17(5&20$8',2
2 When the [ENGINEER MENU] ON/OFF setting 9,'(2,2
screen is displayed, move the cursor to [ON] and /(16
press the SET button. )81&7,216:
9,'(2$'-8670(17
3 [MAIN MENU (TOP MENU)] is displayed. Add and 7$//<,1',&$725
)$1&21752/
the items to be set in [ENGINEER MENU] to the
normal [TOP MENU] items to display. ),/(23(5$7,21
6<67(0
Caution: ,1)250$7,21
7KHVHWWLQJVRI>(1*,1((50(18@DUHUHVHWWR>2))@ZKHQ 0(1802'(
WKHSRZHULVWXUQHGRIIDQGUHVWDUWHG6RVHWWKH>(1*,1((5 86(50(18&86720
MENU] to [ON] to display the engineer menu again.
- The menu items marked with "(E)" at the end are the
>(1*,1((50(18@LWHPV
5
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 85

5.3 Menu Configuration and content

Various setting items performed on the camera side are displayed.
■ Sub Menu Setting Items

(1) USER MENU
Sets the items used in daily operation. (Items regarding maintenance and inspection are not included.)
0$5.(5&+$5
9)9,'(26(77,1*
7$//<,1',&$725
)2&86$66,67
,17(5&20$8',2
- FUNCTION SW
6<67(0
- LENS
,1)250$7,21
- USER MENU CUSTOM
Please refer to "5.2 Basic Operation of the Menu" "About USER MENU" (P. 83) for more information of the USER
MENU.
(2) MARKER CHAR
6HWVWKHIXQFWLRQXVHGWRVXSSRUWDFDPHUDPDQZLWKGLVSOD\VRIYDULRXVPDUNHUVRQWKHYLHZ¿QGHUGXULQJVKRRWLQJ
(3) FOCUS ASSIST
$IXQFWLRQXVHGWRVHWWKHKLJKOLJKWRIWKHYLHZ¿QGHUYLGHRVLJQDOVHWFDQGVXSSRUWDFDPHUDPDQGXULQJVKRRWLQJ
(4) INTERCOM/AUDIO
Performs various settings according to the operation of intercom and audio.
(5) VIDEO I/O
Sets the input/output video signals of the camera.
(6) LENS
6HWVWKHLQIRUPDWLRQUHTXLUHGWRVHWOHQVLULVHVDQGFUHDWHOHQV¿OHV
(7) FUNCTION SW
6HWVWKHIXQFWLRQVZLWFKHVRIWKHFDPHUDDQGYLHZ¿QGHU
(8) VIDEO ADJUSTMENT
Performs various condition settings required for video signal processing and auto setup.
(9) TALLY/INDICATOR
6HWV7$//<GLVSOD\DQGWKHFRQGLWLRQVHWWLQJVIRU=(%5$GLVSOD\
(10) FAN CONTROL
6HWVWKHRSHUDWLQJFRQGLWLRQVRIDLUFRROLQJIDQVEXLOWLQWKHFDPHUDDQGYLHZ¿QGHU
(11) FILE OPERATION
Saves and sets various data using USB memory.
(12) SYSTEM
Sets the basic operation of the camera.
(13) INFORMATION
Provides the operation state of the camera.
(14) MENU MODE
Displays the setting mode of the menu.
(15) F MENU (exclusive use)
,QWURGXFHVWKHVHWWLQJPHQXRIWKHYLHZ¿QGHU3OHDVHUHIHUWRWKHRSHUDWLRQPDQXDORI\RXUYLHZ¿QGHUIRUPRUHGHWDLOV
Caution:
Some of operations may be different from this manual due to improvements. Please note that some of operations may be different from
this manual due to improvements.
86 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ MARKER CHRACTER(MARKER CHAR)

$IXQFWLRQXVHGWRVXSSRUWDFDPHUDPDQZLWKGLVSOD\VRIYDULRXVPDUNHUVRQWKHYLHZ¿QGHUGXULQJVKRRWLQJ
Initial
Menu Item setting Setting value Description, Remarks
MARKER CHAR
0DUNHUVDUHDOZD\VGLVSOD\HG&KDUDFWHUUHODWHGLWHPVDUHGLVSOD\HGIRU
seconds when functions are operated and when parameters are changed.
― DISPLAY MODE 2 OFF, 1, 2 0DUNHUVDQGFKDUDFWHUVDUHDOZD\VGLVSOD\HG
2)) 0DUNHUVDQGFKDUDFWHUVDUHDOZD\VWXUQHGRIIDQGRQO\ZDUQLQJPHVVDJHV
are displayed.
Sets the level for markers and characters. The line gets darker towards the
― MARKER/CHAR LVL 100 1 to 100
direction of "1".
The screen switches to another screen, and individually turn on/off the
― CHARACTER SETTING
characters.
MARKER SETTING
2121
― FRAME MARKER OFF 6HWVWKH212))VWDWHRIWKHIUDPHPDUNHUVDQGWKHVL]H DVSHFWUDWLR
21212))
$&7,21$ UHDPDUNHURIRIWKHVFUHHQKHLJKWDQGZLGWK
― SAFETY AREA $&7,21 $&7,217,7/(
7,7/( $ UHDPDUNHURIRIWKHVFUHHQKHLJKWDQGZLGWK
21
― SAFETY MARKER 21 6HWVWKH212))VWDWHRIWKHVDIHW\PDUNHUVDQGWKHVL]H DVSHFWUDWLR
212))
2))21
― SIDE MASK OFF Sets the side mask.
2121
― CONTRAST 0 - 100 $GMXVWVWKHVLGHPDVNFRQWUDVWOHYHO
― BRIGHT 60 0 - 100 $GMXVWVWKHVLGHPDVNEULJKWQHVVOHYHO
2))7<3(
Sets the center marker.
2))7XUQVRIIWKHFHQWHUPDUNHU
5
― CENTER MARKER 7<3( 7<3(0DUNHUZLWKEODQNDWWKHFHQWHU
7<3(7<3(
7<3(0DUNHU /DUJH ZLWKOLQHVFURVVLQJDWWKHFHQWHU

7<3(0DUNHU 6PDOO ZLWKOLQHVFURVVLQJDWWKHFHQWHU
MARKER ON/
― OFF OFF, ON Sets the ON/OFF of the marker display.
OFF[VF]
6$)(7<)506$)(
MARKER SELECT $636$)($63(&7
― 6$)(7< Sets the marker types
[VF] C.CROSS, CROSS10,
&5266
CENTER MARKER
― OFF 2))7<3($7<3(% Sets the ON/OFF of the center marker display.
[VF]
ASPECT MARKER
― Sets the aspect marker types.
[VF]
SAFETY MARKER
― WR 6HWVWKHVDIHW\PDUNHUV LQFUHPHQWV
[VF]
2))6+$'2:
― SHADOW MODE [VF] OFF Sets the shadow of the safety markers or aspect markers.
MRK+SHD
SHADOW LEVEL
― Sets the shadow level.
[VF]
:+,7(<(//2:5('
MARKER COLOR
― WHITE %/8(*5((1&<$1 Sets the marker display color.
[VF]
0$*(17$

― MARKER LEVEL [VF] Sets the marker display level.

― USER MARKER [VF] OFF OFF, ON Sets the ON/OFF of the user marker display.
MARKER LEVEL
― Sets the user marker display level.
[VF]
SCENE SELECT
SCENE1 6&(1(6&(1( 6HWVW\SHVRIVFHQHV
[VF]
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 87

■ FOCUS ASSIST
$IXQFWLRQXVHGWRVHWWKHKLJKOLJKWRIWKHYLHZ¿QGHUYLGHRVLJQDOVHWFDQGVXSSRUWDFDPHUDPDQGXULQJVKRRWLQJ
[VF PEAKING & VFVIDEO SETTING]
Initial
VF PEAKING[VF]
― PEAKING [VF] OFF ON, OFF 6HWVWKH212))RI3($.,1*RQWKH9)VFUHHQ
― PEAKING MODE [VF] + 9 + 9+21/< 6HWVWKHHGJHPRGHRI3($.,1*
― PEAKING WIDTH [VF] 1 1-4 6HWVWKHHGJHZLGWKRI3($.,1*
― NOISE SUP [VF] 0 0-9 Sets the removal level of the noise signals.
― PEAKING UP [VF] OFF OFF,X2,X4,X8 6HWVWKH3($.,1*OHYHO [[[
6HWVWKH212))RI3($.,1*FRUUHVSRQGLQJWRWKH=220UDWLRRIWKH
― ZOOMUP PEAKING [VF] OFF ON, OFF
camera lens.
― ZOOMUP PEAK-MAX [VF] 100 MIN - 100(1step) 6HWVWKHPD[LPXP7HOHVLGHYDOXHRI=220833($.,1*
― ZOOMUP PEAK-MIN [VF] 0 0$; VWHS 6HWVWKHPLQLPXP:LGHVLGHYDOXHRI=220833($.,1*
:+,7(<(//2:5('
― COLOR PEAKING [VF] WHITE *LYHVFRORUVWR3($.,1*RIWKH9)YLGHR
%/8(*5((1
― VIDEO MAG [VF] X2 X2,X4,X8 Sets the display settings of the VF screen magnification function.
MAG. TIMER [VF] OFF OFF, 1 - 7sec Sets the display time of the VF screen magnification function.
VF VIDEO SETTING
― COLOR/MONO [VF] COLOR COLOR,MONO Switches between COLOR/MONO for the VF screen.
<5*%
― VIDEO SELECT 5*% Sets the video signals to change the VF screen to MONO display.
5*%5*%
0 - 100 continuously
― DTL Sets the outline correction level in the VF screen.
variable
0+]0+]0+] 6HWVWKHRXWOLQHFRUUHFWLRQKLJKOLJKWKRUL]RQWDOIUHTXHQF\LQWKH9)
― BOOST FREQ. 0+]
0+]:,'7+ screen.
0 - 100 continuously
― NOISE SUP. 3 Sets the noise removal level during outline correction in the VF screen.
variable
― CAPTURE DISPLAY [VF] OFF OFF,ON Performs a capture of the VF display screen.

― DISP.INTERVAL [VF] )5$0( Sets the display interval of the VF screen display.
30,60 frame
*$00$ *$00$
― GAMMA SELECT [VF] Sets the gamma curve of video signals that are displayed on the VF screen.
2.2 1.4,1.8,2.2,2.6,3.0
― PICTURE-IN-PICTURE __ __ __
― PIP ON/OFF OFF OFF,ON Switches between ON/OFF of PINP.
LOW-R, LOW-L, UPL,
― POSITION LOW-R Sets the display position of the child screen.
UP-R
― SIZE 6HWVWKHVL]HRIFKLOGVFUHHQ VL]HUDWLRDJDLQVWSDUHQWVFUHHQ
Sets the mix ratio of child screen and parent screen.
― BORDER MARKER OFF OFF,ON
Displays child screen only in the child screen area with a ratio of 100.
Sets the mix ratio of child screen and parent screen.
FADE RATIO 100 0 to 100
Displays child screen only in the child screen area with a ratio of 100.
― PICTURE-IN-PICTURE [VF] Set ON/OFF and position of PINP.
Sets ON/OFF of the function that increases the color strength of the VF
CHROMA UP [VF] OFF OFF, ON
video.
)2&86$66,67FRQWLQXHVWRWKHQH[WSDJH!!
88 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

[FOCUS ASSIST WINDOW]

)2&86$66,67FRQWLQXHG!!
Initial
FOCUS ASSIST WINDOW

6HWVWKH$66,67$5($GLVSOD\
75,**(5 75,**(521
― ASSIST AREA 6HOHFW75,**(521LI\RXZLVKWRGLVSOD\ZLWKWKHWULJJHURIOHQVRSHUDWLRQ
ON $/:$<6212))
etc.
FOCUS, FOCUS/ZOOM, 7ULJJHUWRGLVSOD\$66,67$5($
― TRIGGER FOCUS
LENS VTR 7KLVVHWWLQJLVXVHGZKHQ75,**(521LVVHOHFWHG
― AREA ON/OFF SW NONE LENS VTR, NONE 6HOHFWVWKHVZLWFKWKDWWXUQVRQRIIWKH$66,67$5($
― VF VIDEO MAG. UNLINK LINK, UNLINK 6HWVZKHWKHUWRVHQGFRQWUROVLJQDOVRI9)9,'(20$*IXQFWLRQWR9)RUQRW
― ASSIST DATA NO.1 N0.1 - N0.4 6HOHFWVWKH$66,67'$7$FRPSLOHGLQWKH$66,67'$7$6(77,1*PHQX
ASSIST DATA SETTING
$/7(51$7( 6HWVWKH6:RSHUDWLRQWR020(17$5<RU$/7(51$7(ZKHQWKHWULJJHULV
― SW ACTION $/7(51$7(
020(17$5< assigned to LENS VTR SW.
66
― AREA DISP TIME 1.0S Sets the time from trigger detection until the focus assist area is erased.
VHFLQWHUYDO
Sets the focus assist area range.
― AREA SIZE 1 - 100
If set to “100", it is the entire screen domain.
― AREA LEVEL - 6HWVWKHLPDJHOHYHORIWKH$66,67$5($
― AREA COLOR MONO 0212&2/251(*$ 6HWVZKHWKHUWKH$66,67$5($LPDJHVKRXOGEHFRORUPRQRFKURPHRUQHJDWLYH
― AREA MARKER OFF ON, OFF Sets whether the assist area frame marker is displayed nor not.
EDGE BOOST
―
LEVEL
1 - 100
0212&<$1
Sets the boost level of the edge signal.
5
― EDGE COLOR MONO 0$*(17$<(//2: Sets the color of the edge signal.
*5((15('%/8(

7KHFRQWHQWVVHWLQWKH$66,67'$7$6(77,1*PHQXDUHVWRUHGDV$66,67
STORE DATA --- N0.1 - N0.4 '$7$6HOHFWWKHQXPEHUV\RXZLVKWRVWRUHIURP1RWR1RDQGZULWHRYHU
the present data to store them.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 89

■ INTERCOM/AUDIO
Performs various settings according to the operation of intercom and audio.
[MIC GAIN CONTROL]
Initial
MIC GAIN CONTROL

― MIC1 SETUP
Sets the microphone mode.
The power is supplied according to the MIC-1 POWER switch on the back side of
MIC1 SETUP
― MIC MIC / LINE the camera during the MIC setting.
SELECT
The power supply is stopped regardless of the MIC-1 POWER switch on the back
side of the camera during the LINE setting.
+4dB, 0dB, -10dB,-20dB,
― MIC1 STEP -40dB -30dB, -40dB, The MIC1 gain is changed step by step.
G%G%
Fine adjustment of the MIC1 gain. The gain decreases about -10 dB with -100,
MIC1 FINE 0 -100 to100
and increases about +10 dB with +100.
MIC2 SETUP
Sets the microphone mode.
The power is supplied according to the MIC-2 POWER switch on the back side of
MIC2 SETUP
― MIC MIC / LINE the camera during the MIC setting.
SELECT
The power supply is stopped regardless of the MIC-2 POWER switch on the back
side of the camera during the LINE setting.
+4dB, 0dB, -10dB,-20dB,
― MIC2 STEP -40dB -30dB, -40dB, The MIC2 gain is changed stepwise.
G%G%
Fine adjustment of the MIC2 gain. The gain decreases about -10 dB with -100,
MIC2 FINE 0 -100 to100
and increases about +10 dB with +100.
,17(5&20$8',2FRQWLQXHVWRWKHQH[WSDJH!!
90 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

[INTERCOM SET UP (1/3)]

[HEADSET MIC]
Initial
HEADSET SET MIC

― INTERCOM1
― MIC TYPE '<1$0,& &$5%21'<1$0,& Selects carbon or dynamic for INTERCOM1 microphone.
Sets the ON/OFF of power supply to the carbon microphone.
― POWER ON ON, OFF
(Fixed to "OFF" when Dynamic MIC is selected.)
G%G%G%
― GAIN -60dB Changes the microphone gain of INTERCOM1 by step.
20dB /-10dB / 0dB
Fine adjustment of the INTERCOM1 gain. The gain decreases about -10 dB with
― FINE 0 -100 - 100
"-100", and increases about +10 dB with "+100".
Selects the balance/unbalance mode.
― UNBAL OFF OFF / ON Can select ON/OFF for dynamic microphone setting, and fixed to ON for the
carbon microphone.
― INTERCOM2
― MIC TYPE '<1$0,& &$5%21'<1$0,& Selects carbon or dynamic for INTERCOM2 microphone.
Sets the ON/OFF of power supply to the carbon microphone.
― POWER ON ON, OFF
(Fixed to "OFF" when Dynamic MIC is selected.)
― GAIN 1250$/ 1250$/+, Changes the microphone gain of INTERCOM2 by step.
Fine adjustment of the INTERCOM2 gain. The gain decreases about -10 dB with
― FINE 0 -100 to 100
"-100", and increases about +10 dB with "+100".
Selects the balance/unbalance mode.
UNBAL OFF OFF / ON Can select ON/OFF for dynamic microphone setting, and fixed to ON for the
carbon microphone.
5

[INTERCOM MODE]
Initial
1250$/&5266
3HUIRUPV'$7$/2$'RISUHVHWV$OVRGLVSOD\VWKHORDGHGVHWWLQJYDOXH
INTERCOM MODE 1250$/ /,1((1*86$
If the setting value is changed after being loaded, it becomes "USER".
PRESET1 /PRESET2
[INTERCOM FUNCTION]
Initial
INTERCOM FUNCTION
6ZLWFKHVEHWZHHQ212))RI$)7(59(0,;
:KHQWKH(1*DQG352'OLQHVDUHPL[HGDQGOLVWHQHGWKHYROXPHDGMXVWPHQWV
― AFTER VR MIX OFF ON / OFF
FDQEHDVVLJQHGWR,17(5&20DQGLQ(1*DQG352'(DFKRIWKHPFDQEH
adjusted individually.
:KHQWKH$)7(5950,;LVWXUQHGRQWKH(1*352'OLQHVDUHDYDLODEOH
― INTERCOM1 VOL CTRL BOTH (1*352'%27+ and are in an exclusive relationship with INTERCOM2 VOL CTRL. (Fixed to
%27+ZKHQ$)7(5950,;LVWXUQHGRII
:KHQWKH$)7(5950,;LVWXUQHGRQWKH(1*352'OLQHVDUHDYDLODEOH
― INTERCOM2 VOL CTRL BOTH (1*352'%27+ and are in an exclusive relationship with INTERCOM1 VOL CTRL. (Fixed to
%27+ZKHQ$)7(5950,;LVWXUQHGRII
The control of INTERCOM MIC button on the right side of the camera is linked
to the MIC operation of INTEROCM.
6:6(/ 8VHWKH,17(5&200,&EXWWRQWRRSHUDWHWKHPLFURSKRQHRIWKH
― FRONT MIC ON SEL SW SEL SW SEL / INC1 / INC2 lines selected by INTERCOM selector switch.
,1& 7 KH,17(5&200,&EXWWRQRSHUDWHV,17(5&20
,1& 7 KH,17(5&200,&EXWWRQRSHUDWHV,17(5&20
(Operable from the MIC switch on the rear panel in all modes.)
7KH3*0RIWKHOLQHVVHOHFWHGE\,17(5&20VHOHFWRUVZLWFKDUHFRQWUROOHG
PGM FRONT VR 3*0 3*03*0
ZLWKWKH,17(5&203*0FRQWURONQRERQWKHULJKWVLGHRIWKHFDPHUD
<< INTERCOM/AUDIO continues to the next page >>
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 91

[INTERCOM SET UP (2/3)]

[INTERCOM1 SETUP INTERCOM1 SETUP]
,17(5&20$8',2FRQWLQXHG!!
Initial
INTERCOM1 SETUP
6:/,1.(1*352' 6HWVWKHVHOHFWLRQRI7$/.OLQHRI,17(5&20E\WKHVZLWFKRQWKHEDFNVLGH
― TALK MIX SW LINK
BOTH RIWKHFDPHUDDQGZKHWKHUWRIL[LWWR(1*OLQH352'OLQHRUERWKOLQHV
6:/,1.(1*352' Sets the selection of RECEIVE line of INTERCOM1 by the switch on the back
― RECEIVE MIX SW LINK
BOTH VLGHRIWKHFDPHUDDQGZKHWKHUWRIL[LWWR(1*OLQH352'OLQHRUERWKOLQHV
― ENG PHONE LEFT %27+/()75,*+7 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI(1*FKDQQHOWR+($'6(7
― PROD PHONE LEFT %27+/()75,*+7 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI352'FKDQQHOWR+($'6(7
OFF / BOTH / LEFT /
― INTERCOM2 --> INTERCOM1 OFF 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI,17(5&20FKDQQHOWR+($'6(7
5,*+7
OFF / BOTH / LEFT /
― PGM1 LEFT 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI3*0FKDQQHOWR+($'6(7
5,*+7
OFF / BOTH / LEFT /
5,*+7
OFF / BOTH / LEFT /
― PGM3 OFF 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI3*0FKDQQHOWR+($'6(7
5,*+7
OFF / BOTH / LEFT /
― TRACKER OFF 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI75$&.(5FKDQQHOWR+($'6(7
5,*+7
OFF / BOTH / LEFT /
― AUDIO MIC1 OFF 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI0,&FKDQQHOWR+($'6(7
5,*+7
OFF / BOTH / LEFT /
5,*+7
SIDE TONE 10 0 to 100 $GMXVWVWKHYROXPHRI6,'(721(
INTERCOM2 SETUP
6:/,1.(1*352' 6HWVWKHVHOHFWLRQRI7$/.OLQHRI,17(5&20E\WKHVZLWFKRQWKHEDFNVLGH
― TALK MIX SW LINK
BOTH RIWKHFDPHUDDQGZKHWKHUWRIL[LWWR(1*OLQH352'OLQHRUERWKOLQHV
6:/,1.(1*352' Sets the selection of RECEIVE line of INTERCOM2 by the switch on the back
― RECEIVE MIX SW LINK
BOTH VLGHRIWKHFDPHUDDQGZKHWKHUWRIL[LWWR(1*OLQH352'OLQHRUERWKOLQHV
― ENG PHONE LEFT %27+/()75,*+7 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI(1*FKDQQHOWR+($'6(7
― PROD PHONE LEFT %27+/()75,*+7 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI352'FKDQQHOWR+($'6(7
OFF / BOTH / LEFT /
― INTERCOM1 --> INTERCOM2 OFF 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI,17(5&20FKDQQHOWR+($'6(7
5,*+7
OFF / BOTH / LEFT /
5,*+7
OFF / BOTH / LEFT /
5,*+7
OFF / BOTH / LEFT /
― PGM3 OFF 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI3*0FKDQQHOWR+($'6(7
5,*+7
OFF / BOTH / LEFT /
― TRACKER OFF 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI75$&.(5FKDQQHOWR+($'6(7
5,*+7
OFF / BOTH / LEFT /
5,*+7
OFF / BOTH / LEFT /
5,*+7
SIDE TONE 10 0 to 100 $GMXVWVWKHYROXPHRI6,'(721(
92 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

[INTERCOM SET UP (3/3)] ,17(5&20$8',2FRQWLQXHG!!

Initial
Menu Item Setting value Description, Remarks
setting
INTERCOM SET UP
EARPHONE SETUP
― ENG LEFT 2))%27+/()75,*+7 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI(1*FKDQQHOWR($53+21(

― PROD LEFT 2))%27+/()75,*+7 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI352'FKDQQHOWR($53+21(
― INTERCOM1 LEFT 2))%27+/()75,*+7 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI,17(5&20FKDQQHOWR($53+21(
― INTERCOM 2 LEFT 2))%27+/()75,*+7 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI,17(5&20FKDQQHOWR($53+21(
― PGM1 5,*+7 2))%27+/()75,*+7 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI3*0FKDQQHOWR($53+21(
― AUDIO MIC1 OFF 2))%27+/()75,*+7 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI0,&FKDQQHOWR($53+21(
― AUDIO MIC2 OFF 2))%27+/()75,*+7 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI0,&FKDQQHOWR($53+21(
TRACKER LEFT 2))%27+/()75,*+7 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI75$&.(5FKDQQHOWR($53+21(
[EARPHONE VOL SETUP]

Initial
setting
EARPHONE VOL SETUP 30 0 to 80 $GMXVWVWKHYROXPHRI($53+21(.
,17(5&20$8',2FRQWLQXHVWRWKHQH[WSDJH!! 5
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 93

[INTERCOM SET UP(E) (1/2) ] ,17(5&20$8',2FRQWLQXHG!!

Initial
setting
INTERCOM SET UP(E)
― INTERCOM 1/2 MIC VOL 100 0 to 200 Finely adjusts the volume of MIC1 and MIC2 for INTERCON1/2.
INTERCOM VOL CURVE
― Finely adjusts the volume curve of your preference for the knob.
SETUP
― INTERCOM1
Switches the volume change level for the knob.
/2: 6HWWLQJIRUILQHDGMXVWPHQWRIORZYROXPHIRULQHDUFDQDO
headphones, etc.
― INTERCOM 1250$/ /2:1250$/+,*+
125$0/ 6HWWLQJIRUQRUPDORSHUDWLQJHQYLURQPHQW
+,*+ 6HWWLQJIRUURXJKDGMXVWPHQWRIWKHYROXPHUHJDUGOHVVRIDXGLR
quality.
headphones, etc.
― PGM1/2 1250$/ /2:1250$/+,*+
quality.
― PGM3 (VOLUME SET) 100 0 to 200 $GMXVWVWKHYROXPHRI3*0
― INTERCOM2
headphones, etc.
― INTERCOM 1250$/ /2:1250$/+,*+
quality.
headphones, etc.
― PGM1/2 1250$/ /2:1250$/+,*+
quality.
PGM3 (VOL SET) 100 0 to 200 $GMXVWVWKHYROXPHRI3*0
― INTERCOM2 B.P(OPTION)
― INTERCOM2 B.P MODE INTERCOM ,17(5&20%(/73$&. Sets when the belt pack is connected to INTERCOM2.
― LEVEL CC CC / RTS Selects a type of belt pack.
Finely adjusts the amplifier gain of the INTERCOM2 microphone. The
FINE 0 -100 to 100 amplifier gain is decreased by about -10dB at "-100", and increased by about
+10dB at "+100".
― INTERCOM MODE SETUP
5($'<1250$/
&5266/,1((1*
― DATA LOAD 5($'< Loads the connection setting (preset setting) of INTERCOM line.
86$35(6(7
35(6(7&$1&(/
5($'<35(6(7
DATA SAVE 5($'< Saves the connection setting (preset setting) of INTERCOM line.
35(6(7&$1&(/
― PGM SETUP(OPTION)
― PGM1 OFF ON / OFF 6HWVWKH212))IRURXWSXWWLQJ3*0VLJQDOWR3*0OLQH
― PGM2 OFF ON / OFF 6HWVWKH212))IRURXWSXWWLQJ3*0VLJQDOWR3*0OLQH
― PGM3 ON ON / OFF 6HWVWKH212))IRURXWSXWWLQJ3*0VLJQDOWR3*0OLQH
― AUDIO MIC1 OFF ON / OFF 6HWVWKH212))IRURXWSXWWLQJ$8',20,&FKDQQHOWR3*0OLQH
INTERCOM2 OFF ON / OFF 6HWVWKH212))IRURXWSXWWLQJ$8',20,&FKDQQHOWR3*0OLQH
PGM VOL SETUP(OPTION) 0dB +4dB / 0dB /-20dB 6HWVWKHRXWSXWOHYHORI3*0

94 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

[INTERCOM SET UP(E) (2/2)]

[TRACKER SETUP]
,17(5&20$8',2FRQWLQXHG!!
Initial
RECEIVE 1/2 CH SETUP

OFF/BOTH /
― ENG OFF 75$&.(5 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI(1*FKDQQHOWR75$&.(5,17(5&20
75$&.(5
OFF/BOTH /
― PROD OFF 75$&.(5 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI352'FKDQQHOWR75$&.(5,17(5&20
75$&.(5
OFF/BOTH /
― INTERCOM1 OFF 75$&.(5 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI,17(5&20FKDQQHOWR75$&.(5,17(5&20
75$&.(5
OFF/BOTH /
75$&.(5
OFF/BOTH /
― PGM1 OFF 75$&.(5 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI3*0FKDQQHOWR75$&.(5,17(5&20
75$&.(5
OFF/BOTH /
75$&.(5
OFF/BOTH /
75$&.(5
― AUDIO MIC1 OFF

OFF/BOTH /
75$&.(5 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI$8',20,&FKDQQHOWR75$&.(5,17(5&20
5
75$&.(5
OFF/BOTH /

AUDIO MIC2 OFF 75$&.(5 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI$8',20,&FKDQQHOWR75$&.(5,17(5&20
75$&.(5
RECEIVE 3/4 CH SETUP
OFF/BOTH /
― ENG OFF 75$&.(5 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI(1*FKDQQHOWR75$&.(5,17(5&20
75$&.(5
OFF/BOTH /
― PROD OFF 75$&.(5 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI352'FKDQQHOWR75$&.(5,17(5&20
75$&.(5
OFF/BOTH /
75$&.(5
OFF/BOTH /
75$&.(5
OFF/BOTH /
75$&.(5
OFF/BOTH /
75$&.(5
OFF/BOTH /
75$&.(5
OFF/BOTH /
― AUDIO MIC1 OFF 75$&.(5 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI$8',20,&FKDQQHOWR75$&.(5,17(5&20
75$&.(5
OFF/BOTH /
AUDIO MIC2 OFF 75$&.(5 6HWVWKHDVVLJQPHQWRI$8',20,&FKDQQHOWR75$&.(5,17(5&20
75$&.(5
RECEIVE VOL LEVEL -20dB -20dB / 0dB &KDQJHVWKHRXWSXWJDLQRI75$&.(5
TALK SETUP
― MIC OFF ON / OFF &RQWUROVWKH212))RI75$&.(50,&
― UNBAL OFF ON / OFF 6HWVWKHXQEDODQFHUHFHLYHPRGHRI75$&.(50,&
― GAIN -20dB -20dB / 0dB Sets the mic gain of 75$&.(50,&.
)LQHO\DGMXVWVWKHJDLQRIWKH75$&.(50,&PLFURSKRQH7KHJDLQLVGHFUHDVHGE\
FINE 0 -100 to 100
about -10dB at "-100", and increased by about +10dB at "+100".
(1*35' 6HOHFWVZKHWKHUWRFRQQHFWWKH7$/.OLQHRI75$&.(5WR(1*OLQH352'OLQHRU
TRACKER MIX OFF
BOTH/OFF ERWKRUQRWWRFRQQHFWWRWKH6<67(0OLQHV
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 95

[MEMORY COARD]
,17(5&20$8',2FRQWLQXHG!!
Menu Item Initial

setting Setting value Description, Remarks
MEMORY CARD
― SAVE FILE
― INTERCOM FILE - Save the setting values related to INTERCOM.
TRACKER FILE - 6DYHWKHVHWWLQJYDOXHVUHODWHGWR75$&.(5
LOAD FILE
― INTERCOM FILE - Calls the setting values related to INTERCOM.
TRACKER FILE - &DOOVWKHVHWWLQJYDOXHVUHODWHGWR75$&.(5
96 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ VIDEO I/O
Sets the assignment of video signals for input/output connector of the camera.
Initial
RET-1, RET-2, RET-3,
Sets the signals outputted from the SDI OUT1 connector.
RET-4, HD Q-TV1, HD
SDI OUT1 SEL VF When they are set to RET-1 SEL and RET-2 SEL, they are linked to RET-1/RET-
Q-TV2, VF, MON, RET-1
2 selector switch on the back.
SEL, RET-2 SEL
RET-4, HD Q-TV1, HD
SEL, RET-2 SEL
RET-4, HD Q-TV1, HD
SEL, RET-2 SEL
RET-4, HD Q-TV1, HD
When they are set to RET-1 SEL and RET-2 SEL, they are linked to RET-1/RET-
SDI I/O4 SEL VF Q-TV2, VF, MON, RET-
1 SEL, RET-2 SEL, HD
Only SDI I/O4 can be set to the HD TRUNK input.
TRUNK
Setting )8// 'LVSOD\VWKH%$56VLJQDOVXVHGKLVWRULFDOO\
BARS MODE( E) FULL, MULTI
value 08/7,'LVSOD\VWKHPXOWLIRUPDW%$56VLJQDOV
BARS( E) OFF ON, OFF 6ZLWFKHVEHWZHHQ212))RIWKHFRORU%$56VLJQDOV
Caution:
&+$5 &KDUDFWHUJHQHUDWRUWHVWVLJQDOV
021 0RQLWRUYLGHRVLJQDORXWSXWIRU&&8
5
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 97

■ LENS
3HUIRUPVWKHVHWWLQJVUHTXLUHGWRVHWOHQVLULVHVDQGFUHDWHOHQV¿OHV
[AUTO IRIS SET] Sets the operating conditions of the auto iris.
Menu Item Initial

AUTO IRIS SET

21(QDEOHVDXWRLULVRSHUDWLRQVHWWLQJ
― IRIS SET MODE OFF ON, OFF
If set to "ON", the iris adjustment from the remote controller is disabled.
$GMXVWVWKHFRQYHUJHQFHOHYHORIDXWRLULV
― LEVEL SET 0 -100 to +100 Shoot the registration chart with the camera and adjust the value so that the video
OHYHOEHFRPHV
Shoot the gray scale chart with the camera and adjust the value so that the video
OHYHOLV
― PEAK RATIO SET -70 -100 to +100
Set the exposure for a bright area in the “+” direction and for a dark area in the “-”
direction.
WINDOW1 to 6
1 2 3
― WINDOW 1 Sets the level detection range of the auto iris.

4 5 6
Sets the response speed characteristics of the auto-iris.

― IRIS SPEED 1 to100
The auto-iris speed becomes slower for “1” and faster for “100”.
Sets the auto-iris response sensitivity characteristics.
The auto-iris operation sensitivity is such that “1” is low and “100” is high.
― IRIS GAIN 1 to100
+XQWLQJWHQGVWRRFFXUPRUHRIWHQDVWKHYDOXHJRHVXS 6HWLWWRWKHGHIDXOWYDOXH³´
as long as hunting is not occurring)
The F value when the iris is set to maximum aperture during the auto iris
IRIS LIMIT F22 F22, F20, F18, F16
operation.
<< LENS continues to the next page >>
98 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

[LENS: FILE SETTING]

<< LENS continued >>
Menu Item Initial Setting value Description, Remarks

setting
FILE SETTING
Selects the lens file No.
- If the lens code is obtained from the lens, "(CODE SEL)" is displayed on the
― NUMBER OFF NO.1 to NO.16, OFF back of the lens No. display.
,I$8726(/LVVHWWR21 $8726(/ LVGLVSOD\HGRQWKHEDFNRIWKH
lens No. display.
Sets the file name per lens file.
― NAME (---------) 12 characters *LYLQJWKHOHQVW\SHQDPHHWFPDNHVHDVLHUWRILQGWKHOHQV1RDQGOHQV
compatibility.
Name display section for
― (MODEL) (---------) Displays the lens name obtained from the serial lens.
$8726(/
ON-1, ON-2, ON-3,
― EXTENDER OFF Displays the extender status.
x0.8 CONV, OFF
$XWRPDWLFDOO\VZLWFKHVWKHOHQVILOH1RDFFRUGLQJWRWKHW\SHQDPHREWDLQHG
― AUTO SEL OFF ON, OFF
from the lens.
― FILE SET OFF 0$18$/$8722)) 3OHDVHUHIHUWR&UHDWHVWKH/HQV)LOHIRUPRUHGHWDLOVRQ),/(6(7
&3257$%/(
C.STUDIO
C.FIELD
6HWVWKHOHQVW\SHXVHGWRPDWFKWKHRSHUDWLRQSURSHUW\RIWKH]RRPWUDFNLQJ
LENS TYPE OFF )3257$%/(
'7/WRWKH]RRPSURSHUW\RIWKHOHQV
F.STUDIO
F.FIELDOFF
OFF
SERIAL I/F (E) (1$%/( (1$%/(',6$%/( 6HWVWKH(1$%/(',6$%/(WRWKHVHULDOLQWHUIDFHRIWKHOHQV 5
Caution:

/HQVW\SH
&3257$%/( &DQRQSRUWEOHOHQV
&678',2 &DQRQVWXGLROHQV
&),(/' &DQRQ¿HOGOHQV
)3257$%/( )XMLQRQSRUWEOHOHQV
)678',2 )XMLQRQVWXGLROHQV
)),(/' )XMLQRQ¿HOGOHQV
2)) =RRPWUDFNLQJ'7/LV2))
7KLVLVVHWSHUOHQV¿OH 1R
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 99

■ FUNCTION SW
6HWVWKHIXQFWLRQVZLWFKHVRIWKHFDPHUDDQGYLHZ¿QGHU

setting
5(75(7$%% Selects the function to be assigned to each function switch.
$:%)2&86$66,67 ,ILWLVVHWWR$%%DQG$:%$%%DQG$:%DUHSHUIRUPHGZKHQWKHIXQFWLRQ
FUNC SW1 RET-1
',63/$<02'( switch is pressed and held.
P-IN-P(RET) ,ILWLVVHWWR)2&86$66,67WKHIROORZLQJRSHUDWLRQLVSHUIRUPHG
7KH>$66,67$5($@LWHPVRQWKH7230(18)2&86$66,67)2&86
$66,67:,1'2:VFUHHQDUHVZLWFKHGHYHU\WLPH6:LVSUHVVHG
5(75(7$%% :KHQWKHVHULDOOHQVLVDWWDFKHG5HSHDWV75,**(521BB!2))
FUNC SW2 RET-2
$:%)2&86$66,67 :KHQLWHPVRWKHUWKDQVHULDOOHQVDUHDWWDFKHG5HSHDWV$/:$<621BB!
OFF
RET, ZOOM-, Sets the button function of RET-1 and RET-2/MIC on the top part of the handle.
HANDLE RET SW RET
FOCUS, NONE To assign it to ZOOM and FOCUS, it requires a serial lens.
Sets the operation speed of ZOOM control.
ZOOM SPEED 0 to 100
"0" indicates a slow speed and "100" indicates a high speed.
Sets the operation speed of FOCUS control.
FOCUS SPEED 0 to 100
"0" indicates a slow speed and "100" indicates a high speed.
Sets a function of the VTR SW button on the lens.
RET-2, MIC,
VTR SW RET-2 ,IWKH75,**(5LWHPRQWKH)2&86$66,67PHQXLVVHWWR/(16975
)2&86$667
)2&8675,*LVIL[HG LQIRUPDWLRQGLVSOD\
Sets the function to the RET-2/MIC button on the top part of the handle and the
RET-2/MIC SW RET-2 RET-2, MIC
left side of the camera.
VF F1 SW [VF] MONO 121(&$3785( Sets the function to the FUNCTION switch F1.
&+520$&37',63
VF F2 SW [VF] 0$5.(5 )$1*$00$0$* Sets the function to the FUNCTION switch F2.
VF F3 SW [VF] SDI 0$5.(50212 Sets the function to the FUNCTION switch F3.
12,6(6833($.,1*
3($.8335(6(7
REVERSE, SCENE, SDI,
7$//<86505.96&
VF F4 SW [VF] 7$//< :)0=03($.3,1 Sets the function to the FUNCTION switch F4.
3 9) *$00$
)2&86$66,673,1
P(RET)
100 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ VIDEO ADJUSTMENT
Sets the functions that perform video signal processing automatically or manually.
[AUTO SETUP MODE]
Menu Item Initial

AUTO SETUP MODE

LEVEL,FULL,QUICK,
― AUTO SETUP LEVEL 3HUIRUPVHDFK$8726(783
)48,&.$:6$%6
,17 6HWVWRWKHGHIDXOWIDFWRU\VHWWLQJ
― FULL AUTO REF INT INT, EXT
(;7 6HWVWRWKHXVHUVHWWLQJ
6HOHFWVZKHWKHUWRDXWRPDWLFDOO\LQFOXGHWKH$,5,6ZKHQWKH$:%LVSHUIRUPHG
― AWB WITH A.IRIS ON ON, OFF This menu is enabled only during the self contain operation.
It is always “OFF” during the CCU operation.
OFF,ON-0.3s,
21V
ON-0.7s, 6PRRWKO\VZLWFKHVEHWZHHQ$FK%FKIRUWKH$:%
― SMOOTH AWB 21V
ON-1.0s, <RXFDQVHWWKHWUDQVLWLRQWLPHIRUWKHVZLWFKLQJ
21V
ON-2.0s
21 0DNHVWKHFRQYHUJHQFHYDOXHRIWKH$:%FRQYHUJHGWRWKH(;7$:%
― AWB REFERENCE ON ON, OFF REF.
2)) &DOLEUDWHVWKH5FK%FKWRWKH*FK
6ZLWFKHVWKHDXWRDGMXVWPRGHVRIWKH$872%/$&.6+$',1* $%6
1250$/ 1250$/ 3HUIRUPVWKH$%6
― ABS MODE 1250$/ $36 $36 3HUIRUPVWKH$8723($.6+$',1* $36 DIWHUSHUIRUPLQJWKH
321/< $%6
321/< 2QO\SHUIRUPVWKH$36EXWQRWWKH$%6
(1$%/( $XWRPDWLFDOO\DGMXVWVWKHDQJOHRIYLHZRIWKHFKDUWZKHQ)8//
5
$8726(783LVSHUIRUPHG
― CHART SEARCH (1$%/( (1$%/(',6$%/(
',6$%/( 0DQXDOO\DGMXVWVWKHDQJOHRIYLHZRIWKHFKDUWZKHQ)8//$872

SETUP is performed.
REFERENCE SET $%% $%%$:% &UHDWHVWKHFRQYHUJHQFHYDOXH (;75()),/( RI$:%DQG$%%
[PROCESS SETUP]
setting
PROCESS SETUP
Sets the master gamma value.
― MASTER GAMMA 0.0 -100 to +100 The gamma value decreases in the direction of “-100” and increases in the
direction of “+100”.
Sets the master pedestal value.
― MASTER PED 0.0 -100 to +100 The pedestal value decreases in the direction of “-100” and increases in the
Sets the master flare value.
― MASTER FLARE 0.0 -100 to +100 The flare value decreases in the direction of “-100” and increases in the direction
of “+100”.
Sets the detail amount.
― DTL GAIN 0.0 -100 to +100 The detail amount decreases in the direction of “-100” and increases in the
5($'<
5HWXUQVWKHVHWWLQJVFKDQJHGZLWK/(9(/$'-867WRWKHVWDWHSULRUWRFKDQJH
― MANUAL CLR 5($'< 386+6(7ĺ&/5
as a group.
&$1&(/
ON-0.3s,
21V
ON-0.7s,ON-1.0s, &KDQJHVWKH67(3*$,1VWHSE\VWHS
― SMOOTH STEP GAIN 21V
21V Possible to choose the time until convergence.
ON-2.0s,
OFF
Selects the type of gamma curve.
― GAMMA TYPE 1250$/ 1250$/&86720 1250$/ 1RUPDOJDPPDFXUYH
&86720&XVWRPJDPPDFXUYH
There are independent settings for three channels of the matrix, which can be
― MATRIX 1 1, 2, 3, OFF
switched.
― ADVANCED MATRIX OFF ON, OFF Turns on/off the advanced matrix.
― HV SLIM DTL TYPE +21/< +21/<921/<+9 Sets the type of SLIM DTL.
― V SLIM DTL FREQ $ $%&' Sets the boost frequency type of SLIM DTL.
― NR MODE OFF 2))/2:+,*+ Sets the NR (noise reducer).
DOWN CONV FILTER STD STD, HI, HQ, LOW Sets the FIR-FILTER for converting 4K video to HD (1080i / 1080p).
9,'(2$'-8670(17FRQWLQXHVWRWKHQH[WSDJH!!
Caution:
5HIHUWRQH[WSDJHRIWKH&86720*$00$IRUFXVWRPJDPPDGDWDHGLWLQJ
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 101

[CUSTOM GAMMA]
9,'(2$'-8670(17FRQWLQXHG!!

setting
CUSTOM GAMMA
― EASY MODE Easy creation mode. Sets various parameters and creates the custom gamma data.
Returns to the original custom gamma data.
― DEFAULT RESET - (;(&87(&$1&(/ 7KHRULJLQDOGDWDFDQQRWEHUHFRYHUHGRQFHLWLVRYHUZULWWHQZLWKWKH³6$9(´
function.
1250$/&86720WR
― SELECT 1250$/ Selects the gamma table to be created.

1250$//2*
― CURVE TYPE 1250$/ Sets the basic properties of gamma curve.
63(&,$/
6HWVWKHVORSHRIJDPPDFXUYHDWDURXQG
― INITIAL GAIN 1.0 to 9.0
The curve rises steeply as the value increases.
Sets what level it should be after the gamma has been applied when converting
― 18% GRAY WR
IURPOHYHOEHIRUHDSSOLHG
Sets the maximum level (the maximum input level to the gamma) before the
― DYNAMIC RANGE WR
gamma has been applied.
― WHITE LIMIT WR Sets the white clip after the gamma has been applied.
2))&$/
― CAL OFF 6HOHFWVWKHWHVWZDYHIRUP &$/ WRFKHFNWKHJDPPDWDEOH
&$/
Saves the data that has been created.
SAVE 5($'< (;(&87(&$1&(/ The data is temporary unless you save it.
Therefore, the data will be cleared if you end the menu without saving it.
― FLEXIBLE MODE
― DEFAULT RESET 5($'< (;(&87(&$1&(/ Resets the custom gamma data created.
1250$/&86720WR
― SELECT 1250$/ Selects the gamma table to be created.

― POINT WR Sets the video level before gamma.
6HWVWKHZLGWKRIWKHYLGHROHYHO7KH]HEUDSDWWHUQVLJQDOVLQGLFDWHWKHUDQJHRI
― WIDTH WR
the video level for adjustment.
$GMXVWVWKHOHYHOZLWKLQWKHVHWWLQJUDQJHRI32,17DQG:,'7+$JDPPD
― LEVEL 0 -100 to +100
curve with a smooth curve can be created focusing around the point.
2))&$/
CAL OFF 6HOHFWVWKHWHVWZDYHIRUP &$/ WRFKHFNWKHJDPPDWDEOH
&$/
OFF, PRESET,
― SHUTTER OFF Selects the electronic shutter.
9$5,$%/(
PRESET
Switches the shutter speed.

― SHUTTER SPEED --- 2QO\ZKHQ6+877(5LV35(6(7DQG9$5,$%/(
1/1000, 1/2000
9$5,$%/(
― SUPER V OFF OFF, ON Sets the ON/OFF of the SUPER V.
&86720WR$//!
― GAMMA CURVE COPY --- Copies the custom gamma data created to other gamma table in the camera.
&86720WR$//
― USB MEMORY
― SAVE --- Saves the custom gamma data to the USB memory.
LOAD --- Loads the custom gamma data from the USB memory.
DIGITAL EXTENDER MODE
― DIGITAL EXTENDER OFF OFF, ON Sets the ON/OFF of the digital extender.
MAGNIFICATION [ [[[[ Sets the magnification of the digital extender.
9,'(2$'-8670(17FRQWLQXHVWRWKHQH[WSDJH!!
102 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

[MATRIX]
9,'(2$'-8670(17FRQWLQXHG!!

setting
MATRIX PRESET DATA (E)
― MATRIX 1 BT.709
OFF, BT.709, SMPTE, Selects the preset of color matrix.
― MATRIX 2 BT.2020
EBU, BT.2020, USER1, ,QRUGHUWRVHOHFW86(5DQG\RXPXVWWXUQRQ0$75,;86(5 '$7$
USER2 6(7'$7$6(702'(
MATRIX 3 SMPTE
MATRIX USER1 DATA SET (E) Sets the preset (USER1) of color matrix.
21 6HWVWKHSUHVHWGDWD
― DATA SET MODE OFF ON, OFF
2)) 'RHVQRWVHWWKHSUHVHWGDWD
― R-G 0.0 -100 to+100 6HWVWKHPDWUL[RI5*
― R-B 0.0 -100 to+100 Sets the matrix of R-B.
― G-R 0.0 -100 to+100 6HWVWKHPDWUL[RI*5
― G-B 0.0 -100 to+100 6HWVWKHPDWUL[RI*%
― B-R 0.0 -100 to+100 BSets the matrix of B-R.
― B-G 0.0 -100 to+100 6HWVWKHPDWUL[RI%*
5($'< 1RUPDOVWDWXV
DATA CLEAR --- 5($'< 386+6(7!&/5 &OHDUVWKHSUHVHWGDWD
&$1&(/ ([LW'$7$&/($5ZLWKRXWFOHDULQJWKHVHWWLQJV
MATRIX USER2 DATA SET (E) Sets the preset (USER2) of color matrix.
― DATA SET MODE OFF ON, OFF

21 6HWVWKHSUHVHWGDWD
2)) 'RHVQRWVHWWKHSUHVHWGDWD 5
― R-G 0.0 -100 to+100 6HWVWKHPDWUL[RI5*

― R-B 0.0 -100 to+100 Sets the matrix of R-B.
― G-R 0.0 -100 to+100 6HWVWKHPDWUL[RI*5
― G-B 0.0 -100 to+100 6HWVWKHPDWUL[RI*%
― B-R 0.0 -100 to+100 BSets the matrix of B-R.
― B-G 0.0 -100 to+100 6HWVWKHPDWUL[RI%*
5($'< 1RUPDOVWDWXV
DATA CLEAR --- 5($'< 386+6(7!&/5 &OHDUVWKHSUHVHWGDWD
&$1&(/ ([LW'$7$&/($5ZLWKRXWFOHDULQJWKHVHWWLQJV
[OPTICAL ABERRATION CORR] << 9,'(2$'-8670(17FRQWLQXHG!!

setting
OPTICAL ABERRATION CORR. (E)
Switches between Enable/Disable of aberration correction.
(1$%/(
― CORRECTION (1$%/( This setting is saved when the power is turned off.
',6$%/(
7KHUHIRUHVHWLWWR',6$%/(LIDEHUUDWLRQFRUUHFWLRQLVQRWXVHG
― CORR. LEVEL 0 -10 to 10 Changes the intensity of the correction.
Sets whether a reminder to be shown on the VF or not when the aberration
― OAC GUIDE MARK ON ON, OFF
correction value is not properly received from the serial lens.
AUTO DPC(E) Performs automatic scratch correction of imaging element.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 103

■ TALLY/INDICATOR
6HWVWKHFRQGLWLRQVIRULQIRUPDWLRQGLVSOD\HGRQWKH7$//<GLVSOD\DQGYLHZ¿QGHU
Initial
FRONT TALLY [VF] LOW 2))/2:+,*+ Sets the ON/OFF of brightness and display of the front Tally.
VF TALLY LEVEL [VF] 7 1 to 10 Sets the brightness of VF Tally.
TALLY MODE [VF] *5* *5*5*5555 6HWVWKHGLVSOD\SRVLWLRQRI9)5*7DOO\
(1$%/(
BEZEL INDICATOR [VF] (1$%/( Sets to disable the indicator light in the frame.
',6$%/(
6HWVWKH212))RIWKHVHWWLQJYDOXHGLVSOD\VIRUWKH9)3($.,1*
VOLUME INDICATOR [VF] OFF ON, OFF
&2175$67%5,*+7
ZOOM INDICATOR [VF] OFF ON, OFF Sets the ON/OFF of the ZOOM position indicator display.
FOCUS INDICATOR [VF] OFF ON, OFF Sets the ON/OFF of theFOCUS position indicator display.
ZEBRA SETTING (Hidden when using SE)
6XSHULPSRVHVWKH]HEUDSDWWHUQVLJQDOVWRYLGHRZKHQWKHYLGHROHYHOH[FHHGV
each DETECT LEVEL.
7KHILUVW]HEUDVLJQDOV)LQH]HEUDSDWWHUQUXQQLQJWRZDUGVWKHWRSULJKWRIWKH
― ZEBRA OFF ON, OFF
screen (Tone management of the entire screen)
7KHVHFRQG]HEUDVLJQDOV7KLFN]HEUDSDWWHUQUXQQLQJWRZDUGVWKHERWWRPULJKW
of the screen (Tone management of subjects such as faces)
― ZEBRA1 DETECT WR 6HWVWKHMXGJPHQWOHYHORIWKHILUVW]HEUDVLJQDOV
― ZEBRA2 IND OFF ON, OFF 6HOHFWVWKH212))RIWKHVHFRQG]HEUDVLJQDOV
― ZEBRA2 DETECT WR 6HWVWKHMXGJPHQWOHYHORIWKHVHFRQG]HEUDVLJQDOV
ZEBRA IND LVL 78 1 to 100 6HWVWKHVXSHULPSRVLWLRQOHYHORIWKHVHFRQG]HEUDVLJQDOV
WFM/VSC SETTING [VF] Sets the waveform monitor (WFM).
― WAVE FORM [VF] OFF ON, OFF Sets the ON/OFF of WFM display.
― DIMMER[VF] MID /2:0,'+,*+ Sets the brightness of WFM.
― SIZE[VF] 1250$/ 1250$/60$// Sets the display of WFM.
― POSITION[VF] 5,*+7 5,*+7/()7&(17(5 Sets the display position (right/left/center) of WFM.
COLOR[VF] WHITE :+,7(*5((1 Sets the display color (white/green) of WFM.
VECTOR SCOPE[VF] OFF ON, OFF Sets the ON/OFF of the vector scope (VSC) display.
― DIMMER[VF] MID /2:0,'+,*+ Sets the brightness of VSC.
― MAGNIFICATION[VF] X1 X1, X2, X4, X8 Sets the magnification (×1/2/4/8) of VSC.
― SCALE[VF] 6HWVWKHVFDOHGLVSOD\ RI&2/25%2;
― POSITION[VF] 5,*+7 5,*+7/()7&(17(5 Sets the display position (right/left/center) of vector scope.
COLOR[VF] WHITE :+,7(*5((1 Sets the display color (white/green) of VSC.
104 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ FAN CONTROL
6HWVWKHRSHUDWLQJFRQGLWLRQVRIDLUFRROLQJIDQVEXLOWLQWKHFDPHUDDQGYLHZ¿QGHU

setting
$872 $XWRPDWLFDOO\FKDQJHVWKHFRROLQJIDQVSHHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHLQWHUQDO
temperature level.
$872
CAMERA FAN CONT MODE $872 6723 .HHSVWKHIDQVWRSSHGDVORQJDVWKHLQWHUQDOWHPSHUDWXUHGRHVQRWUHDFK
STOP
DFULWLFDOOHYHO,IWKHSRZHULVWXUQHGRQDJDLQLWUHWXUQVWR$872
*4
$872
VF FAN CONT MODE[VF] $872 OFF (Forced), 6HWVWKH)$1RSHUDWLRQRI9)WR$872)RUFH2)))RUFH21
ON (Forced)
66/2: 7KHIDQVSHHGLVYHU\VORZ
CAMERA --- (information display) 6/2: 7KHIDQVSHHGLVVORZ
125 1RUPDOIDQVSHHG
VF )$67 7KHIDQVSHHGLVIDVW
1* )DQPDOIXQFWLRQ
Caution:
7KHVXUIDFHWHPSHUDWXUHRIWKHHQFORVXUHPD\EHLQFUHDVHGKLJKHUWKDQWKHQRUPDOWHPSHUDWXUHZKHQWKH6723PRGHLVVHOHFWHG
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 105

■ FILE OPERATION
Saves and sets various data using USB memory.

setting
USB MEMORY Please refer to "128* page" for the usage of USB memory.
― SAVE FILE
― ALL DATA ---
― SNAP SHOT ---
― SCENE ---
― REFERENCE --- Saves the selected data to the USB memory.
― LENS ---
― MENU DATA ---
LOG DATA ---
LOAD FILE
― ALL DATA --- /RDGV$//ILOHV
― SNAP SHOT --- Reads snap shot files.
― SCENE --- $//6(/(&7180%(5 6HOHFWVDOO EXON RUVLQJOHLWHP VHOHFWHGIURPWR IURP6&(1('$7$
― PREFERENCE --- Loads the reference file.
― LENS --- $//6(/(&7180%(5 6HOHFWVDOO EXON RUVLQJOHLWHP VHOHFWHGIURPWR IURP/(16'$7$
Selects whether to load the entire MENU or only menu related "VF" or only
― MENU DATA --- $//9)
PHQXUHODWHG$8',2IURP0(18'$7$
LOG DATA ---
PRESET FILE LOAD )XQFWLRQWRORDGWKHXVHUVHWWLQJV (1*,1((56(7),/( RUIDFWRU\VHWWLQJV
)$&725<6(7),/( IRUWKHOHYHODGMXVWPHQWRUPHQXRIWKHFDPHUD
Used to return the camera state back to the previous or initial settings.
(1*,1 (1*,1((5 (1*,1((5 ,QLWLDOL]HVWKHVWDWHEDFNWRWKHXVHUVHWWLQJ
― FILE SELECT
EER )$&725< )$&725< , QLWLDOL]HVWKHVWDWHEDFNWRWKHLQLWLDOIDFWRU\VHWWLQJ
5($'<67$57
LOAD START 5($'< Selects from settings ready, start, or cancel.
&$1&(/
Saves the level adjustment and the setting status of the menu. The saved data can
PRESET FILE SAVE (E)
EHORDGHGDVXVHUVHWWLQJVGDWDRI35(6(7),/(/2$'
(1*,1
― FILE SELECT IL[HGWR(1*,1((5 Saves the user settings.
EER
5($'<67$57
SAVE START 5($'< Execute the save.
&$1&(/
PROGRAM UPDATE (E)
FILE SELECT --- 8SGDWHVDOOSURJUDPV 62)7 '352&)3*$ '5,9(32/6()3*$
Caution:
7KHSDFNDJHYHUVLRQLVXSGDWHGE\WKLVXSGDWH
106 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ SYSTEM
Performs various settings for the basic operation of the camera.

setting
SYSTEM
Delivery
Selects the camera operational configuration. (It can be set only for self-
SCAN MODE destination 33
operation.)
Set
0DWFKHVWKHSKDVHRILQWHUQDOV\QFKURQL]DWLRQVLJQDOVZLWKWKHSKDVHRIH[WHUQDO
V\QFKURQL]DWLRQVLJQDOV7KHLQWHUQDOV\QFKURQL]DWLRQJRHVIRUZDUGLQ
H PHASE 0.0 -100 to +100
GLUHFWLRQDQGGHOD\VZLWKGLUHFWLRQFRPSDUHGWRH[WHUQDOV\QFKURQL]DWLRQ ,W
can be set only for self contain operation.)
6(592 6HWVWRWKHDXWRPDWLFFRQWURO
FILTER SERVO CONT SERVO 6(5920$18$/
0$18$/6HWVWRWKHPDQXDOFRQWURO
BATT WARN VOLT 11.0V WR9 Sets the battery voltage value that issues the warning.
CAMERA ID SETUP (E)
Sets the camera No. at the time of program operation, etc. If the display of the
PROGRAM NO. (E) 1 1 to 99, OFF camera No. is set on the OCP side, the set ID No. is displayed. If the camera No.
is set on the camera side, the set ID No. is displayed on OCP.
Sets ID No. of the camera. Sets this when you want the camera No. to be detected
ID NO. (E) 1 1 to 40
and displayed on the CCU side.
Supplies power to the camera from an external power supply DC connector with
FIBER SINGLE MODE
OFF ON, OFF CCU connected. So, stop the power supply from the optical cable.
CONT (E)
If it is sets to "ON," the mode is switched to the single fiber mode.
Selects SIMUL MODE.
1250$/
In this mode, parameters related to color adjustment function (Color) and
outline correction function (Detail) can be individually set in 4K output and
5
HD output. Other controls are multi-link settings.
1250$/,1'(3
SIMUL MODE (E) 1250$/ ,1'(3*$00$
*$00$2))

, QDGGLWLRQWR1250$/DGMXVWPHQWDERYHWKLVPRGHFDQLQGHSHQGHQWO\DGMXVW
FRQWUROVLQFOXGLQJ*$00$.1((*$,13('DQG:+,7(&/,3IRU.
and HD outputs.
OFF
4The 4K and HD outputs are controlled by common adjustment parameters.
DATE(YY/MM/DD) (E) --- <<00'' Sets the date and time for saving files to a USB memory.
TIME (E) --- ++0066 Sets the date and time for saving files to a USB memory.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 107

■ INFORMATION
3URYLGHVWKHRSHUDWLQJFRQGLWLRQVDQGVSHFL¿FLQIRUPDWLRQRIWKHFDPHUDIRUPDLQWHQDQFHLQVSHFWLRQDQGVHUYLFHV
Initial
****.*H
WORKING TIME --- Displays the total accumulated operation time of the camera up to the present.
(Information display)
****.*H
Displays the cumulative operating time of the camera up to the current time.
SUB WORKING TIME --- (Information display)
8VHUVFDQUHVHWDUELWUDULO\XQOLNH:25.,1*7,0(
RESET
FIRMWARE VERSION ---
― CAMERA
― MAIN UNIT
STRB6001V**.**.**
― SOFTWARE --- Displays the software version of the main unit.
(Information display)
― CHECH SUM --- (Information display) Displays the software checksum of the main unit.
― M_PROC(FPGA) ---
― M_ROC(CPLD) ---
(Information display) 'LVSOD\VWKHYHUVLRQRI)3*$&3/'
― M_TRX ---
― M_AUDIO_SUB ---
― SENSOR UNIT ---
SENSOR UNIT
― ---
SERIAL NUMBER
― SOFTWARE --- Displays the version information of sensor unit software.
― CHECK SUM --- (Information display) Displays the error detection code of sensor unit software.
S_PROC --- 'LVSOD\VWKHYHUVLRQRI)3*$
VF
― SOFTWARE --- (Information display) Displays the software version of VF.
FPGA --- (Information display) 'LVSOD\VWKH)3*$YHUVLRQ
HARDWARE VERSION
― CAMERA
― MAIN UNIT
― M.PROC --- (Information display)
― M.TRX --- (Information display)
Displays the version information of the module PCB.
― SENSOR UMIT
S.PROC --- (Information display)
VF
H/W VERSION --- (Information display) Displays the version information of the module PCB.
,1)250$7,21FRQWLQXHVWRWKHQH[WSDJH!!
108 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

[MODULE SW (CAMERA)]
,1)250$7,21FRQWLQXHG!!

setting
SERIAL NUMBER
― MAIN UNIT --- (Information display) Sets the serial number of the main unit.
SENSOR UNIT --- (Information display) Sets the serial number of the sensor unit.
MODULE SW (Information display) Displays the setting status of dip switches on the camera PCB.
■ MENU MODE
Sets the menu mode.
Initial
If set to ON, possible to display engineer menu.
ENGINEER MENU OFF ON, OFF
If the camera power is turned OFF, this menu setting returns to OFF.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 109

■ VF MENU
7KLVVHFWLRQ,QWURGXFHVDQH[DPSOHRIWKHVHWWLQJPHQXRIWKHYLHZ¿QGHU
7KHYLHZ¿QGHUKDVIXQFWLRQVWRSHUIRUPYDULRXVVHWWLQJVLQGHSHQGHQWIURPWKHVLJQDOVIRUYLHZ¿QGHUFUHDWHGLQWKHFDPHUDGHYLFH
7KHH[DPSOHKHUHVKRZVWKHPHQXVFUHHQIRUWKH9)/'3OHDVHUHIHUWRWKHRSHUDWLRQPDQXDORIUHVSHFWLYHYLHZ¿QGHUIRUPRUH
details.
Initial
SETTING
1 VOLUME PRESET
― CONTRAST 0 -64 to +63 Sets the contrast (preset) level.
BRIGHT 0 -64 to +63 Sets the brightness (preset) level.
2 H POSITION 0 -10 to +10 6HWVWKHKRUL]RQWDOYLGHRSRVLWLRQ
3 V POSITION 0 -10 to +10 Sets the vertical video position.
4 BATTERY TYPE EXT.DC Displays the input voltage when an external power (EXT DC) is used for VF.
5 RESERVE SCAN OFF ON, OFF Sets the top/bottom and left/right inversion display of the VF screen.
6 SCREEN SAVER 7<3($ 7<3($7<3(%2)) Sets the screen saver.
TIMER 10MIN 2))0,1 Sets the amount of time before the screen saver starts.
USER MARKER
1 USER MARKER OFF ON, OFF Sets the display of user marker.
2 MARKER LEVER Sets the display level of user marker.
3 SCENE SELECT SCENE1 6&(1(WR6&(1( Selects from 6 types of scenes.
RESET SCENE
- - Resets the setting scene display.
DATA
<SCENE1> - - Displays the scene No. that is currently selected.
MRK1: OFF □ … OFF ON, OFF Sets the display/color/execution of User Marker 1.
MRK5: OFF □ … OFF ON, OFF 6HWVWKHGLVSOD\FRORUH[HFXWLRQRI8VHU0DUNHU
<< VF MENU continues to the next page >>
110 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

9,'(2$'-8670(17FRQWLQXHG!!

setting
USB MEMORY
< VF ---> USB MEMORY >
1 SAVE VF STATUS - - Writes various settings of VF to the USB memory.
SAVE USER
2 - - Writes user markers to the USB memory.
MARKER(ALL)
3 SAVE CAPTURE IMAGE - - Writes capture images to the USB memory.
< USB MEMORY ---> VF >
4 LOAD VF STATUS - - Downloads various settings saved in the USB memory to VF.
LOAD USER
5 - - Downloads user markers saved in the USB memory to VF.
MARKER(ALL)
6 LOAD CAPTURE IMAGE - - Downloads capture images saved in the USB memory to VF.
UPDATE
INF/UPDATE - - Displays and updates the VF information.
1 MPU VERSION - - Displays the version information of MPU.
2 FPGA VERSION - - 'LVSOD\VWKHYHUVLRQLQIRUPDWLRQRI)3*$
3 H/W VERSION Displays the version information of the module PCB.
4 WORKING TIME Displays the cumulative operating time of VF up to the current time.
5 UPFATE Updates from the USB memory.
― MPU VERSION
FPGA VERSION
Updates MPU from the USB memory.
8SGDWHV)3*$IURPWKH86%PHPRU\ 5
6 LOAD CAPTURE IMAGE - - Resets the setting data to the factory default settings.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 111

5.4 Creates the Lens File
5.4 Creating a Lens File

7KHSXUSRVHRIFUHDWLQJDOHQV¿OHLVWRVDYHWKHFKDQJHVLQDFRORUEDODQFHGXHWRWKHRSWLFDOSURSHUWLHVRIWKHOHQV*DLQDQG
:6KDGLQJFDQEHRSWLPL]HGHYHQLIDOHQVZLWKDGLIIHUHQWPDJQL¿FDWLRQDQGPDQXIDFWXUHULVXVHG-XVWVHOHFWLQJWKHOHQVQXPEHU
RQWKHPHQXFDQFKDQJHWKHOHQV¿OHVRUHDGMXVWPHQWLVQRWQHFHVVDU\HDFKWLPH$OVRLWFDQVDYHWKHFRUUHFWLRQIRUWKHH[WHQGHU
and automatically change it by the answer signal from the lens.
6L[WHHQOHQVHVFDQEHUHJLVWHUHGSHUFDPHUDVRWKDWOHQV¿OHVFDQEHFUHDWHGZKHQDSURPSWHURUH[WHUQDO¿OWHULVXVHG
■ Preparation for creating a lens file

,QVWDOODVWDQGDUGOHQVWRWKHFDPHUDDVDUHIHUHQFH$OVRXVHDXQLIRUPZKLWHFKDUW IRUH[DPSOHZKLWHSDSHUDVWKHVXEMHFW DQG
adjust the lighting using a light meter to make sure the brightness of the entire chart is uniform.
Note:
7RFUHDWHDOHQV¿OHVHWWKHRSWLFDO¿OWHUWR1'&/($5 DQGWKH&&¿OWHUWR.0DNHVXUHWKDWDVSHFLDOHIIHFW¿OWHULVQRW
LQVWDOOHGRQWKHIURQWRIOHQVRUEXLOWLQ¿OWHUGLVN,IDVSHFLDOHIIHFW¿OWHULVLQVWDOOHGWKHOHQV¿OHPD\QRWEHFUHDWHGSURSHUO\
: KHQFUHDWLQJWKHOHQV¿OHVJDWKHUDOOWDUJHWOHQVHVDQGFUHDWH¿OHVDWWKHVDPHWLPHXQGHUWKHVDPHFRQGLWLRQ,IWKHFRQGLWLRQLV
FKDQJHGZKLOHFUHDWLQJWKH¿OHVFRUUHFWVHWWLQJVFDQQRWEHREWDLQHG7KHOHQV¿OHVWRUHVWKHOHYHOGHYLDWLRQEHWZHHQOHQVHVVRLIWKH
lighting or chart is changed, it is impossible to identify whether the deviation is due to the lens or lighting/chart.
Chart on which Kent paper, etc. has been pasted Camera

and the entire surface is a uniform white.
Light
SDI OUT connector
Illumination
meter
Tripod
Light Picture monitor

(connect if required) WFM
Coax cable
112 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ Creating the lens OFF file

&UHDWHDOHQV2))¿OHWKDWLVDOHQV¿OHIRUDVWDQGDUGOHQV7KHOHQV2))¿OHSURYLGHVDUHIHUHQFHYDOXHIRUFUHDWLQJDGGLWLRQDO
OHQV¿OH
1 Display the ENGINEER MENU screen to select 7230(18

"LENS" and press the ENTER button. 86(50(18
0$5.(5&+$5
)2&86$66,67
Caution: ,17(5&20$8',2
:KHQFUHDWLQJWKHOHQV¿OHVHWWKH(1*,1((50(18 9,'(2,2
WR213OHDVHUHIHUWR%DVLFRSHUDWLRQRIWKHPHQX /(16
)81&7,216:
VFUHHQIRUWKH(1*,1((50(18VHWWLQJ 9,'(2$'-8670(17
7$//<,1',&$725
)$1&21752/
),/(23(5$7,21
6<67(0
,1)250$7,21
86(50(18&86720
0(1802'(

2 Select "FILE SETTING" on the SUB MENU screen ),/(6(77,1*

and press the ENTER button. $872,5,66(7
),/(6(77,1*
6(5,$/,) ( 5

3 Select "OFF" for "NUMBER". ),/(6(77,1*
180%(5 2))
1$0(

(;7(1'(5 2))
$8726(/ 2))
),/(6(7 2))
/(167<3( 2))
4 Select "AUTO" for "FILE SET", and then select ),/(6(77,1*

"START". 180%(5 2))
1$0(
The data acquisition starts. The creation of lens OFF
¿OHLVFRPSOHWHGZKHQ&203/(7('LVGLVSOD\HG (;7(1'(5 2))
$8726(/ 2))
),/(6(7 2))
/(167<3( 2))
/(162))
386+6(7Ѝ67$57
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 113

■ Creating lens files

$IWHUWKHOHQV2))¿OHLVFUHDWHGOHQV¿OHVDUHFUHDWHGIRUHDFKOHQV7KHOHQV¿OHVFUHDWHGDIWHUWKLVVWRUHGLIIHUHQWLDOGDWDIURP
WKLVOHQV2))¿OH
This section describes the setting method for serial interface supported lenses.
1 Display the ENGINEER MENU screen to select "LENS" and press the ENTER button.
2 Select "FILE SETTING" on the SUB MENU screen and press the ENTER button.
3 Select "No.1" for "NUMBER". ),/(6(77,1*

180%(5 1R
Select from No.1 - No.16.
1$0(
Specify the number you want to set for NUMBER.
Note that assigning the same lens number overwrites (;7(1'(5 2))
the data. $8726(/ 2))
),/(6(7 2))
/(167<3( 2))
4 Select "ON" for "AUTO SEL". ),/(6(77,1*
6HWWKH¿OHQDPHLQ1$0( VWURZ IRUHDFKOHQV 180%(5 1R $8726(/

¿OH 1$0(
$%;$%&'
$WWKLVWLPHWKHLQIRUPDWLRQRI1$0( QGURZ DQG
(;7(1'(5 2))
"EXTENDER" are automatically acquired. $8726(/ 21
),/(6(7 2))
Note:
/(167<3( 2))
7KHUHDUHWZRGLVSOD\W\SHVIRUOHQV¿OHQDPHV
6HWWKH¿OHQDPHVRIWKH¿UVWURZ 1$0(VHFWLRQ WR
PDQXDOO\LQSXWIRUHDFKOHQV¿OH*LYLQJWKHOHQVW\SH
QDPHHWFPDNHVLWHDVLHUWR¿QGWKHOHQV1RDQGOHQV
compatibility.
- In the case of serial interface supported lens, the
model name automatically acquired from the lens is
GLVSOD\HGIRUWKH¿OHQDPHRIWKHVHFRQGURZ $872
6(/1$0(GLVSOD\VHFWLRQ 7KLVPRGHOQDPHLV
DFTXLUHGZKHQWKHOHQV¿OHLVFUHDWHGDQGVWRUHGE\WKH
OHQV¿OHQXPEHU
5 Select "AUTO" for "FILE SET", and then select ),/(6(77,1*

"START". 180%(5 1R $8726(/
1$0(
The data acquisition starts. $%;$%&'
1RZWKHOHQV¿OHVKDYHEHHQFUHDWHG (;7(1'(5 2))
$8726(/ 21
),/(6(7 $872
/(167<3( 2))
/(161R
386+6(7Ѝ67$57
114 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

Note: ),/(6(77,1*
*DLQDQG:6KDGLQJFDQEHDGMXVWHGPDQXDOO\$IWHU 180%(5 1R $8726(/
DGMXVWLQJ2&3DQG0&3WKHOHQV¿OHFDQEHFUHDWHGE\ 1$0(
VHOHFWLQJ0$18$/XQGHU),/(6(7 $%;$%&'
(;7(1'(5 2))
$8726(/ 21
),/(6(7 0$18$/
/(167<3( 2))
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 115

5.5 Using the USB Memory
5.5 Using the USB memory

The USB memory can be used to store/read the setting condition of the camera.
Caution:
0DUNHWVROG86%PHPRU\KDYHXQGHUJRQHVXI¿FLHQWFRQ¿UPDWLRQRIRSHUDWLRQDWWKLVFRPSDQ\+RZHYHUZHFDQQRWDVVXPHDQ\
responsibility for guaranteeing operation.
7KHSDVVZRUGSURWHFWHG86%PD\QRWEHUHFRJQL]HG
■ Inserting and removing the USB memory

There is a USB memory slot as shown in the illustration below on the bottom rear side of the camera main unit.
Open the dustproof cover and insert the USB memory in the USB memory slot.
Caution:
When inserting the USB memory in the slot, be sure that the USB memory is facing in the correct direction.
Camera Head Rear Side
USB
OFF OFF USB REMOTE
+12V +48V +12V +48V
TRACKER
DC-IN 11~17V
GbE TRK
MIC 1 MIC 2
USB connector
7230(18
㼁㻿㻮
86(50(18
0$5.(5&+$5
)2&86$66,67
,17(5&20$8',2
9,'(2,2 The USB mark is
/(16 displayed when the
)81&7,216: USB memory is
9,'(2$'-8670(17
7$//<,1',&$725 inserted and
)$1&21752/ recognized by the
),/(23(5$7,21 camera.
6<67(0
,1)250$7,21
86(50(18&86720
0(1802'(
USB
116 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ Saving the Setting Status of Camera to the USB Memory
1 Use the menu select knob in the "MAIN MENU"

86%0(025<
),/(23(5$7,21
㼁㻿㻮
to move the cursor to "FILE OPERATION". 35(6(7),/(/2$'

35(6(7),/(6$9( (
Then press the SET button to display the "FILE
OPERATION" sub menu.
2 Select "USB MEMORY" and press the SET button.

86%0(025<
'LVSOD\WKHVXEPHQXRI86%0(025< 㼁㻿㻮
6$9(),/(
/2$'),/(
3 Select the item from the SAVE FILE submenu that
you wish to save.
,QWKH¿JXUH6$9(),/(LVVHOHFWHGWRVDYHWKH¿OH
4 Select the items you wish to save, and then press

$//'$7$
6$9(),/(
㼁㻿㻮
the SET button. 61$36+27

6&(1(
5()(5(1&(
/(16
0(18'$7$
5

5 Use the menu select knob and the SET button to
$//'$7$
6$9(),/(
㼁㻿㻮
set the file name with 8 characters. 61$36+27

6&(1(
7XUQWKH0HQXVHOHFWLRQNQREDWWKHÀDVKLQJFKDUDFWHU 5()(5(1&( $%&&')
position. Then, select the desired character and press /(16
0(18'$7$
the SET button. When the SET button is pressed, it
moves to the next character.
6$9(),/(
6 When the file name is confirmed, the screen
$//'$7$
61$36+27
㼁㻿㻮
returns to the "SAVE FILE" screen and "PUSH 6&(1(

SET → START" is displayed. Then, press the SET 5()(5(1&( $%&'()&')
/(16
button. If a file with the same name exists in the 0(18'$7$
USB memory, go to the Procedure "M1". To cancel
386+6(7Ѝ67$57
the saving process, turn the menu select knob
when "PUSHSET → START" is displayed. Then
select "CANCEL" and press the SET button.
continues to the next page
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 117

7 When the file is being saved, [SAVING FILE...] is

6$9(),/(
㼁㻿㻮
displayed. $//'$7$
If the file is saved normally, [COMPLETE] is 61$36+27
displayed. 6&(1(
5()5(1&( $%&'()&')
/(16
Caution:
0(18'$7$
Never remove the USB memory from the slot during

GLVSOD\RI>6$9,1*),/(@RUZKLOHWKHDFFHVV
6$9,1*),/(
indicator is lighted, as data is being written to the USB
memory. Removing it at this time could damage the
USB memory data or the USB memory itself.
M1 If a file with the same file name exists on the USB

6$9(),/(
㼁㻿㻮
memory, a message is displayed asking whether it $//'$7$

61$36+27
is all right to write over the data. To enable writing 6&(1(
over of data, change [NO] to [YES] and press the 5()(5(1&( $%&'()&')
SET button. If [NO] has been selected, storage is /(16
0(18'$7$
cancelled and the system returns to step [3].
29(5/$33('),/(1$0(
29(5:5,7(12͐͐
Note: ALL FILE

7KHLPDJHVRIWKHVWRUDJHUDQJHIRU¿OHVDUHVKRZQLQ
WKH¿JXUHEHORZ SNAPSHOT FILE
Parameters for adjusting
functions and ON/OFF state.
SCENE FILE
REFERENCE FILE
(ABB/AWB)
LENS FILE
MENU FILE
LOG DATA
118 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ The setting status of the camera loaded from the USB memory.
Read the camera setting condition from the USB memory.
1 Use the menu select knob in the "MAIN MENU" ),/(23(5$7,21

㼁㻿㻮
to move the cursor to "FILE OPERATION". 86%0(025<

35(6(7),/(/2$'
Then press the SET button to display the "FILE 35(6(7),/(6$9( (
OPERATION" sub menu..
2 Select "USB MEMORY" and press the SET button.

'LVSOD\WKHVXEPHQXRI86%0(025<
86%0(025<
㼁㻿㻮
3 Select the operation items performed from the sub

6$9(),/(
/2$'),/(
menu of "USB MEMORY".
6HOHFW/2$'),/(WRORDGWKH¿OH
4 Select the items you wish to load from the sub

menu of LOADFILE. /2$'),/(
㼁㻿㻮
$//'$7$
,QWKH¿JXUHVHOHFW6&(1(DQGSUHVVWKH6(7EXWWRQ 61$36+27
6&(1(
5 After selecting the item to be read to the camera,

5()(5(1&(
/(16
0(18'$7$
5
press the SET button.
Then select whether to read all files or individual

files from No. 1 to No. 8. In the example in the
figure, No. 8 is selected. Then select a file stored
on the USB memory. 6$9(),/(

After the contents are determined, [PUSH SET -> $//'$7$
㼁㻿㻮
START] is displayed. Press the SET button. 61$36+27

6&(1( $%&'()&')
If you wish to cancel, turn the menu select knob 5()(5(1&(
/(16
when [PUSH SET -> START] is displayed. 0(18'$7$

386+6(7Ѝ67$57
Note:
6&(1(),/(/(16),/(0(18'$7$LVDERXWLW
LVSRVVLEOHWRVHOHFWLQGLYLGXDOGDWD $// RUDOOGDWD
6&(1( $//1212
/(16),/( $//12
6$9(),/(
0(18'$7$ $//9) 㼁㻿㻮
$//'$7$
61$36+27
6&(1( $%&'()&')
6 When the file is being saved, [LOADING 5()(5(1&(
/(16
FILE] is displayed. If the file is saved normally, 0(18'$7$

[COMPLETE] is displayed.If ALL FILE and MENU /2$',1*),/(
DATA have been read, the camera is automatically
restarted after display of [COMPLETE].
Caution:
1HYHUUHPRYHWKH86%PHPRU\IURPWKHVORWGXULQJGLVSOD\RI>/2$',1*),/(@RUZKLOHWKHDFFHVVLQGLFDWRULVOLJKWHGDVGDWDLV
being written to the USB memory. Removing it at this time could damage the USB memory data or the USB memory itself.
Caution:
,IFKDQJHVDVWKRVHOLVWHGEHORZKDYHEHHQPDGHLQWKH¿OHQDPHVWRUHGWRD3&HWFLWLVQRWSRVVLEOHWRGLVSOD\WKH¿OHQDPHQRUPDOO\
,ID¿OHQDPHZLWKPRUHWKDQFKDUDFWHUVKDVEHHQVHW
8VLQJ¿OHQDPHV NDQMLNDQDHWF FRPSRVHGRIFKDUDFWHUVRWKHUWKDQKDOIVL]HOHWWHUVRIWKHDOSKDEHW
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 119

■ Error Message
If an error occurs during saving and loading data, following various error messages are displayed.
Error Message Contents

NO CARD Memory card is not inserted.
CANNOT OPEN FILE &DQQRWRSHQWKH¿OH
NOT CAMERA DATA FILE. 7KLVGDWD¿OHLVQRWIRUWKLVFDPHUD
FILE OF DIFFERENT CAMERA. 7KLV¿OHLVIRUDQRWKHUPRGHO
RELEVANT DATA IS NOT FOUND. No related data found.
WIRTE ERROR Writing error.
READ ERROR Reading error
ERROR Other error
120 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

5.6 Setting the Items Controlled from OCP

Selecting the Shutter Speed
7KHUHDUHWZRW\SHVRIVKXWWHUIXQFWLRQV2QHLV3UHVHW6KXWWHULQZKLFKWKHVKXWWHUVSHHGLVVHWLQDGYDQFHDQGWKHRWKHULV
"Variable Shutter" in which the shutter speed is arbitrarily set.
①3UHVHW6KXWWHU 7KHVKXWWHUVSHHGFDQEHVHW

②9DULDEOH6KXWWHU 7KHVKXWWHUVSHHGFDQEHDUELWUDULO\VHWZLWKLQWKHIROORZLQJUDQJH
VHFRQGV 6FDQQLQJV\VWHP+]
VHFRQGV 6FDQQLQJV\VWHP+]
7KHYDULDEOHVKXWWHULVVXLWDEOHLQWKHVLWXDWLRQVZKHQVKRRWLQJD3&VFUHHQHWFWKDWLVQRWV\QFKURQL]HGZLWK79RUZKHQ
shooting a subject moving at high speed such as golfer swinging and later playing the video in slow motion. By setting the shutter
speed at high speed, you can shoot quick-moving subjects at high resolution in sport coverage and broadcasting, etc. However, as
the shutter speed increases, the interval you can set will be longer.
■ Setting from the OCP-300 OCP-300

This section describes the setting method of shutter speed for
OCP-300.
1 Press the "OPE" switch of OCP-300.

5

2 "Operation" appears on the OCP LCD screen, and
the items related to "Shutter" appears in the Page
"1/3".
3 Select "VAR." (Variable Shutter), "SUTTER" or

"PRST Shutter" (Preset Shutter).
Note
$VWKHVKXWWHUVSHHGLQFUHDVHVWKHVHQVLWLYLW\GHFUHDVHVVRLWLV
QHFHVVDU\WRHQVXUHVXI¿FLHQWOLJKWLQJFRQGLWLRQV
ON/OFF switch
Rotary encorder knob 3
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 121

■ Setting from the Menu Screen

1 Press the "VF CHAR" button and ENTER button to
display "MAIN MENU". 7230(18

86(50(18
0$5.(5&+$5
)2&86$66,67
,17(5&20$8',2
2 Use the menu select knob to select "VIDEO 9,'(2,2
/(16
ADJUSTMENT", and then press the SET button. )81&7,216:
9,'(2$'-8670(17
7$//<,1',&$725
)$1&21752/
),/(23(5$7,21
6<67(0
,1)250$7,21
86(50(18&86720
0(1802'(

9,'(2$'-8670(17
3 Select SUHTTER" from the "VIDEO
$8726(78302'(
ADJUSTMENT" menu screen.
352&(666(783
&86720*$00$
)/(;,%/(02'(
6+877(5
',*,7$/(;7(1'(502'(
0$75,;35(6(7'$7$
0$75,;86(5'$7$6(7
0$75,;86(5'$7$6(7
237,&$/$%(55$7,21&255
$872'3&
4 Set the shutter operation. 6+877(5

6+877(535(6(7
6+877(563(('
122 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

Setting the Digital Extender

'LJLWDO([WHQGHUFDQWXUQRQRIIWKHIXQFWLRQVDQGVHWWKHPDJQL¿FDWLRQRQWKH2&3 2SHUDWLRQ&RQWURO3DQHO EXWLWFDQDOVR
perform the settings from the menu screen.
■ Setting from the OCP-300

1 Select "OPE" from the FUNCTION switches of
OCP-300.
2 Operate " " on the upper right of the LCD

screen to display Operation page "3/3".
Page select switch

3 Turn the rotary encoder knob 2 of OC-300P to
select the magnification of digital extender. Select
the magnification from "×1.5", "×2", "×3", or "×4".
4 Turn it on/off with "Digital Ext" on the LCD screen.

5

Rotary encorder switch
ON/OFF switch
■ Setting from the Menu Screen

7230(18

display "MAIN MENU". 86(50(18
0$5.(5&+$5
)2&86$66,67
,17(5&20$8',2
2 Use the menu select knob to select "VIDEO 9,'(2,2
/(16
ADJUSTMENT", and then press the SET button. )81&7,216:
9,'(2$'-8670(17
7$//<,1',&$725
)$1&21752/
),/(23(5$7,21
6<67(0
,1)250$7,21
86(50(18&86720
0(1802'(

UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 123

3 Select "DIGITAL EXTENDER MODE" from the

9,'(2$'-8670(17
"VIDEO ADJUSTMENT" sub menu screen. $8726(78302'(
352&(666(783
&86720*$00$
)/(;,%/(02'(
6+877(5
',*,7$/(;7(1'(502'(
0$75,;35(6(7'$7$
0$75,;86(5'$7$6(7
0$75,;86(5'$7$6(7
237,&$/$%(55$7,21&255
$872'3&
4 Select "MAGNIFICATION" from the "DIGITAL

EXTENDER MODE" sub menu to set the ',*,7$/(;7(1'(502'(
magnification.
',*,7$/(;7(1'(52))
0$*1,),&$7,21;

Switching the Video Gain (Step Gain)

,IVKRRWLQJLQWKHHYHQLQJRUQLJKWRULQWKHFRQGLWLRQV LQDURRPHWF ZKHUHWKHOLJKWLVQRWVXI¿FLHQWVZLWFKWKHJDLQ VHQVLWLYLW\
of the camera according to the brightness of the subject. It can be switched from OCP-300 (Operation Control Panel).
1 Press the "SETUP" switch among the FUNCTION

switches of OCP-300 to display the "SETUP"
screen (1/2) on the OCP-300 LCD screen.
2 Select "ON/OFF CTRL" from the "SETUP" screen

(1/2) to display Page 1/6.
3 Use the " " switch on the LCD screen to display Page 6/6.
4 Turn the rotary encoder knob under the "GAIN" display on the LCD screen to select the step gain.
7KHVWHSJDLQLVVHOHFWHGIURPWKHIROORZLQJG%G%G%G%G%G%G%
Caution
Setting the step gain exceeding "12dB" is an optional item. So, it may not be operable.
124 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

5.7 Controlling from the Camera Head
5.7 Controlling from the Camera

Controlling the ND Filter and Color Filter
Camera Right Side

INCOM/ND FILTER
HEAD
F1
FILTER HEAD button
F2
PGM/CC VF INTERCOM PHONE/ND filter knob

CHAR
MIC
INTERCOM PGM/CC filter knob
MENU
5
1 Press and hold the FILTER HEAD button to switch the FILTER control to the camera side.
7KH),/7(5+($'EXWWRQOLJKWVXSZKLFKLQGLFDWHVWKDWWKHFRQWUROLVWUDQVIHUUHGWRWKHFDPHUD7KH),/7(5SRVLWLRQLV

passed on as it is.
2 INTERCOM selector switch is set to "INTERCOM Camera Rear Side

SEL REAR".
INCOM SEL
Operate "INTERCOM PHONE/ND Filter knob" or REAR
INCOM 1 INCOM 2
,17(5&203*0&&)LOWHUNQREWRSHUIRUPWKH FRONT FRONT
FILTER control.
INTERCOM switch
3 INTERCOM selector switch is set to "INCOM1 Viewfinder display

FRONT" or "INCOM2 FRONT".
(1) Press the FILTER knob to operate ("INTERCOM

3+21(1')LOWHUNQRERU,17(5&203*0&&
Filter knob").
(2) Display the FILTER information (FILTER number,
¿OWHURSHUDWLRQULJKW RQWKH9)VFUHHQIRU
seconds.
Perform the FILTER control in these 3 seconds.
(3) If the FILTER operation is not performed for 3
seconds, the FILTER information on the VF screen 㻞㻮㻖
disappears. Then "INTERCOM PHONE/ND Filter
NQRERU,17(5&203*0&&)LOWHUNQRELV
reset to the INTERCOM control. Filter operation right
(4) Repeat (1) to (3) to perform the FILTER operation ND, CC, filter number
again.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 125

Assigning Functions to FUNTION Buttons

8VHUVFDQVHWEXWWRQVIRUWKHLUSUHIHUHQFH$VVLJQLQJWKHIXQFWLRQVWKDWDUHIUHTXHQWO\XVHGWRWKHVHEXWWRQVFDQLQFUHDVHWKH
usability of user interface.
■ Assigning the FUNTION Switch on the Right Side of the Camera
INCOM/ND FILTER
HEAD
F1 F1 switch (FUNCTION1 button)
F2 F2 switch (FUNCTION2 button)
PGM/CC VF
CHAR VF CHAR button
MIC
MENU
SET button Menu select knob

7230(18

display MAIN MENU (TOP MENU). 86(50(18
0$5.(5&+$5
2 Use the menu select knob to select "FUNCTION

)2&86$66,67
,17(5&20$8',2
SW", and then press the SET button. 9,'(2,2
/(16
)81&7,216:
9,'(2$'-8670(17
7$//<,1',&$725
)$1&21752/
),/(23(5$7,21
6<67(0
3 Use the menu select knob to temporarily select ,1)250$7,21
86(50(18&86720
"P.FUNC SW1" from "FUNCTION" sub menu 0(1802'(
screen, and then press the SET button.
4 The blinks of characters are moved to the field of

setting values.
)81&7,216:
5 Use the menu select knob to select the setting

3)81&6:5(7
values, and then press the SET button. 3)81&6:5(7
+$1'2/5(76:5(7
6 Set "P.FUNC SW2", "HANDOL RET SW" and

=22063(('
)2&8663(('
"VTR SW" in the same way. 9756:0,&
5(70,&6:5(7
9))6:0212
9))6:0$5.(5
9))6:=(%5$
126 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ Assignment of the FUNTION buttons of Viewfinder

$VVLJQIXQFWLRQVWRWKH)81&7,21VZLWFKHVRIWKHYLHZ¿QGHU VFL201D
F3 switch
F2 switch
F1 switch
1 Press the "VF CHAR" button and ENTER button to 7230(18

display MAIN MENU (TOP MENU).
86(50(18
0$5.(5&+$5
)2&86$66,67
2 Use the menu select knob to select "FUNCTION
,17(5&20$8',2
9,'(2,2 5
SW", and then press the SET button. /(16
)81&7,216:
9,'(2$'-8670(17

7$//<,1',&$725
)$1&21752/
),/(23(5$7,21
6<67(0
,1)250$7,21
86(50(18&86720
0(1802'(

3 Use the menu select knob to temporarily select

)81&7,216:

"VF F1 SW" from "FUNCTION" sub menu screen, 3)81&6:5(7
and then press the SET button. 3)81&6:5(7
+$1'2/5(76:5(7
=22063(('
4 The blinks of characters are moved to the field of )2&8663(('
9756:0,&
setting values. 5(70,&6:5(7
9))6:0212
5 Use the menu select knob to select the setting
9))6:0$5.(5
9))6:=(%5$
values from "MONO", "USRMAK", "WFM", etc.,
and then press the SET button.
6 Set the rest in the same way as "VF F2 SW" and "VF F3 SW".
Reference
Please refer to "FUNCTION button" page in "5.3 Menu Configuration and content" "FUNCTION SW" (P. 100) for setting
items that assign functions to the function switch.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 127

UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)
CCU SETTINGS
and ADJUSTMENT
6
130 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)
6.1 Basic Operation of Menu Screen

The menu operation on setting the CCU is performed from the controlpanel or the CCU by itself.
The setting of each item is performed by displaying the main menu/submenu screen on the PM screen. The CCU menu is displayed
only PM OUT output.
Note:
$EEUHYLDWLRQV
30 $EEUHYLDWLRQRI3LFWXUH0RQLWRU
30VFUHHQ 30VFUHHQ0RQLWRUYLGHRRXWSXWVFUHHQRIWKH&&830VFUHHQVXSHULPSRVHVDQGGLVSOD\VYDULRXVFKDUDFWHU
information.
Basic Operation of Menu Screen

The following methods may be used to display and operate the main menu screen of the CCU on the monitor screen.
- Operate from MCP-300.
- Operate from OCP-300.
- Operate from the front panel of the CCU.
Each operation is described below.
■ Operating from MCP-300
MCP-300
Menu switch
6
RE knob
CCU SETTINGS and ADJUSTMENT

Example of MCP-300 LCD screen
Press and hold the Menu switch of MCP-300 to display the main menu on the monitor screen (PM screen).
The monitor output screen superimposes the character information to the camera video output.
PM screen
Note:
5(NQRE0HDQVWKH5RWDU\(QFRGHUNQRE
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 131

The following explains the method to display the main menu on the PM screen.
1 Press and hold the MENU switch of MCP.

0(18
‫ڸ‬
‫ڸ‬
,1)250$7,21
Display the main menu on the PM screen. 35(6(7),/(/2$'
0($'0(18㸦'LVSOD\2))㸧
‫ۂ‬
2 Turn the RE knob under "Select" and "Next"
of MCP to change the item. Then press the
Enter switch in the MCP LCD screen and
confirm.
,1)250$7,21
Display the sub menu selected and perform
‫ڸ‬
237,21
various settings (7+(51(7
),50:$5(9(56,21
+$5':$5(9(56,21
3 Turn the RE knob under "Select" and "Next"
'$7$7,0(

of MCP on the sub menu screen to select the 86(5,'
67$1'$5'
item. Then press the Enter switch in the MCP
LCD screen. Move to the setting screen. (The
&23<5,*+7㸦&㸧
sub menu may be continued for some items.) ,.(*$0,7686+,1.,&2㸪/7'
4 On the setting screen, select the item and

237,21
confirm (press the Enter switch). Then, turn
‫ڸ‬
+'93',6$%/(
the RE knob of the MCP screen to select the *287
setting value.
CAUTION:
Depending on the functions of the setting items, some items change the setting when the knob is turned; others change the setting
ZKHQWKH&$//EXWWRQLVSUHVVHG
Note:
- To return to the main menu, select " DQGSUHVVWKH&$//EXWWRQ
7KHÀDVKLQJLWHPRQWKHVXEPHQXLQGLFDWHVWKHFXUUHQWO\IRFXVHGLWHP7KLVÀDVKLQJVWDWXVLVFDOOHGWKHÀDVKLQJFXUVRUKHUHDIWHU
(displayed in gray in the display example).
(DFKWLPHWKH&$//EXWWRQLVSUHVVHGWKHÀDVKLQJFXUVRUVZLWFKHVWRVHWWLQJLWHP!PRGHVHOHFWLRQ!VHWWLQJLWHP!PRGH
selection and so on.
5 Exiting the nemu.

Exit the main menu screen and sub menu screen displayed on the PM screen by following one of the methods
described below.
- Select " RQWKH&&8PDLQPHQXDQGSUHVVWKH&$//EXWWRQ
132 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ Operating from OCP-300
1 Press the "SETUP" switch of OCP-300 to display the OCP-300

SETUP items on the OCP LCD screen. SETUP switch
MENU switch
PM screen

2 Press and hold the MENU switch to display the menu
screen on the PM screen.
<RXFDQSHUIRUPYDULRXVVHWWLQJVRQWKHVXEPHQXWKDWLV
displayed from the main menu on the PM screen. Enter switch
Quit switch
Select knob Next knob
3 Make sure that the main menu screen is displayed on

the PM screen.
4 Turn the Select knob or Next knob to position the flashing cursor on the setting item, and press the Enter switch
on the LCD.
The submenu appears, on which you can perform various settings.
Note:
Depending on the functions of the setting items, some items change the setting when the knob is turned; others change the setting
when the Enter switch on the LCD is pressed.
5 Exiting the nemu

Exit the menu screen in the any of the following methods.
- Select " " on the CCU main menu and press the Enter switch.
- Press the QUIT switch on the LCD.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 133

■ Operating from CCU Main Unit
1
TALLY NORMAL OPEN SHORT COMM TEMP FAN
ID
Set the MENU switch "OPE - OFF" to "OPE" side. CAM
GENLOCK APC SDI
CCU
POWER
2
PHONE
MIC PRV OPE
When the MENU operation dial is kept pressed for ON

OFF
PTT
COM OFF
approximately three seconds, the Main menu screen is USB

INIT/PM
displayed on the PM screen. CALL
MENU operating knob MENU

OPE
SET button MENU switch

OFF
3 Check that the main menu screen is displayed on the PM screen

PM screen, and turn the MENU operating knob to move
the flashing cursor to the setting item. Then, press the
knob (SET button).
4 Display the sub menu, and perform various settings.

7XUQWKHNQREWRVHOHFWLWHPVDQGSUHVVWRFRQ¿UP
Caution:
Depending on the function of the setting item, there are items that the
setting is changed when the dial is turned or when the SET button is
pressed.
5 Exit the menu screen in the any of the following methods :

- Select " " on the CCU main menu and press the Enter switch.
- Set the MENU switch "OPE - OFF" to the "OFF" side (CCU).
134 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

6.2 CCU Menu Configuration and Contents

Various setting items performed on the CCU side are displayed.
■ Sub Menu Setting Items

(1) INFORMATION
3URYLGHVWHFKQLFDOLQIRUPDWLRQ KDUGZDUHDQG¿UPZDUHYHUVLRQVRSHUDWLQJVWDWXV RIWKHFDPHUDDQG&&8
(2) PRESET FILE LOAD

Used to reset the operating status to the initial setting or engineer setting.
(3) CAMERA MENU

Remote operating the settings of the camera side on the CCU side.
Note:
3OHDVHUHIHUWR&KDSWHUIRUWKLVLWHP
(4) SYSTEM SETTING (1/2)

Sets the operation settings of the camera output. This item sets the settings relating to other video devices. Therefore, this item
is not for daily operation.
(5) SYSTEM SETTING (2/2)

3HUIRUPVYDULRXVVHWWLQJVIRUVHWWLQJVRIYLGHRSURFHVVLQJDQGV\QFKURQL]DWLRQSKDVHDQGFRQQHFWLRQVWR,17(5&20DQG
other devices.
(6) CONFIGURATION
Sets the external connection settings, etc.
6
Caution:

Some of operations may be different from this manual due to improvements. Please note that some of operations may be different from
this manual due to improvements.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 135

■ INFORMATION
3URYLGHVWHFKQLFDOLQIRUPDWLRQ KDUGZDUHDQG¿UPZDUHYHUVLRQVRSHUDWLQJVWDWXV RIWKHFDPHUDDQG&&8
Setting Item Initial setting Setting value Description, Remarks
INFORMATION Displays the each setting information.
― OPTION
'LVSOD\V',6$%/((1$%/(RIWKHRSWLRQERDUGDQGVRIWZDUH
― HD_VP ',6$%/( ',6$%/((1$%/(
options implemented.
― 12G_OUT ',6$%/( ',6$%/((1$%/(
― . . .
. . .
― ETHERNET Displays the setting values of ETHERNET.
― IP ADDRESS
― SUBNET MASK
― DEFAULT GATE WAY
― SPEED/DUPLEX
MAC ADDRESS
― FIRMWARE VERSION
― CCU SERIAL NUMBER $%( Displays the serial number and firmware information of the device.
― PACKAGE VERSION 6182V**.**.**
― MAIN SOFT 9[[\\]] &6
― SUB SOFT 9[[\\]] &6
― HD_VP FPGA2 6091Vxx.xx *1 Option module
― HD_VP FPGA3 6093Vxx.xx *1 Option module
― TRX_VP FPGA1 6089Vxx.xx
― RET_PRC FPGA1 6102Vxx.xx
― RET_PRC FPGA2 6103Vxx.xx
― PLS/AUX FPGA 9[[[[
― PLS/AUX CPLD 6116Vxx.xx
― MPU FPGA 6117Vxx.xx
S12G_OUT FPGA 6128Vxx.xx *1 Option module
― HARDWARE VERSION Displays the hardware version.

― HD_VP VERSION* *1 Option module
― TRX_VP VERSION*
― RET_PRC VERSION*
― PLS/AUX VERSION*
― MPU VERSION*
12G_OUT VERSION* *1 Option module
― DATE/TIME <<<<00''KKPP Displays and sets the date and time.

― DATE SET <<00'' 'DWHVHWWLQJ <HDU0RQWK'D\
― TIME SET KKPPVV Time setting (24 hours)
― PUSH SET ---> START Executes the date and time setting.
― INTEGRAL TIME *****H**M Displays the integral operation time.
SUB TIME *****H**M Displays the interval operating time (resettable).
SUB TIMERE SET ---> Resets the interval operating time.
USER ID 67$1'$5' Displays the USER ID settings.
Caution:
2SWLRQPRGXOH
Displays the information on the option board and software options implemented. If they are not implemented, they are indicated
with "---" or no display.
136 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ DIAGNOSIS
Monitors various modules and elements and displays the results.
TEMPERATUR Displays the temperature information (Celsius) of the device.
― HD_VP
― FPGA2 xx.x
― FPGA3 xx.x
― ASIC L xx.x
― ASIC R xx.x
― TRX_VP
― FPGA1 xx.x
― FPGA2 xx.x
― FPGA3 xx.x
― ASIC L xx.x
― ASIC R xx.x
― OPT T/R xx.x
― RET_PRC
― FPGA1 xx.x
― FPGA2 xx.x
― PLS/AUX xx.x
― MPU xx.x
― POWER_IF xx.x
― 12G_OUT
FPGA xx.x
OPT RX CONDITION 'LVSOD\VWKH/26)/$*VWDWXVRIRSWLFDOWUDQVFHLYHU 6
― Rx1 LOS FLAG OK OK/LOS

Rx4 LOS FLAG OK OK/LOS
TRX_VP CRC Displays the results obtained by CRC monitoring of TRX_VP module.
― GROUP 1 R/G/B OK/ OK/ OK OK/ERROR
― CAM_MON/VF OK OK/ERROR
― HD QTV OK OK/ERROR
― RET VIDEO-A OK OK/ERROR
RET VIDEO-B OK OK/ERROR
Displays the results obtained by CRC monitoring of RET_PRC
RET_PRC CRC
module.
― RET-1 OK OK/ERROR
― QTV-1 OK OK/ERROR
― QTV-2 OK OK/ERROR
― 4K EDGE OK OK/ERROR
― D/C_VF OK OK/ERROR
HD TRK OK OK/ERROR
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 137


FAN CONDTION 'LVSOD\VWKHPRQLWRULQJUHVXOWVRI)$1PRWRUIRUFRROLQJ
― FAN1(REAR) OK 2.1* Position of the back side of POWER BLOCK
― FAN2(FORFRONT) OK 2.1* Position of the front side of POWER BLOCK
― FAN3(CENTER) OK 2.1* Position of the center of POWER BLOCK
FAN4(INNERMOST) OK 2.1* Position of the rear side of POWER BLOCK
BATTERY CONDITIO 'LVSOD\VWKHVWDWXVRIWKHEDWWHU\IRU%$&.83
― MPU BATTERY OK 2.1*
― TRX_VP BATTERY OK 2.1*
100V/110-120V/
AC VOLTAGE SELECTOR 'LVSOD\VWKHVHWWLQJVWDWXVRI&&8LQSXW$&YROWDJH
220-240V
■ PRESET FILE LOAD

Used to reset the operating status to the initial setting or engineer setting.
PRESET FILE LOAD
(1*,1((5
― FILE SELECT (1*,1((5
)$&725<
― LOAD START 5($'< 67$57&$16(/
― PUSH SET ---> START
Displays "Camera Power OFF" when the power of camera is
CAMERA MENU
turned off.
138 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ SYSTEM SETTING (1/2)

Sets the operation settings of the camera output. This item sets the settings relating to other video devices.
[CCU OUTPUT]
CCU OUTPUT &$0(5$ &$0(5$&2/25%$56 Selects video output of CCU.
.3/9/$
OUT-1 FORMAT Displays the current values. Sets the video format of CCU output.
*4/6,
3840x2160 / 1920x1080 /
― IMAGE SIZE 3840x2160 6HOHFWV,0$*(6,=(
1280x720
333V)
33V)3
― FREQ&SCAN 3 Selects the frame rate and scanning method.
33V)33V)
,,33
― SAMPLING <&E&U <&E&U5*% Selects the sampling method.
*6',/9/$*6',
― MAPPING *6',/9/$ Selects the SDI mapping.
LVL-B / HD-SDI
*4/6,*4/64'
― 4K OUTPUT *4/6, Selects the 4K output method.
*6',+'4/64'
FORMAT CHANGE 5($'< (;(&87(&$1&(/ Reflects the above settings.
6$0($6287
OUT-2 FORMAT 6$0($6287 The selection item is determined by OUT-1 format.
,1',9,'8$/
3840x2160 / 1920x1080 /
― IMAGE SIZE 3840x2160 6HOHFWV,0$*(6,=(
1280x720
333V)
33V)3
33V)33V)
,,33
*6',/9/$*6',
LVL-B / HD-SDI
― 4K OUTPUT *4/6,
*4/6,*4/64'
*6',+'4/64'
Selects the 4K output method. 6
3

Displays when the HD_VP option is implemented. The setting items
OUT-3 FORMAT Displays the current values.
*6',/9/$ DUHGHWHUPLQHGEDVHGRQWKH287)250$7VHWWLQJV
― IMAGE SIZE 1920x1080 1920x1080 / 1280x720 6HOHFWV,0$*(6,=(
333V)
33V)3
33V)33V)
,,33
*6',/9/$*6',
LVL-B / HD-SDI
6$0($6287 Displayed only when the optional HD_VP is implemented. OUT-1
OUT-4 FORMAT 6$0($6287
,1',9,'8$/ format determines which formats and items can be set.
― IMAGE SIZE 1920x1080 1920x1080 / 1280x720 6HOHFWV,0$*(6,=(
333V)
33V)3
33V)33V)
,,33
*6',/9/$*6',
LVL-B / HD-SDI
6<67(06(77,1* FRQWLQXHVWRWKHQH[WSDJH!!
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 139

[MONITOR OUT] [MONITOR BARS TITLE] [SYNC OUTPUT]

6<67(06(77,1* FRQWLQXHG!!
Sets the monitor output. The setting items are determined based on
MONITOR OUT
the main line OUT-1 format.
CCU PM OUT / CCU VF
― OUT-1 CCU PM OUT
OUT
,+'6',
,+'6',
1080P29.97 422 HD-SDI/
1080P29.97sF 422 HD-SDI
1080P23.98 422 HD-SDI/
,+' 1080P23.98sF 422 HD-SDI
― OUT-1 FORMAT
SDI 3+'6',
3V)+'6',
1080P24 422 HD-SDI/
1080P24sF 422 HD-SDI
3+'6',
3+'6',
CCU PM OUT / CCU VF
― OUT-2 CCU PM OUT
OUT
,+'6',
,+'6',
1080P29.97 422 HD-SDI/
1080P29.97sF 422 HD-SDI
1080P23.98 422 HD-SDI/
,+' 1080P23.98sF 422 HD-SDI
― OUT-2 FORMAT
SDI 3+'6',
3V)+'6',
1080P24 422 HD-SDI/
3+'6',
3+'6',
― PM CHAR LEVEL 100 30 to 100 Sets the display level of character.
― WARNING BIG CHAR OFF OFF / ON 'LVSOD\VWKH',$*126,6,1)2LWHPVLQODUJHIRQW
― CAMERA STATUS DISP OFF OFF / ON Displays the camera setting status on CCU PM.
UPPER / LOWER / UPPER
LEFT / LOWER LEFT /
― POSITION UPPER Sets the display position of the camera setting status.
833(55,*+7/2:(5
5,*+7
― FILTER POSITION ON ON / OFF Displays the position of optical filter on the monitor screen.
― GAIN ON ON / OFF 'LVSOD\VWKHVHWWLQJYDOXHRI*DLQRQWKHPRQLWRUVFUHHQ
― IRIS ON ON / OFF Displays the iris value on the monitor screen.
― EXTENDER ON ON / OFF Displays the ON/OFF of EXTENDER on the monitor screen.
― SHUTTER ON ON / OFF Displays the ON/OFF of SHUTER on the monitor screen.
― CAM PGM NO. ON ON / OFF 'LVSOD\VWKH&$03*01RRQWKHPRQLWRUVFUHHQ
VARIABLE COLOR TEMP ON ON / OFF
MONITOR BARS TITLE 6XSHULPSRVHVFKDUDFWHUVWR30287&2/25%$56
― DISPLAY OFF OFF / ON Sets the ON/OFF of the colorbar title display.
― TITLE EDIT Edits the characters of the colorbar title display.
POSITION Sets the position of the colorbar title display.
,,
33
1080P29.97 /
1080P29.97sF /
6HWVWKHIRUPDWRIWKHV\QFKURQL]DWLRQVLJQDOVRXWSXWWHGIURP6<1&
SYNC OUTPUT , 1080P23.98 /
OUT (BNC) of CCU.
3V)3
3V)3
1080P24sF /
33
140 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ Setting the SYSTEM SETTING (2/2)

3HUIRUPVYDULRXVVHWWLQJVIRUVHWWLQJVRIYLGHRSURFHVVLQJDQGV\QFKURQL]DWLRQSKDVHDQGFRQQHFWLRQVWR,17(5&20DQGRWKHU
devices.
[VIDEO PROCESS] [HD VIDEO PROCESS] [RET VIDEO FORMAT] [PHASE CONTOROL]
VIDEO PROCESS Sets the video systems.
.$5,%8'+
― UHDK 4K COLOR BARS 4K 709 6HOHFWV8'+&2/25%$5
$5,%6,03/,),('
6037($5,%
― HDTV COLOR BARS SMPTE 6HOHFWV+'792XWSXW&2/25%$5

― ARIB BARS TYPE --- ,

SMPTE BARS TYPE
,,4
HD VIDEO PROCESS Sets the HDTV video system. *2
― DOWN CONV FILTER STD STD, HI, HQ, LOW Selects FIR-FILTER for converting 4K video to HD (1080i / 1080p).
OFF, OUT-3, Sets the assignment of HD CUTOUT outputs. The lines for which
HD CUTOUT OFF
OUT-4, OUT-3/4 CUTOUTS are not assigned are D/C outputs.
RET VIDEO SETTING Sets the RETURN VIDEO. *3
― RET1 FS OFF FS ON/OFF 6HWVWKH212))RI)6 )UDPH6\QFKURQL]DWLRQIXQFWLRQ
― RET2 FS OFF FS ON/OFF 5(7LVWKHRXWSXWRI5(7ZKHQ$&7,9(7+528*+LVRQ

― RET3 FS OFF FS ON/OFF 6HWVWKH212))RI)6 )UDPH6\QFKURQL]DWLRQIXQFWLRQ
― RET4 FS OFF FS ON/OFF 5(7LVWKHRXWSXWRI5(7ZKHQ$&7,9(7+528*+LVRQ
ACTIVE-THROUGH OFF OFF / ON RET-2 is the output of RET-1, and RET-4 is the output of RET-3.
PHASE CONTROL $GMXVWVWKHSKDVHVRIYLGHRDQGV\QFKURQL]DWLRQVLJQDOV 6

― 4K V PHASE 0
― HD OUT-1 V PHASE 0

― HD TRUNK V PHASE 0
― 4K H PHASE 0
― HD OUT-1 H PHASE 0
― HD OUT-2 H PHASE 0
― HD OUT-3 H PHASE 0 $IXQFWLRQWKDWFDQEHRSHUDWHGRQO\ZKHQ+'B93LVLPSOHPHQWHG
― HD OUT-4 H PHASE 0 $IXQFWLRQWKDWFDQEHRSHUDWHGRQO\ZKHQ+'B93LVLPSOHPHQWHG
― HD PM H PHASE 0
― HD TRUNK H PHASE 0
6HWVWKHYHUWLFDOSKDVHRIWKHV\QFKURQL]DWLRQVLJQDORXWSXWWHGIURP
― SYNC OUT V PHASE 0
6<1&287 %1&
6HWVWKHKRUL]RQWDOSKDVHRIWKHV\QFKURQL]DWLRQVLJQDORXWSXWWHG
SYNC OUT H PHASE 0
IURP6<1&287 %1&
Caution:
7KLVPRGXOHSHUIRUPVVLPXOWDQHRXVSURFHVVLQJRI+'YLGHRVLJQDOVLQGHSHQGHQWIURP.YLGHRVLJQDOV7KLVPRGXOHLVRSWLRQDO
5(78519,'(2LQSXW
- *6',+'6',$XWRPDWLFDOO\UHFRJQL]HVWKHUDWHVLJQDOV
- ,I$&7,9(7+528*+IXQFWLRQLVXVHGERWK&&8DQGFDPHUDFKDQJHWRWKH5HWXUQ&KDQQHOVSHFL¿FDWLRQV7KHWKURXJK
output video signals will not be outputted unless the power of CCU is turned on.
- ,I)6 )UDPH6\QFKURQL]HU LVWXUQHGRQDQGWKHLQSXWYLGHRVLJQDOIRUPDWLVVZLWFKHGWRWKHVLJQDOVWKDWGRQRWUHTXLUH)6LWLV
not automatically changed to "FS OFF". If FS is not required, turn it off manually.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 141

[AUDIO SETTING] [MIC GAIN REMOTE] [INTERCOM SETTING]

6<67(06(77,1* FRQWLQXHG!!

AUDIO SETTING
― 4K EMBEDDED AUDIO ON ON / OFF Sets the audio embed to the 4K SDI output.
― HD EMBEDDED AUDIO ON ON / OFF Not EMBEDDED to PM OUT.
Sets the amount of master audio signal delay. The maximum delay
― MASTER DELAY 0 0 to 21
DPRXQWLV)5$0(
6HWVWKHDPRXQWRI(0%(''('$8',2GHOD\7KHPD[LPXPGHOD\
― EMB AUDIO DELAY 0 0 to 21 DPRXQWLV)5$0(
(1ch/2ch/3ch/4ch)
6HWVWKHDPRXQWRI$(6(%8GHOD\7KHPD[LPXPGHOD\DPRXQWLV
― AES/EBU DELAY 0 0 to 21
)5$0(
Sets the amount of analog audio output delay. The maximum delay
― ANALOG OUT DELAY 0 0 to 21
DPRXQWLV)5$0(
― AUDIO-1 OUTPUT LEVEL 0dB 0dB / 4dB Set the output level.
― LEVEL ADJ (0dB) 1 to 1023
LEVEL ADJ (4dB) 1 to 1023
AUDIO-2 OUTPUT LEVEL 0dB 0dB / 4dB Set the output level.
― LEVEL ADJ (0dB) 1 to 1023
LEVEL ADJ (4dB) 1 to 1023
MIC GAIN REMOTE *4
(;(&87(&$1&(/ 7KHFHQWHU2))6(7DGMXVWPHQWRIWKH(;70,&*$,15(027(
― MIC1 CENTER SET 5($'<
&/($5 VR.
(;(&87(&$1&(/ 7KHFHQWHU2))6(7DGMXVWPHQWRIWKH(;70,&*$,15(027(
MIC2 CENTER SET 5($'<
&/($5 VR.
INTERCOM SETTING Sets the intercom lines.
― INTERCOM LINE 2LINE 2LINE / 1LINE Sets the number of lines.
Links the settings of 4W/RTS/CC input/output. They can be set
― ENGINEER IF 4W 4W / RTS / CC
individually after being linked.
― INPUT TERM 600 600 / 10k / --- 600 / --- / ---
OUTPUT LOAD --- --- / OPEN / 200 --- / OPEN / OPEN
Links the settings of 4W/RTS/CC input/output. They can be set
― PRODUCER IF 4W 4W / RTS / CC
individually after being linked.
― INPUT TERM 600 600 / 10k / --- 600 / --- / ---
OUTPUT LOAD --- --- / OPEN / 200 --- / OPEN / OPEN
― PGM1 TERM 600 600 / 10k
― PGM1 INPUT LEVEL 0dB 0dB / -20dB / 4dB
― PGM2 TERM 600 600 / 10k
6HWVWKH352*5$0$8',2
― PGM3 TERM 600 600 / 10k
'<1$0,&&$5%21
― FRONT INTERCOM MIC '<1$0,&
/ ECM
Sets the type of headset microphone of the entire CCU.
― INTERCOM MIC POWER --- ON / OFF * The ON/OFF of INTERCOM MIC POWER can be set only when
2))3*03*0 ECM is selected. INTERCOM MIC POWER and its display are
― PGM MIX OFF IL[HGWR21ZKHQ&$5%21LVVHOHFWHG
3*0
PGM LEVEL X1.00 X0.00 to 2.00
Caution:
7KHFRQWUROIURPWKHH[WHUQDO0,&*$,15(027(3$1(/KDVWKHKLJKHVWSULRULW\
,IWKH5(027(212))VZLWFKRI0,&*$,15(027(3$1(/LVWXUQHGRQWKH0,&*$,1FRQWUROFDQEHSHUIRUPHGRQO\
IURP5(027(3$1(/
0,&&(17(5$'-IXQFWLRQ
7KH0,&*$,15(027(IXQFWLRQFDQFRQWLQXRXVO\FKDQJHWKHPLFURSKRQHJDLQRIWKHFDPHUDIURPWKHSRWHQWLRPHWHU
connected to the external device. However, the mechanical and electrical center value and the control power voltage may not
PDWFKGHSHQGLQJRQWKHFDSDELOLW\RISRWHQWLRPHWHUDQGLQGLYLGXDOYDULDELOLW\,QWKLVFDVHWKH0$;0,1FRQWUROOHYHORIWKH
microphone gain of the camera is disproportionate to the center value.
This function sets the mechanical center position of the potentiometer to the center of the control value.
1RUPDOO\WKLVLVVHWWRIDFWRU\VHWWLQJVVRDGMXVWPHQWLVQRWUHTXLUHG,I&(17(5$'-LVSHUIRUPHGDWWKHZURQJSRVLWLRQWKH
control range of the microphone gain becomes abnormal.
142 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ CONFIGURATION
Set the external connection etc..
[ETHERNET SETUP] [PGM NO.] [POWER CONTROL] etc.
ETHERNET SETUP Set the ETHERNET
― IP ADDRESS 192.168. 1.100
― SUBNET MASK
― DEFAULT GATE WAY xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
$8721(*27,$7,210+$/)
― SPEED/DUPLEX $8721(*27,$7,21 0)8//0+$/)0
FULL
5(%227&$1&(/5(%227
SET 5(%227&$1&(/
EXECUTE
PGM NO. Sets the program number.
― CAM PGM NO. SET OFF OFF, 1 to 99 Sets the ID display number for the entire CCU front side.
FRONT ID DISPLAY OFF OFF / ON Sets the ON/OFF of the display for the entire CCU front side.
POWER CONTROL
Selects the operation mode based on the status of the OCP
― OCP CAM PWR CTRL --- 212))/$67
camera power switch.
― CAM CODE --- 1250$/&87 2SWLRQE\UHJLRQ 86$RQO\
SAFETY&H.PWR --- 1250$/&87
FIBER SINGLE MODE OFF OFF / ON Sets the fiber single mode.
ENGINEER SET FILE RENEW 8SGDWHVWKH(1*,1((56(7),/(
― PASSWORD **** Inputs the password for updating.
― 0123456789
(1*,1((5(1*,1((5
(1*,1((5 6
― DATA RENEW MODE
PUSH SET --> RENEW

PASSWORD ENTRY 6HWVWKHSDVVZRUGIRUXSGDWLQJWKH(1*,1((56(7),/(
― INPUT **** ,QSXWWKHFXUUHQW3$66:25' The initial value is 0000.
― RENEW **** 1HZ3$66:25'
― CONFIRM **** Reconfirm
123456789
FIRMWARE UPDATE Updates the firmware.
― MAIN SOFT 6149Vxx.xx.xx
― ALL UPDATE 6182Vxx.xx.xx
― SUB SOFT 6139Vxx.xx.xx
― HD VP FPGA2 6091Vxx.xx.xx Displays "---" when the optional module is not implemented.
― HD VP FPGA3 6093Vxx.xx.xx Displays "---" when the optional module is not implemented.
― TRX VP FPGA1 6089Vxx.xx.xx
― RET PRC FPGA1 6102Vxx.xx.xx
― RET PRC FPGA2 6103Vxx.xx.xx
― PLS/AUX FPGA 9[[[[[[
― MPU FPGA 6117Vxx.xx.xx
12G OUT FAGA 6128Vxx.xx.xx Displays "---" when the optional module is not implemented.
USB DATA SAVE Collects the log data.
― LOG DATA ',$* ',$*6:&17/0(18$//
PUSH SET --> SAVE
OTHERS
― PM TALLY SEL < <&200 6HOHFWV<7$//<287RU&2007$//<287
Sets the optical receiver level of the optical alarm on the
― REM OPT ALARM LEVEL $77(1 $77(1:$51,1*1*
remote panel.
Sets the rotating speed of the fan motor on the back side of
REAR FAN SPEED )$67 )$670,''/(/2:
CCU.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 143

6.3 Setting of CCU Menu

Explains the CCU menu item operating of OCP-MCP-300 and CCU front side.
■ Setting of PRESET FILE

/RDGVWKHGDWDRI35(6(7¿OHIURPWKHLQWHUQDOPHPRU\
Main menu screen Sub menu screen
όόόᴾ ᵫᵣᵬᵳ ᴾ όόόᴾ ᵮᵰᵣᵱᵣᵲᴾᵤᵧᵪᵣᴾᵪᵭᵟᵢ ᴾ

Ṵᴾ ᴾ
Ṵ
ᵧᵬᵤᵭᵰᵫᵟᵲᵧᵭᵬ ᴾ ᵤᵧᵪᵣᴾᵱᵣᵪᵣᵡᵲ ᴾ ᴾ
ᵪᵭᵟᵢᴾᵱᵲᵟᵰᵲ ᴾ
Ṵ
ᵮᵰᵣᵱᵣᵲᴾᵤᵧᵪᵣᴾᵪᵭᵟᵢ ᴾ
ᵦᵟᵣᵢᴾᵫᵣᵬᵳ ί ᵢᶇᶑᶎᶊᵿᶗ ᴾᵭᵤᵤ ὸ ᴾ ᵮᵳᵱᵦᴾᵱᵣᵲ ḵᵱᵲᵟᵰᵲ ᴾ
ᵱᵷᵱᵲᵣᵫᴾᵱᵣᵲᵲᵧᵬᵥᴾᵆᵏᵍᵐᵇ ᴾ ᴾ
ᵱᵷᵱᵲᵣᵫᴾᵱᵣᵲᵲᵧᵬᵥᴾᵆᵐᵍᵐᵇ ᴾ
Ṷᴾ
ᴾ
Move to the flashing cursor The submenu "PRESET

to "PRESET FILE LOAD" FILE LOAD" is displayed.
and confirm.
PRESET FILE Setting Menu

Menu Initial setting Setting value Description, Remarks
PRESET FILE LOAD Preset file load
(1*,1((5 6HOHFWVWKH(1*,1((5ILOH
)$&725< 6HOHFWVWKH)$&725<ILOH
5($'< 'DWDWUDQVIHU /2$' EHIRUHH[HFXWLRQ
― FILE SELECT 5($'< 67$57 'DWDWUDQVIHU /2$' VWDUW
&$16(/ 'DWDWUDQVIHU /2$' FDQFHOODWLRQ
PUSH SET ---> START
CAMERA MENU Displays "Camera Power OFF" when the power of camera is turned off.
1 Set the blinking cursor to FILE SELECT and select a target file to transfer (LOAD) the data.
:KHQWKHEOLQNLQJFXUVRULVPRYHGWR/2$'67$57DQG¿QDOL]HGWKHPRGHVHWYDOXHFKDQJHVIURP5($'<WR
67$57
2 - When "CANCEL" is selected, the setting is canceled, and the status returns to "READY" status.
- When "START" is selected, "PUSH SET ---> START" is displayed at the lower section of the screen. When
"START" is selected, proceed to Step 3.
3 While "PUSH SET ---> START" is selected, finalize the operation. The data transfer (LOAD) starts.
:KHQORDGLQJRIWKH¿OHFRPSOHWHVWKHPHVVDJH)$,/6$)('$7$/2$'&203/(7('DSSHDUVRQWKHVFUHHQ7KHQ
CCU re-start automatically, and the operation completes.
Sub menu screen Sub menu screen Item setting screen
ᴾ ᵮᵰᵣᵱᵣᵲᴾᵤᵧᵪᵣᴾᵪᵭᵟᵢ ᴾ ᵮᵰᵣᵱᵣᵲᴾᵤᵧᵪᵣᴾᵪᵭᵟᵢ ᴾ
ᴾ ᵮᵰᵣᵱᵣᵲᴾᵤᵧᵪᵣᴾᵪᵭᵟᵢ ᴾ
ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ
ᵤᵧᵪᵣ ᴾ ᵱᵣᵪᵣᵡᵲ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾᵣᵬᵥᵧᵬᵣᵣᵰ ᵋᵏᴾ ᵤᵧᵪᵣ ᴾᵱᵣᵪᵣᵡᵲ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾᵣᵬᵥᵧᵬᵣᵣᵰ ᵋᵏᴾ ᵤᵧᵪᵣ ᴾ ᵱᵣᵪᵣᵡᵲ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᵣᵬᵥᵧᵬᵣᵣᵰ ᵋᵏᴾ
Ṵ
ᵪᵭᵟᵢᴾᵱᵲᵟᵰᵲ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾᵰᵣᵟᵢᵷ ᴾ ᵪᵭᵟᵢᴾᵱᵲᵟᵰᵲ ḵᵱᵲᵟᵰᵲ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ

Ṵ
ᴾ ᵤᵟᵧᵪ ὼᵱᵟᵤᵣᴾᵢᵟᵲᵟᴾᵪᵭᵟᵢᴾ
Ṵ
ᵮᵳᵱᵦᴾᵱᵣᵲ ḵᵱᵲᵟᵰᵲ ᴾ ᵡᵭᵬᵮᵪᵣᵲᵣᵢ ᴾ
Move to the flashing cursor to When "START" is selected, the "FAIL-SAFE DATA LOAD
"LOAD START" and confirm. message is displayed in the COMPLETED" is displayed in
bottom of the screen. the middle of the screen, and
then restart.
144 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ INTERCOM SETTING
Sets INTERCOM.
Main menu screen Sub menu screen Item setting screen
όόόᵫᵣᵬᵳ όόόᴾ ᵴᵧᵢᵣᵭᴾᵱᵣᵲᵲᵧᵬᵥ ίᵐᵍᵐὸ ᴾ ᵧᵬᵲᵣᵰᵡᵭᵫᴾᵱᵣᵲᵲᵧᵬᵥ ᴾ

Ṵᴾ ᴾ ᴾ
Ṵ
ᵧᵬᵤᵭᵰᵫᵟᵲᵧᵭᵬ ᴾ ᵴᵧᵢᵣᵭᴾᵮᵰᵭᵡᵣᵱᵱ ᴾ ᵧᵬᵲᵣᵰᵡᵭᵫᴾᵪᵧᵬᵣ ᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾ ᴾᵐᵪᵧᵬᵣ
ᵮᵰᵣᵱᵣᵲᴾᵤᵧᵪᵣᴾᵪᵭᵟᵢ ᴾ ᵦᵢᴾᵴᵧᵢᵣᵭᴾᵮᵰᵭᵡᵣᵱᵱ ᴾ ᵣᵬᵥᵧᵬᵣᵣᵰᴾᵧᵤᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᵒᵵ
ᴾ
ᵦᵟᵣᵢᴾᵫᵣᵬᵳ ί ᵢᶇᶑᶎᶊᵿᶗ ᴾᵭᵤᵤ ὸ ᴾ ᵰᵣᵲᴾᵴᵧᵢᵣᵭᴾᵱᵣᵲᵲᵧᵬᵥ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾᵧᵬᵮᵳᵲᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾᴾᴾ ᴾᴾᴾᵔᵎᵎ
ᵱᵷᵱᵲᵣᵫᴾᵱᵣᵲᵲᵧᵬᵥᴾᵆᵏᵍᵐᵇ ᴾ ᵮᵦᵟᵱᵣᴾᵡᵭᵬᵲᵰᵭᵪ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾᵭᵳᵲᵮᵳᵲᴾ ᵭᵮᵣᵬ
ᴾ
Ṵ
ᵱᵷᵱᵲᵣᵫᴾᵱᵣᵲᵲᵧᵬᵥᴾᵆᵐᵍᵐᵇ ᴾ ᵟᵳᵢᵧᵭᴾᵱᵣᵲᵲᵧᵬᵥ ᴾ ᵮᵰᵭᵢᵳᵡᵣᵰᴾᵧᵤᴾᴾ ᴾ

ᵐᵪᵧᵬᵣ
Ṷᴾ ᵫᵧᵡᴾᵥᵟᵧᵬᴾᵰᵣᵫᵭᵲᵣ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾᵧᵬᵮᵳᵲᴾ ᴾᵒᵵ
Ṵ
ᴾ ᵧᵬᵲᵣᵰᵡᵭᵫ ᴾᵱᵣᵲᵲᵧᵬᵥ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ ᴾᵭᵳᵲᵮᵳᵲᴾᵪᵭᵟᵢᴾ ᴾᵔᵎᵎ
ᴾ ᵮᵥᵫᵏᴾᵲᵣᵰᵫᴾ ᵭᵮᵣᵬᴾ
ᴾ
ᵮᵥᵫᵏᴾᵧᵬᵮᵳᵲᴾᵪᵣᵴᵣᵪᴾ ᴾᵎᾳᵠ
ᵮᵥᵫᵐᴾᵲᵣᵰᵫᴾᴾ ᴾ ᵔᵎᵎ
ᵮᵥᵫᵐᴾᵧᵬᵮᵳᵲᴾᵪᵣᵴᵣᵪᴾ ᴾᵎᾳᵠ
ᵮᵥᵫᵑᴾᵲᵣᵰᵫᴾᴾ ᴾᵔᵎᵎ
ᵮᵥᵫᵑᴾᵧᵬᵮᵳᵲᴾᵪᵣᵴᵣᵪᴾ
ᴾ ᴾᵎᾳᵠ
ᵤᵰᵭᵬᵲᴾᵧᵬᵲᵣᵰᵡᵭᵫᴾᵫᵧᵡᴾ
ᴾ ᵢᵷᵬᵟᵫᵧᵡ
ᴾ
ᵧᵬᵲᵣᵰᵡᵭᵫᴾᵫᵧᵡᴾᵮᵭᵵᵣᵰᴾ ᵭᵤᵤ
ᴾ
ᵮᵥᵫᴾᵫᵧᵶᴾ ᵭᵤᵤ
ᴾ
ᵮᵥᵫᴾᵪᵣᵴᵣᵪᴾ
ᴾ ᵶᵏᵌᵎᵎ
ᴾ
Move to the flashing cursor to Move to the flashing cursor to The submenu "INTERCOM SETTING"
"SYSTEM SETTING（2/2）" and "INTERCOM SETTING" and is displayed, on which you can perform
confirm. confirm. various settings.
Note:
6HWWLQJRI(1*,1((5352'8&(5,)DQG,WHPVWKDWFDQEHOLQNHG
ENG/PROD IF 4W RTS Cler-Com
INPUT TERM
OUTPUT LOAD
600 / 10k
---
---
OPEN / 200
---
OPEN / 200
6
*HQHUDOO\287387/2$'LVVHWWR23(1:KHQ&&8LVGHWDFKHGIURPWKHH[WHUQDOV\VWHPVHWWR

- Setting of FRONT INTERCOM and Items that can be linked
FRONT INTERCOM DYNAMIC CARBON ECM
MIC POWER SUPPLY Fixed to OFF Fixed to ON ON / OFF
Input level (Hidden) -60dBu -10dBu -40dBu
Set according to the microphone type of the headset to be used.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 145

INTERCOM Setting Menu

Initial
Menu setting Setting value Description, Remarks
INTERCOM SETTING
This is the setting when the line system is used as individual two lines of
2LINE
― INTERCOM LINE 2LINE Engineer/Producer.
1LINE Integrate Producer line to Engineer line to make them to one line.
4W It sets Engineer line intercom system in 4-wire.
― ENGINEER IF 4W RTS It sets Engineer line intercom system in RTS.
CC It sets Engineer line intercom system in Cler-Com.
600 It sets Input termination impedance of the Engineer line intercom system in
ȍ
― INPUT 600
10k It sets Input termination impedance of the Engineer line intercom system in
Nȍ
OPEN It sets system impedance setting of the Engineer line RTS/Cler-Com in OPEN.
OUTPUT ---
200 ,WVHWVV\VWHPLPSHGDQFHVHWWLQJRIWKH(QJLQHHUOLQH576&OHU&RPLQȍ
4W It sets Producer line intercom system in 4-wire.
― PRODUCER IF 4W RTS It sets Producer line intercom system in RTS.
CC It sets Producer line intercom system in Cler-Com.
600 It sets Input termination impedance of the Producer line intercom system in
ȍ
― INPUT 600
10k It sets Input termination impedance of the Producer line intercom system in
Nȍ
OPEN It sets system impedance setting of the Producer line RTS/Cler-Com in OPEN.
OUTPUT ---
200 ,WVHWVV\VWHPLPSHGDQFHVHWWLQJRIWKH3URGXFHUOLQH576&OHU&RPLQȍ
600 ,WVHWVOLQHWHUPLQDWLRQLPSHGDQFHRIWKH3URJUDP$XGLRLQȍ
― PGM1 TERM 600
10k ,WVHWVOLQHWHUPLQDWLRQLPSHGDQFHRIWKH3URJUDP$XGLRLQNȍ
4dB ,WVHWVLQSXWOHYHORIWKH3URJUDP$XGLRLQG%V
― PGM1 INPUT LEVEL 0dB 0dB ,WVHWVLQSXWOHYHORIWKH3URJUDP$XGLRLQG%V
-20dB ,WVHWVLQSXWOHYHORIWKH3URJUDP$XGLRLQG%V
― PGM2 TERM 600
― PGM3 TERM 600
'<1$0,& It sets headset microphone to be connected to the CCU front side of the
LQVWUXPHQWLQ'<1$0,&W\SH
'<1$0,& &$5%21 It sets headset microphone to be connected to the CCU front side of the
― FRONT INTERCOM MIC
LQVWUXPHQWLQ&$5%21W\SH
ECM It sets headset microphone to be connected to the CCU front side of the
instrument in ECM type.
― INTERCOM MIC POWER OFF ON/OFF It sets whether or not the power is supplied when the microphone is set to EMC.
2))3*0 ,WVHWVZKHWKHURUQRWWKH3*0LVPL[HGWRWKH,17(5&20RXWSXWDWWKH&&8
― PGM MIX OFF
3*03*0 front side.
PGM LEVEL X1.00 X0.00 to 2.00 ,WVHWVOHYHORI3*0WRPL[LQ,17(5&20RXWSXWDWWKH&&8IURQWVLGH
146 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

Helpful Technical 7
Information
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)
7.1 4K Format
7.1 4K Format
This section explains the process and format used to transmit 4K video signals.
4K Format and HD Format
Term:
- 4K
4K indicates the video outputs with active image area of 3840 x 2160 or 4096 x 2160. In this document, 4K indicates the 3840 x 2160
output.
- HD (SDI)
6LJQDOVWKDWFRPSO\ZLWK6037(*EV6LJQDO'DWD6HULDO,QWHUIDFHî[
- * 6',
6LJQDOVWKDWFRPSO\ZLWK6037(*EV6LJQDO'DWD6HULDO,QWHUIDFHî /HYHO$%
- Quad Link
$PHWKRGWRFRQVWUXFWD.LPDJHZLWKOLQNV
■ 4K Video Output/Area Split Output (SQD)

7KLVPHWKRGKRUL]RQWDOO\RUYHUWLFDOO\VSOLWVWKHî
LPDJHVL]HRXWSXWLQWRWZRLPDJHVWKHQWUDQVPLWVDQG
displays four 1920×1080 sub images (Sub Image 1 to 4).
4K SDI Output (SQUARE DIVISION)

7
Helpful Technical Information

■ 4K Video Output/Pixel Split Output (2SI)
7KLVPHWKRGKRUL]RQWDOO\VSOLWVWKHLPDJHVL]H SHUSL[HOV
and every the other line) into four 1920×1080 sub images (Sub
Image 1 to 4) to transmit and display.
4K SDI Output (2 SAMPLE INTERLEAVE)
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 149

7.1 4K Format
■ HD Video Output/Cutout Output

- The range equivalent to the 2K video signals is cutout at an
arbitrary position from the 4K video signals, and the cutout
output is outputted.
4K Video Output
HD Video Output
■ HD Video Output (D/C: Down Convert Output)

7KH.YLGHRVLJQDOVDUHGRZQFRQYHUWHGWR+'LPDJHVL]H
and outputted.
4K Video Output
HD Video Output
150 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

7.1 4K Format
■ Output Form by Mode

Indicates the video processing system of the CCU implemented.
Depending on the availability of the optional module, the CCU output can be 4K only, HD only, 4K/HD simulcast, or HD double
speed/normal speed simulcast.
1 Plan A-1 (Standard configuration: HD mode)

- TRX_VP module is the HDTV (D/C) output mode.
- HD_VP module not implemented
Camera output CCU video processing Video signal output
SHAD, γ, MTX,
DTL, etc （D/C)
HD OUT-1
4K Signal D/C
SHAD, γ, MTX,
DTL, etc （D/C)
HD OUT-2
TRX_VP Module
not implemented
HD_VP Module
2 Plan A-2 (Standard configuration: 4K mode)

- TRX_VP module is the 4K output mode.
- HD_VP module not implemented

7
4K QL OUT-1
4K Signal SHAD, γ, MTX, （2SI or SQD)

DTL, etc
4K QL OUT-2
（2SI or SQD)
TRX_VP Module
not implemented
HD_VP Module
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 151

7.1 4K Format
3 Plan B-1 (Optional implementation: Normal speed mode)

- TRX_VP module is the 4K output mode.
- HD_VP module implemented
4K QL OUT-1
SHAD, γ, MTX, （2SI or SQD)
DTL, etc
4K Signal 4K QL OUT-2
D/C （2SI or SQD)
C/O
TRX TRX_VP
ﾓｼﾞﾙ Module
VP
SHAD, γ, MTX,
HD OUT-3（D/CorC/O）
D/C or
DTL、
etc
C/O
Select SHAD, γ, MTX, HD OUT-4（D/CorC/O）
DTL, etc
HD_VP Module
4 Plan B-2 (Optional implementation: Double speed mode)

- TRX_VP module is HD double speed mode.
- HD_VP module implemented
SHAD, γ, MTX, HD OUT-1（100P or 120P）

DTL、etc
1080/100P
or Double speed
1080/120P ⇒ normal SHAD, γ, MTX, HD OUT-2（100P or 120P)
Signal speed DTL, etc
conversion
1080/50P TRX_VP Module

or
1080/60P
Signal SHAD, γ, MTX,
HD OUT-3（50P or 60P）
DTL, etc
SHAD, γ, MTX, HD OUT-4（50P or 60P）

DTL, etc
HD_VP Module
152 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

7.1 4K Format
■ 4K/HD Format
The following shows the list of 4K/HD format, output format, and signal format displayed on the camera/CCU menus and self
diagnosis display screen (Diagnostic Information).
Quad Link HD-SDI (Square division)

Format SDI Signal
3840x2160 progressive 30/M 2160P29.94 1.485/M Gbps 422
3840x2160 progressive(sF) 30/M 2160PsF29.94 1.485/M Gbps 422
3840x2160 progressive 25 2160P25 1.485 Gbps 422
3840x2160 progressive(sF) 25 2160PsF25 1.485 Gbps 422
3840x2160 progressive 24 2160P24 1.485 Gbps 422
3840x2160 progressive(sF) 24 2160PsF24 1.485 Gbps 422
3840x2160 progressive 24/M 2160P23.98 1.485/M Gbps 422
3840x2160 progressive(sF) 24/M 2160PsF23.98 1.485/M Gbps 422
Quad Link 3G-SDI (2-sample interleave division / Square division)

Format SDI Signal Standard
3840x2160 progressive 60/M 2160P59.94-3G 2.970/M Gbps 422 SMPTE 424/425
3840x2160 progressive 50 2160P50-3G 2.970 Gbps 422 SMPTE 424/425
Note:
V)VHJPHQWHG)UDPH
0,QGLFDWHV
Caution
,Q6037(674XDG/LQNRI*6',LVQRWGH¿QHG2QO\FHUWDLQGHYLFHVFDQVXSSRUWWKHVLJQDOUHFHSWLRQRI+'6', *
Quad Link. 7
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 153

7.1 4K Format
Reference:
■ Menu Display
This section explains 4K format displayed on the menu and self diagnosis display using examples.
３８４０ × ２１６０５９．９４Ｐ／５０Ｐ
Frame frequency
(In this case, progressive 59.94 Hz or 50 Hz are adapted)
Number of Valid scanning lines (In this case, 2160 lines)
Number of Valid level pixels (In this case, 3840 pixels)
２１６０Ｐ５９．３Ｇ
Interface (3G: 3G-SDI/None: HD-SDI)
Frame frequency (In this case, 59.94 Hz)
Scanning system (I: Interlace/P: Progressive)
Number of Valid scanning lines (In this case, 2160 lines)
１０８０Ｐ２３．９８ＳＦ
Segmented frame
154 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

7.1 4K Format
■ HD Format
Format SDI Signal Standard
1920x1080 interlace 60/M 1080i59.94 1.485/M Gbps 422 274M/292M
1920x1080 progressive(sF) 24/M 1080PsF23.98 1.485/M Gbps 422 274M/292M
1920x1080 progressive 24/M 1080P23.98 1.485/M Gbps 422 274M/292M
1920x1080 progressive(sF) 30/M 1080PsF29.97 1.485/M Gbps 422 PR211/292M
1920x1080 interlace 50 1080i50 1.485 Gbps 422 274M/292M
1920x1080 progressive(sF) 25 1080PsF25 1.485 Gbps 422 PR211/292M
1920x1080 progressive 25 1080P25 1.485 Gbps 422 274M/292M
1920x1080 interlace 60/M 1080i59.94 2.970/M Gbps 444 274M/425M
1920x1080 interlace 50 1080i50 2.970 Gbps 444 274M/425M
Caution:
000DQG0DUH6037(VWDQGDUGV 7
Note:

V)VHJPHQWHG)UDPH
0,QGLFDWHV
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 155

7.2 Format Conversion
7.2 Format Conversion

Frame Field Conversion
■ "Segmented Frame"
The segmented frame extracts a video with progressive system per 1 line, and converts into a video with interlace system.
1/24 sec
24P
Frame #1 Frame #2
1/48 sec
24PsF
Segment A Segment B Segment A Segment B
1st Field 2nd Field 1st Field 2nd Field
Odd Lines Even Lines Odd Lines Even Lines
,WLVFKDUDFWHUL]HGE\QRPRYHPHQWLQWKH¿UVWVHJPHQW 6HJPHQW$ DQGWKHVHFRQGVHJPHQW 6HJPHQW% 7KHVHWZRVHJPHQWVDUH

V\QWKHVL]HGWRRQHSURJUHVVLYHVLJQDO
Since Segmented Frame system can be displayed on the CRT monitor and created without any major change in conventional
interlace devices. Therefore, this system has been widely used since the 24P format is introduced.
6LQFH3V)VLJQDOVDQG3V)VLJQDOVFDQEHWUHDWHGDVLDQGLUHVSHFWLYHO\LQUHFHQW\HDUVWKLV
system has been often used as the time-release video effect.
156 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

7.3 Signal Processing

■ Hybrid Log-Gamma
7KHVWDQGDUGL]HGYLGHRVLJQDOSURSHUWLHV WUDQVIHUIXQFWLRQ RI+'5 +LJKG\QDPLF5DQJH WRUHFRQVWUXFWWKHZLGHVXEMHFWUDQJH
from dark area to highlight.
UHK-430 camera has the custom gamma table and supports HDR operation by switching.
7KHWUDQVIHUIXQFWLRQRI$5,%67'%DQG+/*SURSHUWLHVDUHGHVFULEHGEHORZ
[Transfer Function]
㼞䌮㻱㻜䍺㻱䍺㻝
㻱䇻䠙
㻌䠽㻌㼘㼚䠄䚷䚷䚷䠅
㻱㻙㼎㻌㻌㻗㼏㻝䠘㻱
㻱䠖㻿㼏㼑㼚㼑㻌㼎㼞㼕㼓㼔㼠㼚㼑㼟㼟㻌㻔㻺㼛㼞㼙㼍㼘㼕㼦㼑㼐㻌㼣㼕㼠㼔㻌㼟㼠㼍㼚㼐㼍㼞㼐㻌㼣㼔㼕㼠㼑㻌㼘㼑㼢㼑㼘㻕
㻱䇻䠖㼂㼕㼐㼑㼛㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㻌㼘㼑㼢㼑㼘
㼞䠖㼂㼕㼐㼑㼛㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㻌㼘㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㼏㼛㼙㼜㼍㼠㼕㼎㼘㼑㻌㼣㼕㼠㼔㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼟㼠㼍㼚㼐㼍㼞㼐㻌㼣㼔㼕㼠㼑㻌㼘㼑㼢㼑㼘
㼞䠙㻜㻚㻡
㻌㼍㻩㻜㻚㻝㻣㻤㻤㻟㻞㻣㻣䠈㼎㻩㻜㻚㻞㻤㻠㻢㻢㻤㻥㻞䠈㼏㻩㻜㻚㻡㻡㻥㻥㻝㻜㻣㻟
[HLG Properties]
HLG I/O property

120％
100％ General property of r = 0.45
80％
Output
HLG Properties
60％
40%
20%
7

0%
0％ 200％ 400％ 600％ 800％ 1000％ 1200％ 1400％ 1600％
Input
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 157

■ Colorimetry (Color Region)

5HF,785%7LVDGDSWHGIRUWKHFRORULPHWU\RI.FDPHUD7KHFRORUH[SUHVVLRQUHJLRQLVVLJQL¿FDQWO\ODUJHUWKDQWKH+'
camera with Rec. ITU-R BT.709.
- The UHK-430 camera has 4K mode and HD mode. Select and set the colorimetry suitable for each mode.
- Shows the chromaticity coordinate of BT.2020 and BT.709.
BT.2020
BT.709
Caution:
7KHYLGHRIRUPDWRI+'5GH¿QHVWKHFRORULPHWU\%7DQGWUDQVIHUIXQFWLRQ+/*V\VWHP
158 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

7.4 Signal Transmission

■ Mapping Structure for Level A and Level B of 3G-SDI
6037(0GH¿QHVWKHLQWHUIDFHWKDWWUDQVPLWV*ESVVHULDOGDWDVWUHDPZLWKDFRD[LDOFDEOH
This stream consists of two virtual data streams (Data Stream 1, Data Stream 2).
(DFKGDWDVWUHDPLVPDSSHGEDVHGRQWKHPDSSLQJVWUXFWXUHDQGFODVVL¿HGLQWR/HYHO$DQG/HYHO%E\WKHPDSSLQJPHWKRG
Caution:
The word data lines of digital blanking is omitted here. Please refer to respective standards for more details.
[Level A]
1 For Y/Cb/Cr data, Y data is mapped to Data Stream 1, and Cb/Cr data is mapped to Data Stream 2.
Virtual Data Stream
Multiplexing
Data Stream1
Mapping
Video Signal 3G SDI
Data Stream2
Data Stream1
Digital blanking
Y1918
Y1919
= =
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Data Stream2
Digital blanking
Cb959
Cr959
= =
Cb0
Cb1
Cb2
Cr0
Cr1
Cr2
7

2 Multiplexes the Data Stream 2 and Data Stream 1, in this order, in a word unit, resulting 3Gbps serial data
stream.
Word Multiplex Data Line
Digital blanking
Cb959
Y1918
Y1919
Cr959
= =
Cb0
Cb1
Cb2
Cr0
Cr1
Cr2
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 159

[Level-B]
7KLVPHWKRGFRQYHUWVWKHGXDOOLQNVWDQGDUGL]HGZLWK6037(0WR*ESVVHULDOGDWDVWUHDPVLJQDOV
6RUWWKH3VLJQDOV *GDWD LQWRWKHGXDOOLQN
Method to sort from

1080 line number 1080 into Links A, B
Link A Link B
1
2 3
2
3
40 41
40
41
1079
1079
1080
1080
Refer to the BTA S-004C 1.0 version.
1 Map Link A to Data Stream 1, and map Link B to Data Stream 2.
Virtual Data Stream
Link-A
Multiplexing
Data Stream1
Mapping
Video Signal 3G SDI
Data Stream2
Link-B
Link-A
Digital blanking
Cb959
Y1918
Y1919
Cr959
= =
Cb0
Cb1
Cb2
Cr0
Cr1
Cr2
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Link-B
Digital blanking
Cb959
Y1918
Y1919
Cr959
= =
Cb0
Cb1
Cb2
Cr0
Cr1
Cr2
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
2 Multiplexes the Data Stream 2 and Data Stream 1, in this order, in a word unit, resulting 3Gbps serial data
stream.
Word Multiplex Data Line
Digital blanking
Cb959
Cb959
Y1918
Y1918
Y1919
Y1919
Cr959
Cr959
= =
Cb0
Cb0
Cb1
Cb1
Cb2
Cb2
Cr0
Cr0
Cr1
Cr1
Cr2
Cr2
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y1
Y2
Y2
Y3
Y3
Y4
Y4
Y5
Y5
160 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

7.5 Video Signal Format Output

■ Selecting the Function Combination
'LVSOD\VWKHOLVWRIWKHVHOHFWHGLWHPV PRQLWRUIRUPDWDQGV\QFKURQL]DWLRQVLJQDORXWSXW RIHDFKIXQFWLRQLQWKHIRUPDW 6',287
of the operation system.
Each setting is performed on the camera head or CCU menu. The list also includes optional items, so some of items may not be
selected.
[SDI OUT-1, -2 Selection Combination]
Indicates the video output signal format for the main line system format.
IMAGE SIZE FREQ & SAMPLING MAPPING 4K OUTPUT MON OUT SYNC OUTPUT
SCAN
3840 x 2160 59.94P 1080i59.94 422 HD-SDI 1080P59.94/1080i59.94
YCbCr 422
50P 1080i50 422 HD-SDI 1080P50/1080i50
29.97P 1080P29.97 422 HD-SDI, or 1080P29.97/1080i59.94
1080P29.97sF 422 HD-SDI
3G SDI Level- 3G QL 2SI, 1080P25 422 HD-SDI, or
25P A/B or SQD 1080P25sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P25/1080i50
RGB 444
24P 1080P24 422 HD-SDI, or 1080P24/1080P24sF
23.98P 1080P23.98 422 HD-SDI, or 1080P23.98/1080P23.98sF
1080P23.98sF 422 HD-SDI
29.97P 1080P29.97 422 HD-SDI, or 1080P29.97/1080i59.94
1080P29.97sF 422 HD-SDI
25P 1080P25 422 HD-SDI, or 1080P25/1080i50
YCbCr 422 HD SDI HD QL SQD
1080P24 422 HD-SDI, or
24P 1080P24sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P24/1080P24sF
23.98P 1080P23.98 422 HD-SDI, or 1080P23.98/1080P23.98sF

1080P23.98sF 422 HD-SDI
29.97PsF 1080P29.97sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P29.97/1080i59.94
25PsF 1080P25sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P25/1080i50
YCbCr 422 HD SDI HD QL SQD
24PsF 1080P24sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P24/1080P24sF
23.98PsF 1080P23.98sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P23.98/1080P23.98sF
1920 x 1080 59.94P 3G SDI Level- 1080i59.94 422 HD-SDI 1080P59.94//1080i59.94
YCbCr 422
50P
59.94i
A/B 1080i50 422 HD-SDI
1080i59.94 422 HD-SDI
1080P50/1080i50
1080i59.94
7
YCbCr 422 HD SDI
50i 1080i50 422 HD-SDI 1080i50

59.94i 3G SDI Level- 1080i59.94 422 HD-SDI 1080i59.94
RGB 444 A/B
50i 1080i50 422 HD-SDI 1080i50
29.97P 1080P29.97 422 HD-SDI, or 1080P29.97/1080i59.94
1080P29.97sF 422 HD-SDI
25P 1080P25 422 HD-SDI, or 1080P25/1080i50
YCbCr 422 HD SDI
1080P24 422 HD-SDI, or
24P 1080P24sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P24/1080P24sF
23.98P 1080P23.98 422 HD-SDI, or 1080P23.98/1080P23.98sF

1080P23.98sF 422 HD-SDI
29.97P 1080P29.97 422 HD-SDI, or 1080P29.97/1080i59.94
1080P29.97sF 422 HD-SDI
25P 1080P25 422 HD-SDI, or 1080P25/1080i50
3G SDI Level- 1080P25sF 422 HD-SDI
RGB 444
A/B 1080P24 422 HD-SDI, or
24P 1080P24sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P24/1080P24sf
23.98P 1080P23.98 422 HD-SDI, or 1080P23.98/1080P23.98sF

1080P23.98sF 422 HD-SDI
29.97PsF 1080P29.97sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P29.97/1080i59.94
25PsF 1080P25sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P25/1080i50
YCbCr 422 HD SDI
29.97PsF 1080P29.97sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P29.97/1080i59.94
25PsF 3G SDI Level- 1080P25sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P25/1080i50
RGB 444 A/B
119.88P 1080i59.94 422 HD-SDI 1080P59.94/1080i59.94
YCbCr 422
100P 1080i50 422 HD-SDI 1080P50/1080i50
1280 x 720 59.94P 720P59.94 422 HD-SDI 720P59.94
YCbCr 422 HD SDI
50P 720P50 422 HD-SDI 720P50
Caution:
6RPHLWHPVPD\QRWEHRSHUDEOHGXHWR\RXURSHUDWLQJFRQ¿JXUDWLRQ
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 161

[SDI OUT-3, -4]

Indicates the video output signal format for the optional line system format.
FREQ &
IMAGE SIZE SCAN SAMPLING MAPPING 4K OUTPUT MON OUT SYNC OUTPUT
1920 x 1080 59.94P 1080i59.94 422 HD-SDI 1080P59.94/1080i59.94
3G SDI Level-
YCbCr 422 A/B
50P 1080i50 422 HD-SDI 1080P50/1080i50
59.94i 1080i59.94 422 HD-SDI 1080i59.94
YCbCr 422 HD SDI
50i 1080i50 422 HD-SDI 1080i50
59.94i 3G SDI Level- 1080i59.94 422 HD-SDI 1080i59.94
RGB 444 A/B
50i 1080i50 422 HD-SDI 1080i50
29.97P 1080P29.97 422 HD-SDI, or 1080P29.97/1080i59.94

1080P29.97sF 422 HD-SDI
25P 1080P25 422 HD-SDI, or 1080P25/1080i50
YCbCr 422 HD SDI
24P 1080P24 422 HD-SDI, or 1080P24/1080P24sF
23.98P 1080P23.98 422 HD-SDI, or 1080P23.98/1080P23.98sF
1080P23.98sF 422 HD-SDI
29.97P 1080P29.97 422 HD-SDI, or 1080P29.97/1080i59.94
1080P29.97sF 422 HD-SDI
1080P25 422 HD-SDI, or
25P 1080P25sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P25/1080i50
3G SDI Level-
RGB 444
A/B 1080P24 422 HD-SDI, or
24P 1080P24sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P24/1080P24sF
23.98P 1080P23.98 422 HD-SDI, or 1080P23.98/1080P23.98sF

1080P23.98sF 422 HD-SDI
29.97PsF 1080P29.97sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P29.97/1080i59.94
25PsF 1080P25sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P25/1080i50
YCbCr 422 HD SDI
29.97PsF 1080P29.97sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P29.97/1080i59.94
25PsF 3G SDI Level- 1080P25sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P25/1080i50
RGB 444
24PsF A/B 1080P24sF 422 HD-SDI 1080P24/1080P24sF
1280 x 720 59.94P 720P59.94 422 HD-SDI 720P59.94
YCbCr 422 HD SDI
50P 720P50 422 HD-SDI 720P50
Caution:
6RPHLWHPVPD\QRWEHRSHUDEOHGXHWR\RXURSHUDWLQJFRQ¿JXUDWLRQ
162 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ TRUNK VIDEO format is compatible with CCU output format settings

CCU OUTPUT FRAME /FIELD RATE Camera HD TRUNK IN
59.94 Progressive Interlace 1080I59.94 YCbCr 4:2:2 HD-SDI

1080P29.97sF YCbCr 4:2:2 HD-SDI
50 Progressive Interlace 1080I50 YCbCr 4:2:2 HD-SDI
1080P25sF YCbCr 4:2:2 HD-SDI
29.97 Progressive PsF 1080P29.97 YCbCr 4:2:2 HD-SDI
25 Progressive PsF 1080P25 YCbCr 4:2:2 HD-SDI
24 Progressive PsF 1080P24 YCbCr 4:2:2 HD-SDI
23.98 Progressive PsF 1080P23.98 YCbCr 4:2:2 HD-SDI
■ QTV/RETURN VIDEO format is compatible with CCU output format settings

CCU OUTPUT FRAME /FIELD RATE CCU HD QTV IN / RETURN IN
59.94 Progressive Interlace 1080P59.94 YCbCr 4:2:2 3G-SDI LVL-A/B
1080I59.94 RGB 4:4:4 3G-SDI LVL-A/B
1080I59.94 YCbCr 4:2:2 HD-SDI
50 Progressive Interlace 1080P50 YCbCr 4:2:2 3G-SDI LVL-A/B
1080I50 RGB 4:4:4 3G-SDI LVL-A/B
1080I50 YCbCr 4:2:2 HD-SDI
29.97 Progressive PsF 1080P29.97 RGB 4:4:4 3G-SDI LVL-A/B
1080P29.97sF RGB 4:4:4 3G-SDI LVL-A/B
1080P29.97 YCbCr 4:2:2 HD-SDI
25 Progressive PsF 1080P25 RGB 4:4:4 3G-SDI LVL-A/B
1080P25sF RGB 4:4:4 3G-SDI LVL-A/B 7
1080P25 YCbCr 4:2:2 HD-SDI

24 Progressive PsF 1080P24 RGB 4:4:4 3G-SDI LVL-A/B
1080P24sF RGB 4:4:4 3G-SDI LVL-A/B
1080P24 YCbCr 4:2:2 HD-SDI
23.98 Progressive PsF 1080P23.98 RGB 4:4:4 3G-SDI LVL-A/B
11080P23.98sF RGB 4:4:4 3G-SDI LVL-A/B
1080P23.98 YCbCr 4:2:2 HD-SDI
(YHQLI*6',VLJQDOVDUHLQSXWWHGWR&&8WKH4795(7851RXWSXWVRIWKHFDPHUDDUHFRQYHUWHGWR+'6',VLJQDOV
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 163

7.6 Monitor System
7.6 Monitor System

■ Monitor System of Video Signals for Video Main Line
$QH[DPSOHRIUHODWLRQVKLSLQPRQLWRUV\VWHP SLFWXUHPRQLWRUDQGZDYHIRUPPRQLWRU IRUWKHPDLQOLQHRXWSXWYLGHRV\VWHP
format.
Camera Head SCAN MODE CCU Output Connector CCU Output Signal Bit Rate Number of cable Main Line Monitoring System PM MON（for VE）
4k 3G compatible HD
MON HD WFM MON
1. 3840 x 2160 4K/HD OUT 4K SQUARE 3Gbps 4

（OUT 1, OUT 2） or 4K 2SI 3Gbps 4
*3G compatible *3G compatible

HD MON HD WFM
HD D/C 1080P 3Gbps 1

HD OUT HD D/C 1080i 1.5Gbps 1
（OUT 3, OUT 4） HD C/O 1080P 3Gbps 1
HD C/O 1080i 1.5Gbps 1
* Operated with 1080P.

HD compatible is good
when operated with 1080i.
PM MONI 1080i 1.5Gbps 1
*3G compatible *3G compatible HD

HD MON HD WFM MON
2. 1920 x 1080 HD OUT HD 1080i/P 3Gbps 1

（OUT 1, OUT 2） (59.94/50/29.97/
25/24/23.98)
HD 1080i 1.5Gbps 1
(59.94/50)
HD 1080P/PsF 1.5Gbps 1
(29.97/25/24/
23.98)
PM MONI HD 1080i 1.5Gbps 1

(59.94/50/29.97/
25/24/23.98)
164 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

7.7 Adjusting the Lens

■ Adjusting the Lens Flange Back
7RRSHUDWHWKH]RRPOHQVWKHIRFXVHVRIERWK7(/VLGH WHOHVFRSH DQG:,'( ZLGHDQJOH KDYHWREHDGMXVWHG
,IWKHOHQVLVUHSODFHGZLWKDQRWKHURQHDQG]RRPHGWKHIRFXVPD\QRWEHDGMXVWHG7KLVRFFXUVZKHQWKHÀDQJHEDFNRIWKHOHQV
GLVWDQFHIURPWKHOHQVPRXQWVLGHWRWKHLPDJLQJVXUIDFHRILPDJLQJHOHPHQW LVQRWLQWKHDSSURSULDWHSRVLWLRQ,IWKH]RRPOHQV
LVRQFHIRFXVHGZKHQWKHGLVWDQFHWRWKHVXEMHFWLVFRQVWDQWLWFDQVWD\IRFXVHGUHJDUGOHVVRIWKH]RRPRSHUDWLRQ0RYHWKHÀDQJH
back position to adjust and stay focused. Once adjusted, it is not necessary to readjust the lens until the lens is replaced with
another one.
$QH[DPSOHRIDGMXVWPHQWPHWKRGLVVKRZQEHORZ
1 Set the IRIS mode switch of zoom lens to “M” (manual).
2 Open the IRIS (F1.4).

It becomes harder to identify the change in video against the rotation of focus ring because the status degree of the IRIS
diaphragm (F value is greater) and the depth of the subject get greater.
Note
/RRNDWWKHYLHZ¿QGHUVFUHHQDQGVKRRWWKHVXEMHFWLQZKLFKWKHYLGHROHYHOGRHVQRWJHWVDWXUDWHG ¿OOHGZLWKZKLWH 7KHVXEMHFW
with detailed patterns is easier to adjust the focus.
,IWKHVXEMHFWLVWRREULJKWDQGVDWXUDWHGHYHQLQWKHUHOHDVHGVWDWXVHPSOR\WKH1'¿OWHUDQGGDUNHQWKHOLJKWLQJHWF
- Siemens star chart is recommended for the subject. The center part has detailed patterns, so it is easy to adjust the focus. (Refer to the
next page.)
3 Shoot the subject about 5 m away.
4 Press the zoom switch "T", and fully enlarge the lens to the TELE (telescope) side to adjust the focus ring in
focus. 7
5 Press the zoom switch "M", and fully reduce the lens to the WIDE (wide angle) side. (At this time, be sure not to

move the focus ring.)
6 Loosen the flange back knob, and turn it to adjust the focus.
7 Repeat the procedures 4 - 6, and tighten the flange back knob with “T” and “M” both in focus.
Flange back adjust ring IRIS ring Focus ring

W
Flange back knob RET switch Zoom switch IRIS mode switch
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 165

■ An example of the flange back adjustment chart
Siemens star chart
166 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

7.8 TRACKER function

■ Overview
75$&.(5LVDFRQQHFWRUXVHGWRMRLQWKHFUDQH%2;HWFRUH[WHUQDOV\VWHP
■ Functions
'$7$7581.OLQH RSHUDWHGH[FOXVLYHO\IURP&5$1(OLQH
&5$1(OLQH RSHUDWHGH[FOXVLYHO\IURP'$7$7581.OLQH
7$//VLJQDO 5*
(4) RET control (1/2ch)
,17(5&20 WDONFKOLVWHQFK
■ Connectors
5HFHSWDFOHVLGH+,526((OHFWULF+5$56%
3OXJVLGH+,526((OHFWULF+5$33& RUHTXLYDOHQW
■ Pin assignment
Pin No. Name Function I/O External interface
(1) PC_TXD_P &5$1(7518.'$7$287 OUT RS422 (P) *1
(2) PC_TXD_N &5$1(7518.'$7$287 OUT RS422 (N) *1
(3) PC_RXD_P &5$1(7518.'$7$,1 IN RS422 (P) *1
(4) PC_RXD_N &5$1(7518.'$7$,1 IN RS422 (N) *1
*URXQGIRU'&9SRZHUVXSSO\FRPPRQ
*1' *1'IRU08B5($59
*1'
(6) 08B5($59 '&9SRZHUVXSSO\ 0D[$ DC+12V(+11V to +18V)
(7) 5B7$//< 57$//<RXWSXW OUT
(8) *B7$//< *7$//<RXWSXW OUT
(9) RET-1 RET-1 SW IN IN Open Drain
(10) RET-2 RET-2 SW IN IN 7
377VLJQDORI75$&.(50,& /R21+L
(11) INC_MIC_ON IN
=2))

Connector mode selection
(12) 75$&.(5B(1 /&5$1(PRGH+L]7581.'$7$ IN ʊ
mode)
(13) RESERVE-1 Reserve IN
Open Drain
(14) RESERVE-2 Reserve IN
75$&.(5 ,17(5&20 5HFHLYH$XGLR IN
(16) 75$&.(5 ,17(5&20 5HFHLYH$XGLR IN 8QEDODQFH$XGLR
(17) 75$&.(5 ,17(5&20 5HFHLYH$XGLR IN 0dBu / -20dBu
(18) 75$&.(5 ,17(5&20 5HFHLYH$XGLR IN

(19) 7B7$/.B+ ,17(5&200,& + 7DON$XGLR IN High impedance balanced
(20) 7B7$/.B& ,17(5&200,& & 7DON$XGLR IN 0dBu / -20dBu
Caution:
'$7$7581.DQG&5$1(OLQHVXVHV3LQVWRH[FOXVLYHO\
■ Power output
'&9$FDQEHVXSSOLHGIRUSRZHUVXSSO\
Be sure not to exceed the supply capacity.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 167

■ INTERCOM
In order to establish the INTERCOM for extension, the INTERCOM line has "talk 1ch" and "Receive 4ch" lines.
Ɣ7KHRYHUYLHZRI75$&.(55HFHLYHOLQHVDUHVKRZQLQWKH¿JXUHEHORZ
6LQFHHDFKFKDQQHOKDVDPL[FRQWUROFLUFXLWWKHLQSXWVRXUFHFDQEHVHWIURPWKH&$0(5$PHQX
The output gain can be selected from two types, -20dBu or 0dBu.
TRACKER (Receive system)
Input destination
INTERCOM1
INTERCOM2 Output destination
MIX CTRL TRACKER-1

MIC1
MIC2 MIX CTRL TRACKER-2 TRACKER
GAIN
ENG (0dBm/-20dBm)
MIX CTRL TRACKER-3

Connect to
PROD external
system
MIX CTRL TRACKER-4

CAM GENLOCK APC SDI
CCU
POWER
PHONE
MIC PRV OPE
ON
PGM1
OFF
PTT
COM OFF
USB
INIT/PM CALL
PGM2
PGM3
Ɣ7KHRYHUYLHZRI75$&.(5WDONOLQHVDUHVKRZQLQWKH¿JXUH
75$&.(57$/.FDQVHWWKHIROORZLQJIXQFWLRQVIURPWKHFDPHUDPHQX$OORZLQJRUDOFRPPXQLFDWLRQRQO\EHWZHHQWKH
,1&20RIFDPHUDKHDGDQGLQFOXGLQJWKH(1*352'RQWKH&&8VLGHWRLQFOXGHLWLQWKHV\VWHPVLGH
The input gain can be selected from two types, -20dBu or 0dBu.
TRACKER (Talk system) Output destination
MIX CTRL INTERCOM1

Input destination
TRACKER INTERCOM2
MIX CTRL
T_TALK_H
AMP-ADC
（0ｄBm/-20dBm) MIX CTRL EARPHONE
T_TALK_C
Connect to
external
system MIX CTRL ENG

CAM GENLOCK APC SDI
CCU
POWER
PHONE
MIC PRV OPE
ON
OFF
PTT
COM OFF
USB
INIT/PM CALL
MIX CTRL PROD
168 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

7.9 Simultaneous option

Overview and implementation requirements
By introducing the "HD SIMUL" option to the CCU-430, simultaneous output of HD video and 4K video becomes possible. The
HD output can be a simultaneous output of a 1980 x 1080 pixel image down-converted from the 4K image,or an HD cut-out output
of a desired section from the 4K image.
7KH+'V\VWHPDQGWKH.V\VWHPFDQSURFHVVLPDJHVLQGHSHQGHQWO\7KH\FDQLQGLYLGXDOO\VHWWKH*$00$FXUYHFRORUWRQH
adjustment, and contour correction function respectively.
SDR
BT.709
HD VIDEO
(D/C, C/O)
*** CAMERA
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
HD_OUT
1 2 3 4 1 2 4
GbE TRK VP_OUT
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
RET_MON
4K VIDEO
HDR
MPU
BT.2020
Example of system configuration
Install the front module [HD_VP] and the rear module [HD_OUT] in the CCU-430 for the implementation of the “HD SIMUL”
option.
HD_OUT
Module 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
HD_OUT

*** CAMERA
1 2 3 4 1 2 4
GbE TRK VP_OUT
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
RET_MON
MPU
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 169

The following shows the CCU video output assignment when the “HD SIMUL” option is implemented.
HD_OUT module
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
HD_OUT
VP_OUT module
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
GbE TRK VP_OUT
OUT-1, OUT-2 system 4K main line output OUT-3, OUT-4 system HD main line output
・4K QUAD LINK 2 system 8 output ・SMPTE 424/425 Level-A/B
SQD or 2SI ・SMPTE 292M
2 system 8 output
The system can not be individually set. The system can be individually set.
,IWKH³+'6,08/´RSWLRQLVLPSOHPHQWHG6',287387DQG6',287387DUHGHGLFDWHGIRU.YLGHRRXWSXW$OVRWKH
system cannot be individually set. The 4K format of OUT1 and the 4k format of OUT2 are the same.
The system can be individually set for SDI OUTPUT-3 and SDI OUTPUT-4. The down-convert output and cutout output can be
individually assigned. The video output formats can be individually set if they have the same frame rate.
Example
OUT-3 3<&E&U OUT-4 ,<&E&U

*6',/HYHO% HD-SDI
OUT-3 35*% OUT-4 3V)<&E&U

*6',/HYHO$ HD-SDI
OUT-3 3<&E&U OUT-4 3<&E&U

*6',/HYHO$ *6',/HYHO%
170 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ The comparison of down-convert output and cutout output

HD image size 1920x1080 pix
4K image size 3840x2160 pix
Down-convert and output
HD image size 1920x1080 pix
Cut out and output

Cut out any places in HD size
6WDQGDUGLPDJH (LIIHO7RZHU IRUWUDQVSDUHQWKLJKGH¿QLWLRQVXSHUYLVHGE\,7( 7KH,QVWLWXWHRI,PDJH,QIRUPDWLRQDQG

Television Engineers) is used as a sample image.
■ Corresponding remote controller

Remote controllers corresponding to this product are the OCP-300 operation control panel and the MCP-300 master control panel.
In order to activate the "HD SIMUL" optional function, installing a installing "License key" to the control panel is necessary.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 171

The setting of the down-convert output and cutout output

$VDGHIDXOWVHWWLQJDGRZQFRQYHUWRXWSXWLVDVVLJQHGIRUERWK6',287387DQG6',287387:KHQDVVLJQLQJWKHFXWRXW
to an output, if is set from the CCU MENU.
)RUWKHRSHUDWLRQVDQGFRQ¿JXUDWLRQRIWKH&&80(18UHIHUWRWKHRSHUDWLRQPDQXDOFKDSWHU&&8VHWWLQJDQGDGMXVWPHQW
&&80(18ĺ6<67(06(77,1* ĺ+'9,'(2352&(66
Select the HD CUTOUT.
Setting values
OFF OUT-3/4 are both down-convert outputs
287 287+'&87287RXWSXW287'RZQFRQYHUWRXWSXW
287 287'RZQFRQYHUWRXWSXW287+'&87287RXWSXW
OUT-3/4 OUT-3/4 are both HD CUTOUT outputs
172 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ Operation from the operation control panel (OCP-300)

The position of the cutout video is set from the OCP-300.
3UHVVWKH>6(783@EXWWRQRI2&3DQGVHOHFW6HWXS RQWKH/&'ĺ+'&87287
Selection of preset position
Saving and recalling the

user memories
Setting the x-axis and y-axis

of the cutout position
- Corresponding remote controller

Select a preset cutout position. The switch for the currently selected cutout position turns yellow. Five cut-out positions (center,
upper left, upper right, lower left, and lower right sections of the screen) and the entire screen (CUTOUT OFF = Down-converting
output) can be selected.
$IWHUWKHVHOHFWLRQRIWKHSUHVHWSRVLWLRQDGMXVWLQJWKHSRVLWLRQLVSRVVLEOHE\XVLQJ;$;,6DQG<$;,6
- Saving and recalling the user memories

8SWRWKUHHFXWRXWSRVLWLRQVWKDWZHUHVHWE\WKHXVHUFDQEHPHPRUL]HG
7
$IWHUVHWWLQJWKHSRVLWLRQE\XVLQJ;$;,6DQG<$;,6SUHVVWKH6WRUHVZLWFK WXUQVWKHVZLWFKFRORUIURPJUD\WR\HOORZ
3UHVVLQJHLWKHU0(00(0RU0(0WXUQVWKHVZLWFKFRORUWR\HOORZ 7KHQWKHVHWXSLVPHPRUL]HG

When recalling a memory, press either MEM1, MEM2, or MEM3.
$IWHUUHFDOOLQJDXVHUPHPRU\DGMXVWLQJWKHFXWRXWSRVLWLRQLVSRVVLEOHXVLQJ;$;,6DQG<$;,6
:KHQXSGDWLQJWKHGDWDRIDVHWXSDOUHDG\PHPRUL]HGRYHUZULWLQJLVFRQGXFWHG
7KHYDOXHVRI;$;,6DQG<$;,6LQGLFDWHWKHVWDUWLQJSRLQW OHIWWRS RIWKHFXWRXWYLGHR
;$;,6VHWWLQJUDQJH WR
<$;,6VHWWLQJUDQJH WR
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 173

Video phase adjustment

This section explains the video phase adjustment during simultaneous operation.
,QSXWDQH[WHUQDOUHIHUHQFHV\QFKURQL]DWLRQVLJQDOWRWKH&&8$GMXVWWKHYLGHRSKDVHXVLQJDZDYHIRUPPRQLWRU
Open CCU MENU to select

“SYSTEM SETTING(2/2)” →
“PHASE CONTROL”.
The following items cannot be selected
during simultaneous operation.

HD OUT-1 V PHASE
HD OUT-2 V PHASE
HD OUT-1 H PHASE
HD OUT-2 H PHASE
4K V PHASE
Set the vertical phase of 4K video output from SDI OUTPUT-1/2.
HD OUT-3 V PHASE
Set the vertical phase of HD video output from SDI OUTPUT-3.
HD OUT-4 V PHASE
Set the vertical phase of HD video output from SDI OUTPUT-4.
4K H PHASE
6HWWKHKRUL]RQWDOSKDVHRI.YLGHRRXWSXWIURP6',287387
HD OUT-3 H PHASE
6HWWKHKRUL]RQWDOSKDVHRI+'YLGHRRXWSXWIURP6',287387
HD OUT-4 H PHASE
6HWWKHKRUL]RQWDOSKDVHRI+'YLGHRRXWSXWIURP6',287387
174 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ H PHASE control from the OCP-300

7RDGMXVWWKHKRUL]RQWDOYLGHRSKDVHIURP2&3
SUHVVWKH>6(783@EXWWRQWRRSHQ³6\VWHP´ĺ³*/3KDVH´
D/C H Phase
&RQWUROWKHKRUL]RQWDOSKDVHRI+'YLGHRRXWSXWIURP6',287387
H Phase
&RQWUROWKHKRUL]RQWDOSKDVHRI.YLGHRRXWSXWIURP6',287387
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 175

Image setting for simultaneous operation

When the "HD SIMUL" option is installed, independent image processing for the HD system and the 4K system becomes possible
DVVKRZQLQWKHIROORZLQJ¿JXUH'XHWRWKHWZRV\VWHPSDUDOOHOSURFHVVLQJWKH*$00$FXUYHFRORUWRQHDGMXVWPHQWDQG
contour correction function can be set for the 4K output and the HD output respectively. In addition, interlocking the processes of
two system is also possible using common parameters.
■ SIMUL mode setting

7KHLQGHSHQGHQFHRIYDULRXVSDUDPHWHUVLQVLPXOWDQHRXVRSHUDWLRQDUHVHWLQWKH&$0(5$0(18
3OHDVHUHIHUWRWKHRSHUDWLRQPDQXDO&KDSWHU%DVLFRSHUDWLRQRIWKHPHQXVFUHHQÍRURSHUDWLRQDQGFRQ¿JXUDWLRQRI
&$0(5$0(18<RXFDQDFFHVVWKH&$0(5$0(18IURPWKH&&80(18
&$0(5$0(18KLHUDUFK\
7230(18ĺ0(1802'(ĺ(1*,1((50(1821ĺ6<67(0
176 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

SIMUL MODE(E)
Setting values
OFF
2))7KH.DQG+'RXWSXWVDUHFRQWUROOHGE\FRPPRQSDUDPHWHUV PXOWLOLQNV
NORMAL
In this mode, parameters related to color adjustment function (Color) and outline correction function (Detail) can be
individually set for the 4K output and the HD output.
Other controls are multi-link settings.
INDEP GAMMA
,QWKLVPRGHFRQWUROVLQFOXGHGLQWKH1250$/PRGHSOXV*$00$.1((*$,13(':+,7(&/,3HWFFDQEH
individually adjusted for the 4K output and the HD output.
7KHOLVWRIIXQFWLRQVWKDWFDQEHLQGLYLGXDOO\DGMXVWHGLQ1250$/DQG,1'(3*$00$PRGHV
SIMUL MODE
FUNCTION
NORMAL INDEP GAMMA
GAIN 另另 7
FREQ 另另

B/W 另另
BAL 另另
DTL
THRESH 另另
FINE 另另
NOISE SUP 另另
Z.TRK 另另
GAIN 另另
HI-LIGHT DTL
LIMIT 另另
WHT SUP 另另
SOFT DTL
BLK SUP 另另
R HUE/B HUE 另另
SKIN DTL GAIN 另另
Z.TRK 另另
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 177

SIMUL MODE
FUNCTION
NORMAL INDEP GAMMA
GAIN 另另
PHASE 另另
COLOR DTL FINE 另另
WIDTH1 另另
WIDTH2 另另
MATRIX CH 1/2/3 另另
MATRIX1 R-G/R-B, G-R/G-B, B-R/B-G 另另
COLOR SAT COLOR SAT 另另
SAT 另另
LOWLIGHT SAT
THRESH 另另
HUE 另另
16 AXES COLOR CORR SAT 另另
VALUE 另另
COLOR HUE 另另
HUE 另另
SAT 另另
VALUE 另另
DTL 另另
CUSTOM COLOR EFFECT1
PHASE 另另
FINE 另另
WIDTH1 另另
WIDTH2 另另
HUE 另另
SAT 另另
VALUE 另另
DTL 另另
CUSTOM COLOR EFFECT2
PHASE 另另
FINE 另另
WIDTH1 另另
WIDTH2 另另
STEP GAMMA OFF/0.45/0.40/0.35 另
GAMMA MODE NORMAL/CUSTOM1/2/3/4/5 另
GAMMA MASTER 另
GAIN MASTER 另
PED MASTER 另
178 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

SIMUL MODE
FUNCTION
NORMAL INDEP GAMMA
SMOOTH KNEE OFF/TYPE1/2/3 另
MANUAL KNEE OFF/ON 另
POINT 另
TOTAL KNEE(MANUAL)
SLOPE 另
WHITE CLIP R/G/B 另
■ Various settings from the OCP-300

In case of the OCP-300, a license key of the "HD SIMUL" option is introduced, and the [Video], [Detail], and [Color] pages of
Setup are extended, and the [SML Video], [SML Detail], and [SML Color] items are added. On the LCD screen, the [Video], [Detail],
and [Color] screens of Setup (1/2) are shifted as follows.
Transition order when the arrow switch is pressed.
Video1 ⇔ Video2 ⇔ SML Video ⇔ Detail

⇔ SML Detail ⇔ Color ⇔ SML Color ⇔
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 179

7KHIROORZLQJVKRZVZKLFKRSHUDWLRQVFDQEHSHUIRUPHGRQHDFKVFUHHQRI2&3XQGHUFHUWDLQ&$0(5$0(186,08/02'(
setting conditions.
SIMUL MODE SML Video SML Detail SML Color
OFF
NORMAL 另另
INDEP GAMMA 另另另
■ When SIMUL MODE is turned off

The 4K and HD outputs are processed using common settings.
Video1, Video2, Detail, and Color have common ON/OFF settings and setting values.
[Example]
,WLVXVHGZKHQERWK.DQG+'RXWSXWVDUHRSHUDWHGLQ%7 *DPPD&RORUVSDFH
6HWWLQJWKH&$0(5$0(18
MATRIX1 : BT.709 SIMUL MODE(E) : OFF
2&3 >9LGHR@ *DPPDĺ0RGH1256WHS

>&RORU@ 0DWUL[ĺ0DWUL[6HOHFW
[Operating method]
2QWKH9LGHRVFUHHQFKDQJLQJWKH*DPPD6WHSVHWWLQJYDOXHVFRQWUROVWKH.RXWSXWDQGWKH+'RXWSXWVLPXOWDQHRXVO\
- On the Detail screen, the 4K output and the HD output are simultaneously controlled.
- On the Color screen, the 4K output and the HD output are simultaneously controlled.
- Controlling the SML Video, SML Detail, and SML Color items is not possible.
180 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ When SIMUL MODE is NORMAL

For the control items of Detail and Color, individual setting and control is possible for the 4K output and the HD output.
The ON/OFF setting and the setting values for Video1 and Video2 are common.
Controlling the SML Video item is not possible.
The setup values of the Detail and Color screens apply to the 4K output. The setup values of the SML Detail and SML Color
VFUHHQVDUHUHÀHFWHGWRWKH+'RXWSXWVLGH
[Example]
.RXWSXW *DPPD%7&RORUVSDFH%7
+'RXWSXW *DPPD%7&RORUVSDFH%7
Reference) The monitor to display the 4K output must support Color space BT.2020.
$PRQLWRUZLWKRXWVXSSRUWFDQQRWUHSURGXFHFRORUVIDLWKIXOO\
MATRIX1 : BT.709 SIMUL MODE(E) : NORMAL

MATRIX2: BT.2020
2&3 >9LGHR@*DPPDĺ0RGH1256WHS
>&RORU@0DWUL[ĺ0DWUL[6HOHFW .V\VWHPVLGH
>60/&RORU@ 0DWUL[ĺ0DWUL[6HOHFW +'V\VWHPVLGH
7

[Operating method]
2QWKH9LGHRVFUHHQFKDQJLQJWKH*DPPD6WHSVHWWLQJYDOXHVFRQWUROVWKH.RXWSXWDQGWKH+'RXWSXWVLPXOWDQHRXVO\
- On the Detail screen, the 4K output and the HD output is simultaneously controlled.
- On the SML Detail screen, the HD output is controlled.
- On the Color screen, the 4K output and the HD output is simultaneously controlled.
- On the SML Color screen, the HD output is controlled.
- Controlling the SML Video is not possible.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 181

■ When SIMUL MODE is INDEP GAMMA

For the control items of Detail and Color, individual setting and control is possible for the 4K output and the HD output.
)RUWKH+'RXWSXWV\VWHPLQGLYLGXDOVHWWLQJDQGFRQWURORI60/.QHH60/:KLWH&OLS60/*DLQ60/*DPPDDQG60/3HG
are possible on the SML Video page.
2QWKH9LGHRDQG9LGHRSDJHVLQGLYLGXDOFRQWURORIWKH.RXWSXWLVFRQGXFWHGIRU0DVWHU*DLQ0DVWHU*DPPD6WHS
*DPPD0DVWHU3HG:KLWH&OLS7RWDO.QHH3RLQW6ORSHDQG6PRRWK.QHH+RZHYHUWKH5*%*$,13(')/$5(HWFDUH
simultaneously controlled for the 4K output and the HD output.
LPXOWDQHRXVO\WKH.RXWSXWFDQEHRXWSXWWHGLQ+'5 +/* DQG%7FRORUJDPXWVHWXSDQGWKH+'RXWSXWFDQEHRXWSXWLQ

6
SDR, BT.709 setup suitable for current broadcasting.
[Example]
.RXWSXW %7 +'5+/* &RORUVSDFH%7
+'RXWSXW %7 6'5 &RORUVSDFH%7
5HIHUHQFH 7KHPRQLWRUWRGLVSOD\.RXWSXWPXVWVXSSRUW+'5 +/* DQG&RORUVSDFH%7
$PRQLWRUZLWKRXWVXSSRUWFDQQRWUHSURGXFHWKHEULJKWQHVVDQGFRORUVIDLWKIXOO\
MATRIX1 : BT.709 SIMUL MODE(E) : INDEP GAMMA

MATRIX2: BT.2020
2&3 >9LGHR@ *DPPDĺ0RGH&670 +/* 6WHS21

,I+/*LVDVVLJQHGWR&86720*$00$
>&RORU@ 0DWUL[ĺ0DWUL[6HOHFW .V\VWHPVLGH
>60/&RORU@ 0DWUL[ĺ0DWUL[6HOHFW +'V\VWHPVLGH
182 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

[Operating method]
$IWHUDGMXVWLQJWKH.RXWSXWWKH+'RXWSXWLVDGMXVWHGXVLQJWKH60/9LGHR60/'HWDLODQG60/&RORULWHPV
)XQFWLRQVDOORFDWHGWRWKH2&3XVHGGXULQJVWDQGDUGRSHUDWLRQ 5*%*$,15*%)/$5(5*%3('DQG0$67(53(' DUH
controlled for both the 4K output and the HD output. Therefore, individual settings are not necessary.
- When focusing on the HDR image, it is more effective to increase the incident light by opening the IRIS slightly more than usual.
However, image with standard dynamic range will tend to have over-exposure.
HDR image SDR image
,QWKLVFDVH\RXFDQUHSURGXFHDQDSSURSULDWHYLGHROHYHODQGUHGXFHWKHRYHUH[SRVXUHE\DGMXVWLQJWKH60/*DLQDQG60/.QHH
for the SDR video.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 183

>:KHQWKH$+' $XWR+XH'HWHFW IXQFWLRQLVXVHG@

$IXQFWLRQWRDXWRPDWLFDOO\GHWHFWWKHKXHZKLFKLVWKHWDUJHWIRUWKH6.,1721('7/&2/25'7/DQG&86720&2/25
IXQFWLRQVLVFDOOHG$+' $XWR+XH'HWHFW
2QWKH&&830287387D]HEUDSDWWHUQLVVXSHULPSRVHGRQWKHWDUJHWKXHWKDWLVDXWRPDWLFDOO\GHWHFWHG
,QWKLVFDVHWKH30287387LQGLFDWHVWKHLPDJHRXWSXWRIWKH+'V\VWHP7KHUHIRUHWKH]HEUDSDWWHUQLQGLFDWHVWKHGHWHFWHGKXH
of the HD output system (SML).
When SIMUL MODE is OFF, the 4K system becomes equal to the HD system. Therefore, hue selection of both systems become
the same.
:KHQ6,08/02'(LVVHWWR1250$/RU,1'(3*$00$DQGZKHQGLIIHUHQWFRORUJDPXWVDUHVHWIRUWKH.RXWSXWDQGWKH
+'RXWSXWWKHWDUJHWKXHPLJKWEHFRPHGLIIHUHQW,QWKDWFDVHFKHFNDQG¿QHDGMXVWWKHGHWHFWHGKXHE\IROORZLQJWKLVSURFHGXUH
7XUQRIIWKH6,08/02'(RI&$0(5$0(18
0RQLWRUWKH&&830287387YLGHRDQGSHUIRUP$+'WRGHWHFWWKHKXHRIWKHWDUJHWREMHFW
&KHFNWKH]HEUDSDWWHUQWRVHHLIWKHWDUJHWKXHLVGHWHFWHGSURSHUO\0DNH¿QHDGMXVWPHQWVRI+8(LIQHFHVVDU\7KHWDUJHWKXHLV
WKHVDPHEHFDXVHWKH.V\VWHPDQGWKH+'V\VWHPKDYHWKHVDPHGHWHFWLRQV\VWHP7KH.RXWSXWLVQRZRSWLPL]HG
5HWXUQWKH6,08/02'(RIWKH&$0(5$0(18WR1250$/RU,1'(3*$00$
,QGLFDWHWKH]HEUDSDWWHUQRQWKH&&830287387DQGFKHFNWKHGHWHFWHGKXHRIWKH+'RXWSXWV\VWHP,IQHFHVVDU\PDQXDOO\
DGMXVWWKH+8(RUH[HFXWH$+'WRRSWLPL]HWKH+'RXWSXW
$WWKLVWLPHWKH.V\VWHPDQGWKH+'V\VWHPDUHLQGLYLGXDOO\H[HFXWLQJWKHLPDJHSURFHVVLQJ7KHUHIRUHWKHVHWWLQJVRI+'
system (SML side) do not affect the 4K system.
184 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

Simultaneous operation during HD double speed output

This camera system supports HD double speed output as standard.
Ɣ7KHIROORZLQJ¿JXUHVKRZVWKHYLGHRRXWSXWZKHQWKH³+'6,08/´RSWLRQLVQRWLPSOHPHQWHGLQWKH&&8
HD double speed behaviour for the standard configuration
The double speed output or normal speed output can be selected for the output of SDI OUTPUT-1 or SDI OUTPUT-2. The double
VSHHGRXWSXWIRUWKLVFDVHLV[3URJUHVVLYHVFDQ*6','8$//,1.IRUPDWDQGWKHQRUPDOVSHHGRXWSXWLV[
3URJUHVVLYHVFDQ*6',IRUPDW
Example of output assignment)

SDI OUTPUT-1 SDI OUTPUT-2
Image size Freq. Scan MAPPING Image size Freq. Scan MAPPING
1920x1080 119.88 Progressive EVS DL 1920x1080 119.88 Progressive EVS DL

Multicam
LSM
3G LVL-A 59.94 Progressive 3G LVL-A
59.94 Progressive 3G LVL-B

1920x1080 100.00 Progressive EVS DL 1920x1080 100.00 Progressive EVS DL
Multicam
LSM
50.00 Progressive 3G LVL-A
3G LVL-A
50.00 Progressive 3G LVL-B
7
* The compatible device with connection for the double speed output the EVS EVS PRODUCTION SERVER XT-3.

“EVS” and “XT-3” are registered trademarks of EVS, Belgium.
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
GbE TRK VP_OUT
LINK-A LINK-B LINK-A LINK-B

Double speed 3G Dual Link SDI Normal speed 3G-SDI
(Progressive) (Progressive)
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 185

Ɣ7KHIROORZLQJ¿JXUHVKRZVWKHYLGHRRXWSXWZKHQWKH³+'6,08/´RSWLRQLVLPSOHPHQWHGLQWKH&&8
HD double speed behaviour when the SIMUL option is implemented
Selecting the double speed output or the normal speed output is possible for the SDI OUTPUT-1 and SDI OUTPUT-2 output,
DQGVHOHFWWKHQRUPDOVSHHGRXWSXWIRUWKH6',2XWSXWDQG6',2XWSXW$WWKLVWLPHWKHGRXEOHVSHHGRXWSXWLV[
3URJUHVVLYHVFDQLQ*6','8$//,1.IRUPDWDQGWKHQRUPDOVSHHGRXWSXWLV[3URJUHVVLYHVFDQLQ*6',RU
[,QWHUODFHVFDQLQ*6',RU*6',
Example of output assignment)

SDI OUTPUT-1/2 SDI OUTPUT-3/4
Image size Freq. Scan MAPPING Image size Freq. Scan MAPPING
1920x1080 119.88 Progressive EVS DL 1920x1080 59.94 Progressive 3G LVL-A

Multicam
LSM
3G LVL-A Progressive 3G LVL-B
Interlace 3G LVL-A
Interlace 3G LVL-B
Interlace HD-SDI
1920x1080 100.00 Progressive EVS DL 1920x1080 50.00 Progressive 3G LVL-A
Multicam
LSM
3G LVL-A Progressive 3G LVL-B
Interlace 3G LVL-A
Interlace 3G LVL-B
Interlace HD-SDI
* The compatible device with connection for the double speed output is the EVS PRODUCTION SERVER XT-3.
“EVS” and “XT-3” are registered trademarks of EVS, Belgium.
3URJUHVVLYH*/9/$%LV<&E&U,QWHUODFH*/9/$%LV5*%
186 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

When conventional interlace double speed output is played in slow motion, vertical interpolation is used to remove the vertical
jitter, but with deterioration of resolution due to the Four Line Filter process. However, with progressive double speed, there is no
deterioration of resolution and smooth video can be played in slow motion.
Normal speed 3G/HD-SDI Normal speed 3G/HD-SDI

(Progressive/Interlace) (Progressive/Interlace)
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
HD_OUT
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
GbE TRK VP_OUT
LINK-A LINK-B LINK-A LINK-B LINK-A LINK-B LINK-A LINK-B

Double speed 3G Dual Link SDI Double speed 3G Dual Link SDI
(Progressive) (Progressive)
7KHIROORZLQJLVWKHVSHFL¿FDWLRQRIHDFK/,1.VLJQDOLQWKHGRXEOHVSHHG'XDO/LQNPRGH
/,1.$ VWIUDPH [3URJUHVVLYH*6',/HYHO$
/,1.% QGIUDPH [3URJUHVVLYH*6',/HYHO$
7KHIROORZLQJLVDQH[DPSOHRIWKHGRXEOHVSHHG'8$//,1.VHWWLQJRIWKH(96;7
6(59(57$%
)LHOGUDWH +]RU+]
Resolution 1080p
&+$11(/67$%
%DVH&RQ¿J 0XOWLFDP/60
3D
*'XDO
No
*/HYHO$
7
7KH(96VHWXSIRUGRXEOHVSHHG'8$//,1.PD\EHGLIIHUHQWGHSHQGLQJRQWKHYHUVLRQRIWKH;73OHDVHFRQWDFW(96IRUWKH

latest setup information.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 187

7.10 12G SDI option
7.10 12G SDI option

Overview and implementation requirements
$OOWKRVH6',UDWHVRI+'6',*6',*6',FDQEHVXSSRUWHGE\,PSOHPHQWLQJWKH³*287´RSWLRQLQWRWKH&&8<RX
FDQDOVREXLOGDÀH[LEOHV\VWHPVLQFH.*6',DQG*6',48$'/,1.FDQEHRXWSXWVLPXOWDQHRXVO\
HD VIDEO
HD_SIMUL OPTION
(D/C, C/O) HD
*** CAMERA
1 2
SDI-OUTPUT-1
3 4 1 2
SDI-OUTPUT-2
3 4
HD_OUT
3G/HD-SDI
1 2 3 4 1 2 4
GbE TRK VP_OUT
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
RET_MON
MPU
4K VIDEO 4K VIDEO
4K 4K
12G-SDI 3G-SDI
Single Quad Link
Example of system configuration

In the above example, “HD SIMUL” option is also implemented at the same time.
7KHUHDUPRGXOH>93B287@RI&&8LVUHSODFHGZLWK>*B287@ZKHQWKH³*287´RSWLRQLVLPSOHPHQWHG
12G_OUT
module 1 2
SDI-OUTPUT-1
3 4 1 2
SDI-OUTPUT-2
3 4
GbE TRK 12G_OUT
*** CAMERA
1 2 3 4 1 2 4
GbE TRK VP_OUT
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
RET_MON
MPU
188 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

7.10 12G SDI option
Caution
Insertion/removal method of the rear-side module
When installing an option module, consult with our engineer or the sales agency's engineer. If the customer installs a module on his
own, please fully understand that there is a risk of module damage and take the following procedure.
Do not touch the printed board and individual components of the module.
[Preparation] Discharge any static electricity in your body and wear a grounding wrist band.
1 Turn off the main power of the CCU.
2 Remove the cover on the front side of the CCU.
①
3 Remove the module retainer from the CCU.
4 Pull the card puller of the TRX_VP module toward

you and release the locks at the same time. Be
sure not to pinch the yellow optical fibers on the
left side.
7
5 Pull the TRX_VP module about 5cm toward you.

④
①
④
① ①
⑤
6 Remove the screws fixing the VP_OUT module on

the back side of the CCU to take the module away
from CCU.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 189

7.10 12G SDI option
7 Insert the 12G_OUT module and fix it to CCU.
8 Insert the TRX_VP module into the CCU. Be sure

not to pinch the yellow optical fiber on the left side.
9 Install the front cover after installing the module

retainer to the CCU.
⑨
①
⑧
①
Turn on the main power of CCU. Open the CCU MENU and check if the OPTION is enabled.
If 12G_OUT is set to ENABLE, the optional module should be

INFORMATION → OPTION
recognized and the functions are enabled.
190 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

7.10 12G SDI option
Assigning video outputs

7KLVVHFWLRQH[SODLQVWKHYLGHRRXWSXWDVVLJQPHQWZKHQWKH³*287´RSWLRQLVLPSOHPHQWHG
*6',RXWSXWIRUPDW6037(67FRPSDWLEOH
67 *EV6LJQDO'DWD6HULDO,QWHUIDFH(OHFWULFDO
67 OLQH6RXUFH,PDJHDQG$QFLOODU\'DWD0DSSLQJIRU*6',
IMAGE SIZE FREQ&SCAN SAMPLING
3URJUHVVLYH <&E&U
3URJUHVVLYH <&E&U
3URJUHVVLYH 5*%

3840×2160
3URJUHVVLYH 5*%
24.00 Progressive 5*%
23.98 Progressive 5*%
2QO\ZKHQ[*6',/HYHO$LVVHOHFWHGIRUWKH287)250$7LQWKH&&80(18WKH*6',RXWSXWVHWWLQJ
becomes available.
.*6',48$'/,1.RU*6',RXWSXWFDQEHDVVLJQHGVHSDUDWHO\WRWKH6',287387DQGWKH6',287387
respectively.
:KHQ*6',LVVHOHFWHGIRURQHV\VWHPDQG48$'/,1.RXWSXWLVDOORFDWHGWRRWKHUV\VWHP48$'/,1.RXWSXWEHFRPHV
*6',/HYHO$6,IRUPDW
Ɣ:KHQ*6',LVDVVLJQHGWRERWK6',287387DQG6',287387
12G-SDI 4x 12G-SDI 4x 7
Ɣ:KHQ*6',LVDVVLJQHGWR6',287387DQG48$'/,1.LVDVVLJQHGWR6',287387

3G-SDI QUAD LINK 4x
12G-SDI 4x
(Level-A 2SI)
Ɣ:KHQ48$'/,1.LVDVVLJQHGWR6',287387DQG*6',LVDVVLJQHGWR6',287387
3G-SDI QUAD LINK 4x

12G-SDI 4x
(Level-A 2SI)
Ɣ:KHQ48$'/,1.LVDVVLJQHGWRERWK6',287387DQG6',287387
QUAD LINK 4x QUAD LINK 4x

(3G Level-A/B, 2SI/SQD or HD Quad Link SQD)
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 191

7.10 12G SDI option
How to assign outputs from the CCU MENU

The assignment for SDI OUTPUT-1 and SDI OUTPUT-2 is performed from the CCU MENU.
&&80(18ĺ6<67(06(77,1* ĺ287)250$7
*6',LVGLVSOD\HGDVRQHRIRSWLRQVIRU.287387DQGFDQEHVHOHFWHGRQO\ZKHQ,0$*(6,=()5(4 6&$1
6$03/,1*DQG0$33,1*VXLWDEOHIRU6',RXWSXWDUHVHOHFWHG
,QWKHDERYHFDVHWKH.*6',VLJQDORXWSXWRI+]3URJUHVVLYHLVDVVLJQHGWR6',287387
The assignment to SDI OUTPUT-2 is performed from CCU MENU in the same manner.
&&80(18ĺ6<67(06(77,1* ĺ287)250$7
,IWKH6(77,1*LWHPLV³6$0($6287´WKHIRUPDWLVWKHVDPHDVWKHIRUPDWVHWLQ287)250$77KH,0$*(6,=(
)5(4 6&$16$03/,1*0$33,1*DQG.287387LWHPVFDQQRWEHVHOHFWHG
,IWKH6(77,1*LWHPLV³,1',9,'8$/´\RXFDQVHOHFWWKHLWHPVWKDWFDQEHFKDQJHG,QWKLVH[DPSOH³*4/6,´DQG³*6',´
FDQEHVHOHFWHGIRUWKH.287387,0$*(6,=()5(4 6&$16$03/,1*DQG0$33,1*FDQQRWEHFKDQJHG
*6',LVVHOHFWHGZKHQWKH.48$'/,1. 33V)IRUPDW LVRXWSXWE\*+'6',VLJQDOVKRZHYHULWLVQRWVXSSRUWHGE\

WKLVV\VWHPEHFDXVH+'48$'/,1.GRHVQRWFRPSO\ZLWK6037(VWDQGDUGV.48$'/,1.E\*+'6',VLJQDOVLV
Square Division for the output.
192 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

7.10 12G SDI option
Combined application with HD SIMUL option

³*287´RSWLRQFDQEHFRQFXUUHQWO\XVHGZLWKWKH³+'6,08/´RSWLRQ
Please refer to the following table for the combinations that can be output during the implementation of each optional module.
4K 4K HD HD Simultaneous Simultaneous
48$'/,1. *6',+' DOWN-CONV CUTOUT output of HD D/ output of 4K and
C and C/O HD
$ &&8
430 standard 䃺䃺
FRQ¿JXUDWLRQ
(B) HD SIMUL
optional 䃺䃺䃺䃺䃺
implementation
$ *
OUT module 䃺䃺䃺
implementation
(B) +
*B287
䃺䃺䃺䃺䃺䃺
module
implementation
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 193

7.10 12G SDI option
12G-SDI coaxial cable and BNC connector

:KHQFRQYHQWLRQDOFRD[LDOFDEOHDWWDFKHGZLWK%1&FRQQHFWRUVLVXVHGWKHDWWHQXDWLRQDQGWKHLQVHUWLRQORVVRIWKH*6',
VLJQDO WUDQVPLVVLRQUDWHLVIRXUWLPHVIDVWHUWKDQ* FDQQRWEHVDWLV¿HG
For the attenuation on improvement of approximately 20 dB when compared with the conventional value is required. For the return
loss, satisfying SMPTE2082-1 regulation is required.
7KHVLJQDOVFDQEHWUDQVPLWWHGIRUDVKRUWGLVWDQFHHYHQLIDFRQYHQWLRQDO*6',VXSSRUWHGFRD[LDOFDEOHLVXVHG%XWSD\DWWHQWLRQ
WRWKHTXDOLW\DQGGHWHULRUDWLRQRIWKHFDEOH7KHVLJQDOVPLJKWEHWUDQVPLWWHGE\*6',ZLWKRXWDQ\SUREOHP+RZHYHULIPLJKW
QRWEHWUDQVPLWWHGDWDOOE\*6',HVSHFLDOO\ZKHQWKHUHLVGHWHULRUDWLRQRUFULPSLQJIDLOXUHLQWKHVKLHOG
&XUUHQWO\FRD[LDOFDEOHVDQG%1&FRQQHFWRUVZKLFKFRUUHVSRQGWR*6',WUDQVPLVVLRQDUHVROGRUWKHLUSURWRW\SHVDUHUHOHDVHG
IURPVHYHUDOPDNHUV7KH\DUHGHYHORSHGIRUWKHSXUSRVHRIWUDQVPLWWLQJ*6',VLJQDODQGWKHLUIHDWXUHVDUHRSWLPL]HG
,QDGGLWLRQLIDUHOD\DGDSWHU MDFNWRMDFN QRWFRUUHVSRQGLQJZLWK*6',LVXVHGZKHQH[WHQGLQJWKHFDEOHWKHVLJQDOTXDOLW\
may severely deteriorate.
+HQFHGHVLJQWKHV\VWHPXVLQJ*6',VXSSRUWHGFDEOHVDQGFRQQHFWRUVZKHQ\RXFRQ¿JXUHD*6',V\VWHP
The figure on the left shows an example
of the frequency and attenuation of 75Ω
coaxial cable.
The cable property is different depending
on cable manufacturers, so select the type
suitable for your purpose.
Moreover, the total performance of the

coaxial cable assembled with BNC
connectors is important.
194 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

7.10 12G SDI option
Transmission distance
7KHFDEOHWUDQVPLVVLRQGLVWDQFHRI*6',LVQRWVSHFL¿HGLQWKH6037(67VWDQGDUG7KLVRSWLRQDOPRGXOHLVRQWKHVLJQDO
VHQGHUVLGHVRLWPXVWFRPSO\ZLWKWKHVSHFL¿FDWLRQRIWKH6',SK\VLFDOOD\HULQ6037(
6037(67*EV6LJQDO'DWD6HULDO,QWHUIDFH²(OHFWULFDO
$PHQGPHQW
3HDNWR3HDN$PSOLWXGH
P9
'&RIIVHW
99
2YHUVKRRWRI5LVLQJ(GJH
8SWR
2YHUVKRRWRI)DOOLQJ(GJH
8SWR
5LVH7LPH)DOO7LPH
8SWRSV
Rise/Fall Mismatch Up to 18ps
Timing Jitter Up to 8UI (674ps)
$OLJQPHQW-LWWHU 8SWR8, SV
Return Loss
Frequency Value
)WR) 0WR*+] G%

)WR) *WR*+] -10 dB
)WR) *WR*+] -7 dB
)WR) *WR*+] -4 dB
7KHFRQGLWLRQVIRUPHDVXUHPHQWDUHVSHFL¿HGDVDFRD[LDOFDEOHOHQJWKRIPDQGFRORUEDUVLJQDOIRUWKHYLGHRVRXUFH
,IWKHGHYLFHWKDWVHQGVRXWVLJQDOVVDWLV¿HVWKHDERYHVSHFL¿FDWLRQWKHPD[LPXPWUDQVPLWWDEOHFDEOHOHQJWKLVGHWHUPLQHGE\WKH
following two points.
Ɣ7KHSURSHUWLHVRIWKH6',FDEOHHTXDOL]HUUHWXUQORVVDQGLQVHUWLRQORVVRQWKHUHFHLYHUVLGH
Ɣ7KHSURSHUWLHVRIWKHFRD[LDOFDEOHZLWK%1&FRQQHFWRUVXVHGIRUWUDQVPLVVLRQ 7
+HQFHWKHPD[LPXPWUDQVPLWWDEOHFDEOHOHQJWKLVQRWGH¿QHGLQWKHVSHFL¿FDWLRQRIWKLVGHYLFH
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 195

7.10 12G SDI option
7KHFKDQJHLQ*6',VLJQDOUHFHSWLRQZDYHIRUPE\WKHOHQJWKDQGTXDOLW\RIWKHFDEOH
Serial digital signal waveform when 12G-SDI is

successfully received on the receiver side.
*6',
EYE aperture is not enough.
Serial digital signal waveform when the transmission

distance extends or when the cable quality has a problem.
Because the reception level decreases, the EYE aperture
becomes smaller, and the waveform rise/fall time increases,
there is a possibility of failing the normal reception.
However, the conditions are corrected by the cable equalizer
at the reception device side, and thus the signals often can
be received normally.
Serial digital signal waveform when the transmission

distance is expanded, or there is a significant problem in the
quality of the cable.
In this case, the EYE aperture cannot be identified and it is

almost impossible to receive it as a serial digital signal.
196 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

TROUBLE SHOOTING 8
and MAINTENANCE
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)
8.1 Alarm Lamp on the OCP or MCP Flashes ON and OFF

The CCU-480 is equipped with a self diagnostic function which monitors whether the CCU and camera are running normal. This
function is activated at the same time as the power of CCU is turned on and always active during the operation.
,IDEQRUPDOLWLHVRFFXULQWKH&&8RUFDPHUDWKH\DUHLPPHGLDWHO\GHWHFWHGE\WKHVHOIGLDJQRVLVIXQFWLRQDQGFDXVHWKH$/$50
LQGLFDWRURQWKHFRQWUROSDQHOWRÀDVK$WWKLVWLPHWKHGLDJQRVWLFLQIRUPDWLRQWKDWVSHFL¿HVWKHVLWHRIDEQRUPDOLW\RQWKHSLFWXUH
monitor.
Note:
(YHQLIWKH$/$50LQGLFDWRUGRHVQRWÀDVK\RXFDQFKHFNZKHWKHUWKH&&8DQGFDPHUDDUHUXQQLQJQRUPDOE\SUHVVLQJWKH30,1'
3$*(VZLWFKRQWKHFRQWUROSDQHOWZLFHWRGLVSOD\WKHVHOIGLDJQRVWLFLQIRUPDWLRQRQWKH3LFWXUH0RQLWRU
OCP-300 MCP-300
PM IND/PAGE
button
ALARM
indicator
CCU Self Diagnostic Information

8
■ Self Diagnostic Information Screen
TROUBLE SHOOTING and MAINTENANCE

The following is the Self Diagnostic Information Screen of the CCU.

',$*1267,&,1)250$7,21 >8+.0@
,WHP-XGJHPHQW,WP-XGJHPHQW

21
&DPHUD32:(5 Diagnosed item
&DPHUD)DQ
$872)$67&&8)DQ2.
2.&&87HPS2.
&DPHUD7HPS Diagnosis result
&DPHUD%DWWHU\
2.&&8%XWWHU\2.
&DPHUD0HPRU\
2.&&80HPRU\2.

&&8㸼㸼㸼&DPHUD&DPHUD㸼㸼㸼&&8
237/9/႑႑႑႑႑႑႑႑႑႑႑႑2.237/9/႑႑႑႑႑႑႑႑႑႑႑႑2.
6',6WDWXV2.6',67$7862.
&RPP6WDWXV2.&RPP6WDWXV2.

&DEOH&RQQFWLRQ2.*HQORFN,17
6DIHW\6LJQDO2.
&DPHUD,'2.9LGHR)RUPDW
.*/9/$
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 199

■ List of Self Diagnostic Information

7KHIROORZLQJWDEOHVOLVWWKHVHOIGLDJQRVWLFLQIRUPDWLRQIRUWKHVWDQGDUGVSHFL¿FDWLRQ
List of Self Diagnostic Information

Diagnosed Item Description Diagnosis Result Meaning
Camera Power Power status of the camera ON The camera is powered ON.
OFF The camera is powered OFF.
Camera Fan Rotating status of fan of the camera AUTO SSLOW Super-slow in auto mode
AUTO SLOW Slow in auto mode
AUTO NOR Normal in auto mode
AUTO FAST Fast in auto mode
FAST Fast in manual mode
NG Fan has stop.
Camera Temp Internal temperature of the camera OK Normal
NG The internal temperature is abnormally.
Camera Battery Status of the battery in the MPROC OK Normal

module of the camera
NG The backup battery voltage is low.
Camera Memory Status of the RAM in the MPU module OK Normal
of the camera
NG Data in the module is abnormally.
CCU Fan Rotating status of the fans on the rear OK Normal
and inside of the CCU
NG Internal cooling fan either has stopped.
CCU Temp Internal temperature of the CCU OK Normal
NG The internal temperature is abnormally.
CCU Battery Status of the battery in the CCU MPU OK Normal
module and TRX_VP module
NG The backup battery voltage is low.
CCU Memory Status of the RAM in the CCU MPU OK Normal
module and TRX_VP module
NG Data in the module is destroyed.
CCU >>> OPT Level Optical signal level sent from the CCU OK Good
Camera to the camera (Detect the optical
(CCU to receiving level at the camera side and ATTEN The amount of light received decreased.
Camera display the status).
transmission) WARN The amount of light received significantly
decreased.
NG Light cannot be received.
SDI Status Monitors the data transmission status OK Normal
between CCU and the camera.
NG Detect CRC error
Comm Status Status of the command signal sent OK Normal
from the CCU to the camera
NG No command signals are sent, or a CPU error
occurs.
Camera >>> OPT Level Optical signal level sent from the OK Good
CCU camera to the CCU (Detect the optical
(Camera receiving level at the CCU side and ATTEN The amount of light received decreased.
to CCU display the status).
transmission) WARN The amount of light received significantly
decreased.
NG Light cannot be received.
SDI Status Monitors the data transmission status OK Normal
between CCU and the camera.
NG Detect CRC error
Comm Status Status of the command signal sent OK Normal
from the camera to the CCU
NG No command signals are sent, or a CPU error
occurs.
200 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

Diagnosed Item Description Diagnosis Result Meaning

Cable Connection Optical fiber composite camera OK Normal
cable connection status between the OPEN Cable is not connected, or there is an open.
camera and the CCU
SHORT A short circuit occurs in the cable.
Safety signal Status of the safety signal sent from OK Normal
the camera to the CCU
NG The safety signal is not received, or the
connected camera is not supported by this
CCU.
Camera ID Status of the model identification OK Normal
signal sent from the camera to the
CCU NG The model identification signal is not received,
or the connected camera is not supported by
this CCU.
Genlock Status of external SYNC signal INT No external SYNC signals are input (operation
is performed with internal SYNC signals.)
Internal mode
1080P59 When external SYNC signal is 1080P59.94
1080I59 When external SYNC signal is 1080i59.94
1080P23SF When external SYNC signal is 1080P23.98SF
1080P50 When external SYNC signal is 1080P50
1080I50 When external SYNC signal is 1080i50
UNKNOWN External synchronization signals have been
input, but cannot be identified.
Note:
V)VHJPHQWHG)UDPH
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 201

8.2 Indicator on the Front of CCU Lights
8.2 Indicator on the Front of CCU Lights

CABLE STATUS INDICATOR
OPTICAL LEVEL INDICATOR
ALARM INDICATOR
CCU INDICATOR

CAM
CCU
GENLOCK APC SDI
AC line fuses 400VT5A for transmitting
power to the camera
POWER
PHONE
ON
MIC PRV OPE
POWER INDICATOR
OFF
PTT
COM OFF
USB
INIT/PM CALL
■ When the OPTICAL LEVEL (OPTICAL RX LEVEL) indicator yellow or red lights
,QGLFDWRUVQH[WWR&$0LQGLFDWHWKHUHFHSWLRQVWDWXVRQWKHFDPHUDVLGHDQGLQGLFDWRUVQH[WWR&&8LQGLFDWHWKHUHFHSWLRQ
status on the CCU side.
Cause Action
The optical connector must be dirty. Clean the optical connector end of the cable or the equipment side.
The lighting state of the OPTICAL RX LEVEL indicator changes.
■ When the (CABLE) OPEN indicator lights

Cause Action
The (CABLE STATUS INDICATOR) OPEN indicator lights when the Check if the camera cable is properly connected or there is no open.
camera cable is not connected or there is an open. If there is an open, replace the camera cable with a new one.
■ When the (CABLE) SHORT indicator lights

Cause Action
SHORT indicator (CABLE status indicator) lights up when the fiber Make sure the fiber cable is not damaged and the connector mating
cable is damaged or grounded due to water drops, etc. part is not wet with water drops.If the optical connector is wet, dry it
and then clean it.
■ When the FAN ALARM indicator lights

Cause Action
FAN ALARM indicator will light when the fan is in internal CCU has Check if the fans are normal.
stopped. If any of the fans is abnormal or the lifetime of the fan expires, replace
it with a new one.
■ When the TEMP indicator lights

Cause Action
The TEMP indicator lights when the CCU internal temperature is When this indicator lights on, check that the ventilation hole on the
abnormally high. front panel and the exhaust hole on the rear panel are not covered or
If the TEMP alarm is on and the operation is kept continued, causing clogged with dust. Avoid a place with direct sunlight.
the temperature increase even more, the warning is made with buzzer
sounds.
Caution:
,I)$1$/$50DQG7(03$/$50ZDUQLQJVDUHLJQRUHGDQGWKHRSHUDWLRQLVNHSWFRQWLQXHGLWPD\FDXVHVKXWGRZQRIWKH
power supply of the device, damage to the module, and other serious failure due to heat generation. Please stop the operation
immediately.
202 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

8.3 "TEMP!!" or "FAN!!" Displays on the VF Screen
8.3 “TEMP!!” or “FAN!!” Displays on the VF Screen

:KHQWKHWHPSHUDWXUHLQVLGHWKHFDPHUDLQFUHDVHVDEQRUPDOO\DZDUQLQJLQGLFDWLQJDQDEQRUPDOWHPSHUDWXUHULVHÀDVKHVRQWKH
YLHZ¿QGHUVFUHHQ
ＴＥＭＰ!!
Status Cause Action

The camera is exposed to direct sunlight for many Put a sunshade cover on the camera to avoid direct
TEMP!! flashing hours. sunlight.
The camera is used near some heating appliance. Move the position of the camera or heating appliance.
,IDIDQVWRSVGXHWRVRPHIDLOXUHDZDUQLQJLQGLFDWLQJDQLUUHJXODUIDQVWRSÀDVKHVRQWKHYLHZ¿QGHUVFUHHQ
ＦＡＮ!!
Status Cause Action

(1) Foreign substance is entered in the wings of FAN,
preventing it from rotating → Remove the foreign
FAN!! flashing The rotation of fan is slow or stopped.
substance.
(2) If FAN is broken. Replacement is necessary. *2
8

Caution:
,I)$1QHHGVWREHUHSODFHGSOHDVHFRQWDFWWRRXUVHUYLFHFHQWHURUVDOHVUHSUHVHQWDWLYHV
Note:
The cooling fan is installed to prevent the temperature inside the camera from increasing.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 203

8.4 Initializing the Settings of this Product

7KHIROORZLQJWZRFDVHVDUHDYDLODEOHIRULQLWLDOL]LQJWKHVHWWLQJRIWKLVSURGXFW
(1) Initializes the camera back to the user setting (ENGINEER SET FILE).
7KLVLQLWLDOL]HVWKHFDPHUDEDFNWRWKHVWDWHVHWE\XVHUHQJLQHHULQDGYDQFHLQUHVSRQVHWRWKHHQYLURQPHQWDQGWKHVKRRWLQJ
conditions.
,QLWLDOL]HVWKHFDPHUDEDFNWRWKHLQLWLDOIDFWRU\VHWWLQJ )$&725<6(7),/(
7KLVLQLWLDOL]HVWKHFDPHUDEDFNWRWKHLQLWLDOIDFWRU\VHWWLQJ
Use the Menu screen to change the settings. The setting method is described below.
Set Value Description
FILE SELECT ENGINEER (default) Initializes the state back to the user setting.
FACTORY Initializes the state back to the initial factory setting.
LOAD START READY (default) The state before initialization
START Starts initialization.
CANCEL Cancels initialization.
■ Initialization of the Camera

1 Turn the menu operation knob in the MAIN
7230(18
MENU (TOP MENU) to move the cursor to "FILE 㼁㻿㻮
OPERATION". Then press the ENTER button to 86(50(18

display the sub menu. 0$5.(5&+$5
)2&86$66,67
,17(5&20$8',2
9,'(2,2
/(16
)81&7,216:
9,'(2$'-8670(17
7$//<,1',&$725
)$1&21752/
▲
),/(23(5$7,21
6<67(0
,1)250$7,21
86(50(18&86720
0(1802'(

2 Turn the menu operation knob to position the

),/(23(5$7,21
cursor on “PRESET FILE LOAD”, and press the
㼁㻿㻮
ENTER button. 86%0(025<

▲
35(6(7),/(/2$'
35(6(7),/(6$9( (
3 Turn the menu operation knob to position the

cursor on “FILE SELECT”, and press the ENTER
button. 35(6(7),/(/2$'
㼁㻿㻮

The cursor moves to the mode selection column.
▲
),/(6(/(&7(1*,1(5
/2$'67$57
4 Turn the menu operation knob to select the value
(ENGINEER, FACTRY) to be set, and press the
ENTER button.
7KHYDOXHLVFRQ¿UPHG
204 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

5 The cursor automatically moves to "LOAD START", 35(6(7),/(/2$'

so press the ENTER button. 㼁㻿㻮
$VWKHFXUVRUPRYHVWRWKHPRGHVHWWLQJVWKHGLVSOD\ ),/(6(/(&7(1*,1(5
▲
RIPRGHVHWWLQJYDOXHFKDQJHVIURP5($'<WR /2$'67$57
67$57
,I&$1&(/LVVHOHFWHGZLWKWKHPHQXRSHUDWLRQ
knob, the setting is canceled and "PRESET FILE
/2$'LVHQGHG 35(6(7),/(/2$'
6HOHFWLQJ³67$57´GLVSOD\V³386+6(7!67$57´ 㼁㻿㻮
at the bottom of the screen. ),/(6(/(&7(1*,1(5
▲
*RWR6WHSZKHQVHOHFWLQJ³67$57´ /2$'67$57

6 Press the ENTER button. COMPLETED
,QLWLDOL]DWLRQVWDUWV
:KHQWKH¿OHORDGLVFRPSOHWHG³&203/(7('´
DSSHDUVRQWKHVFUHHQ7KHQ³&$0(5$5(67$57´
EOLQNVIRUDERXWWKUHHVHFRQGV$IWHUWKDWWKHFDPHUD
UHVWDUWVDQGWKHLQLWLDOL]DWLRQLVFRPSOHWHGZLWKWKH¿OH
selected in “FILE SELECT”.
■ Initialization of CCU
Please refer to [Settings of PRESET FILE] under the Section 6.3 "Transition of Menu Screen".
Please refer to the operation manual of your device when performing from OCP or MCP.
Caution:
,WLVQHFHVVDU\WRXQGHUVWDQGWKHIROORZLQJSRLQWVEHIRUHLQLWLDOL]LQJWKLVGHYLFH
,QLWLDOL]DWLRQLVQRWWKHVDPHDV5HVWRUHWRWKHRULJLQDOVHWWLQJV
7KHLQLWLDOL]DWLRQRIWKHHQJLQHHULQJVHWWLQJLWHPVUHVWRUHVWRDFHUWDLQSRLQWLQWLPHEXWWKHFRQWHQWVPD\EHGLIIHUHQWIURP\RXU
wish.
,IWKHFRQGLWLRQVZKHQWKHGDWDLVVDYHGDQGFRQGLWLRQVZKHQWKHVHWWLQJLWHPVDUHLQLWLDOL]HGDUHGLIIHUHQWWKHVHWWLQJVLWHPVPD\
not be as you desired.
(3) Restoring the factory settings may result in losing your settings.
$IWHUXQGHUVWDQGLQJWKHVHSRLQWVLI\RXVWLOOZLVKWRSHUIRUPLQLWLDOL]DWLRQSOHDVHFRQWDFWWRRXUVHUYLFHFHQWHURUVDOHVUHSUHVHQWDWLYHV
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 205

8.5 Cleaning Camera Connectors

■ Cleaning Optical Connectors
7KHFDPHUDFDEOHFRQQHFWLQJWKHFDPHUDDQGWKH&&8WUDQVPLWVRSWLFDOVLJQDOVWKURXJKȝPFRUHJODVV¿EHUV,I)HUUXOHVZKLFK
VHFXUHJODVV¿EHUVDUHGLUW\RUKDYHGXVWRQWKHPWUDQVPLVVLRQORVV RSWLFDOVLJQDODWWHQXDWLRQ RFFXUV,I)HUUXOHVDUHH[WUHPHO\
dirty, optical signals are interrupted and the camera cable may not work properly.
5HJXODUFOHDQLQJRI)HUUXOHVLVVXJJHVWHGLIWKHFDPHUDFRQQHFWRULVIUHTXHQWO\UHPRYHGDQGLQVHUWHG7KH¿JXUHVEHORZVKRZWKH
VKDSHRIWKHFDPHUDFRQQHFWRUMRLQWVHFWLRQORFDWLRQRIWKH)HUUXOHVDQGKRZWRFOHDQWKH)HUUXOHV
Ɣ&DPHUD&RQQHFWRU-RLQW6HFWLRQ
OPS Series 3K Series
Alignment sleeve:
Alignment sleeve
Present only in female
connectors
Screw: Hole only for male
connectors Ferrule Ferrule
Ferrules Top: Present only in
female connectors
Top: Present only in
female connectors
Top Alignment sleeve
Plug (female) Plug (female)
Top Ferrule Ferrule
Jack (male) Ferrule

Jack (male) Ferrule
Plug receptacle Plug receptacle Top Alignment sleeve

(female receptacle) Top (female receptacle)
Ferrule Ferrule
Receptacle Receptacle
(male receptacle) (male receptacle) Ferrule
Ferrule
Ɣ3OXJ-DFNIRU&DPHUD&RQQHFWRUV
Camera
CCU rear
Receptacle
RET-1 RET-2
AES OUT SYNC OUT DATA TRK 1 /MIC
Plug
Jack Plug receptacle
Fiber cable
&OHDQWKHIRXUVHFWLRQVUHFHSWDFOHRQWKHFDPHUDSOXJUHFHSWDFOHRQWKH&&8DQGSOXJMDFNRQERWKHQGVRIWKHFDPHUDFDEOH7KH
cleaning method for male connectors differs from that for female connectors.
206 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ OPS Series Connectors

7KHIROORZLQJH[SODLQVKRZWRFOHDQ)HUUXOHVXVLQJD7DMLPL236VHULHV¿EHUFDEOHSOXJ IHPDOH DVDQH[DPSOH
1 Loosen the screw at the center of the connector Camera connector plug
(female)
with a flat-blade screwdriver or a coin.
Fiber cable
$IWHUWXUQHGRUWXUQVFRXQWHUFORFNZLVHWKHVFUHZ 1 Turn the screw
will come out. The screw is not removed because it is counterclockwise.
attached to the top. Top
Screw
Flat-blade
screwdriver
2 Pull the screw and remove the top from the

connector. Screw Top
2 Pull the screw to remove the top from the connector.
3 Wipe the Ferrule with a cotton swab dampened

with alcohol.
Caution:
- When you wipe the Ferrule, move the cotton swab
straight in a way in which you brush the dust off the Ferrule
Ferrule. Do not wipe back and forth or in a circle.
Doing so may spread the dirt instead of removing it. 3 Wipe with a cotton swab dampened
- Do not carelessly blow your breath on the Ferrule. with alcohol.
Good example Bad example
4 After wiping the Ferrule with alcohol, wipe the
Ferrule with a dry cotton swab.
5 Make sure that the dirt is removed.

Cross section
of Ferrule
Cross section
of Ferrule
Use a loupe to examine the Ferrule.

8

6 If the Ferrule is free from dirt, align the top with the connector guide and put it back in the connector.
Be sure to push the top securely into the connector.
7 Tighten the screw with a flat-blade screwdriver or a coin.
Since the male connector does not have frame, the steps 1, 2 and 6 the above are not necessary.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 207

■ 3K Series Connectors
The following explains how to clean Ferrules using a Lemo 3K series camera cable plug (female) as an example.
CAUTION:
:KHQUHPRYLQJWKHDOLJQPHQWVOHHYHEHVXUHWRXVHDGHGLFDWHGRSWLFDOFRQWDFWH[WUDFWRU '&&/$ $OVRXVHWKHHQGRIWKH
extractor that has an inner thread.
1 Prepare a dedicated extractor and place the extractor in a position parallel to the connector.
2 Remove the cap of section A (with a thread). Section A

Extractor
Thread 2 Remove the cap
3 Insert the extractor into the alignment sleeve and Ferrule Extractor
turn the extractor clockwise 8 to 10 turns until it

stops. When it stops, pull the extractor out straight.
Leave the alignment sleeve attached to the extractor.
Alignment sleeve
Alignment sleeve 3 Insert the extractor into the

alignment sleeve, turn, and
pull out.
4 Wipe the Ferrule with a cotton swab dampened
with alcohol.
CAUTION:
- When you wipe the Ferrule, move the cotton swab
straight in a way in which you brush the dust off the Ferrule
Ferrule. Do not wipe back and forth or in a circle.
Doing so may spread the dirt instead of removing it. 4 Wipe with a cotton swab
- Do not carelessly blow your breath on the Ferrule. dampened with alcohol.
Good example Bad example
5 After wiping the Ferrule with alcohol, wipe the

Cross section
of Ferrule
Cross section
of Ferrule
Ferrule with a dry cotton swab.
6 Make sure that the dirt is removed.

Use a loupe to examine the Ferrule.
7 Wipe the electrical contact and alignment sleeve in the same way.
8 Insert the alignment sleeve into the optical contact until it clicks and turn the extractor counterclockwise 8 to 10
turns.
The extractor is removed from the alignment sleeve.
Male connectors have neither "top" nor "alignment sleeve"; therefore, steps 1 to 3 and 8 above are not required.
208 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

8.6 Replace Fuses
8.6 Replacing Fuses

:KLOHWKH$&SRZHUVXSSO\LVSURSHUO\LQSXWWRWKLVV\VWHPDQGZKHQWKHSHULSKHUDOXQLWVDUHSURSHUO\FRQQHFWHGDSUREOHP
may occur such as the power supply disabled to be turned on, the power not transmitted to the camera, or the power alternately
transmitted and stopped repeatedly to the camera. In such case, the fuse might be blown. If that occurs, replace the fuse by taking
the following procedure.
1 Make sure the MAIN POWER switch on the front of the CCU is turned "OFF."
2 Use a flat-blade screwdriver or the like to press and turn the fuse on the front of the CCU counterclockwise and
remove it.
CCU front view

CAM GENLOCK APC SDI
CCU
POWER
PHONE
MIC PRV OPE
ON
OFF
PTT
COM OFF
USB
INIT/PM CALL
CAM: 400V T5A
AC line fuses for transmitting power to the camera head TROUBLE SHOOTING and MAINTENANCE
3 Insert a new fuse into the fuse cap and turn it clockwise using a flat-blade screwdriver or the like until it seats
firmly.
CAUTION:
8VHVSHFL¿HGIXVHVRUHTXLYDOHQWRQHV
Fuse to be used
97$ UDWLQJ
("T" in the rating indicates a time lag fuse.)
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 209

8.7 Replace the fuse in the AC inlet.
8.7 Replace the fuse in the AC inlet.

7KHSRZHUVZLWFKDQGIXVHDUHEXLOWLQWKH$&LQOHWRQWKHEDFNRI&&87KLVVHFWLRQH[SODLQVKRZWRUHSODFHWKHIXVHLQWKH$&
inlet.
1 Turn off the camera and the power switch of CCU.
2 Turn off the main power switch of the back side of CCU.
***
Main power switch
AC power input
connector
3 Remove the AC cable from the AC inlet. Lock cancel button

7KH$&LQOHWRIWKLVSURGXFWXVHVWKH$&VRFNHWZLWK
retaining mechanism. Press this lock cancel button and
pull the socket toward the cable side to remove.
AC cable socket
4 Removing the fuse AC inlet
$IXVHV\PEROLVLQGLFDWHGRQWKHVZLWFKRIWKHSOXJLQ
unit. This symbol means that there is a fuse holder in
the unit. Since the frame color of the plug-in unit is red,
it is easy to distinguish the border from other parts (See
WKHULJKW¿JXUHV ,QVHUWDWRROVXFKDVDUP\NQLIHDQG REMOVE Location to insert a driver, etc.
HERE
driver into the bottom of the border, and lightly pull it
towards front to remove the plug-in unit (1). There are
two fuse holders, P and N, on the top of the unit (2), and
spare fuse hosing holder on the bottom of the unit (3). 2
5 After replacing the fuse, insert the plug-in unit into

the AC inlet.
6 Insert the socket of the AC cable into the AC inlet,

3
turn on the main power switch.
A plug in unit
210 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

9
SPECIFICATIONS
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)
9.1 UHK-430, CCU-430 Specifications

■ Ratings
Item Rating Remarks
[ 333333
1 Scanning system
1920 x 1080 119.88P/100P
2 Image sensor 2/3 inch CMOS sensor ×3 Total pixels 8M
3840 x 2160 @ 4K
3 Effective number of pixels
1920 x 1080 @ HD
)#.3
)#.3
4 Sensitivity /;UHIOHFWLRQUDWH
)#+'L
)#+'L
5 Optical system W\SH5*%3UL]P
6 Lens mount 2/3 type, Bayonet mount %7$6%EDVHG
1 2 3 4
7 Optical filter (ND)
ND &/($5 1/4 1/8 1/16 1/64
$ B C D E
8 Optical filter (CC)
CC 3200K 4300K 6300K CROSS OPTION
9 VF VFL201D, VFE741D, VFL701D
&$0(5$ '&WR9
10 Power source voltage
&&8$&999999
&$0(5$ 2SHUDWLRQWHPSHUDWXUH&WR&
&&8 2SHUDWLRQWHPSHUDWXUH&WR&
16 Ambient temperature
&$0(5$ 6WRUDJHWHPSHUDWXUH &WR&
&&8 6WRUDJHWHPSHUDWXUH &WR&
17 Ambient humidity WR No condensation.
18 EMI )&&&ODVV$
&$0(5$ :[+[' Not including projections.
19 External dimensions
&&8 :[+[' Not including projections.
&$0(5$&$0(5$ DSSUR[NJ
&&8 DSSUR[NJ Not including options.
20 Weight ,QFK9) DSSUR[J
,QFK9) DSSUR[NJ
,QFK9) DSSUR[NJ
9
SPECIFICATIONS
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 213

■ Performance
Item Rating Remarks
1 S/N ratio 62dB (typ.) +'L
W\S .S
2 Resolution
W\S HD
2000 TVL (typ.) .S
3 Limiting resolution
1000 TVL (typ.) HD
&$0(5$ :
&&8VHOIRSHUDWLRQ DSSUR[XSWR9$
0D[LPXP&&8SRZHUFRQVXPSWLRQDSSUR[XSWR9$ 7UDQVPLVVLRQFDSDFLW\IRUVLQJOHXQLW&$0(5$
4 Power consumption &RORUEDU L
9)/' :
Heater OFF
9)/' :PD[ Not including options.
9)(' :PD[ Not including options.
214 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

9.2 External Dimensions Diagram

CAMERA
■ Right Side View

243 ±5 7.2 ±1
CCU
OFF
EXT
POWER
340 ±5
CHAR
MIC
VF
F1
F2
9
FILTER
HEAD
MENU
INCOM/ND
PGM/CC
SPECIFICATIONS
94 ±3 7 ±1
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 215

■ Left Side View
94 ±3 7 ±1
RET-2
/MIC
RET-1
340 ±5
216 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ Front Side View

Microphone holder
(option)
UHK-430
LENS▼
148.5 ±3
9
SPECIFICATIONS
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 217

■ Rear Side View

3 4 3 4
ON ON
OFF 2 2 OFF
DIM DIM
1 1
INCOM SEL
REAR
INCOM 1 INCOM 2
FRONT FRONT
INCOM INCOM

ON PROD ON PROD
OFF BOTH OFF BOTH
PTT ENG PTT ENG
GL IN/SYNC OUT
DC OUT 12V 1A
OFF OFF USB REMOTE

+12V +48V +12V +48V
TRACKER
DC-IN 11~17V
GbE TRK
MIC 1 MIC 2
148.5 ±3
218 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

CCU
■ Front Side View
482.6 ±5
465 ±1.5
2- 7
31.75 ±0.5
CAM GENLOCK APC SDI
CCU
POWER
PHONE
MIC PRV OPE
ON
OFF
PTT
COM OFF
57.2 ±1
132.6 ±3
INIT/PM
USB
CALL
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

50.4 ±1
2- 5.2
37.7 ±0.5
9.2
4- 7x10
External Dimensions Diagram
219
SPECIFICATIONS
9
220
■ Rear Side View
*** CAMERA
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
GbE TRK VP_OUT
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
RET_MON

44.5 ±0.5
AUDIO AUDIO
OUT-1 OUT-2
MPU
37.7 ±0.5
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

465 ±1.5
■ Top Side View
448.5 ±5
480 - 680 (33) 9

SPECIFICATIONS
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 221

■ Side View
222 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

9.3 External Connections

Camera to its CCU (Fiber Cable) Connector
■ CAMERA Connector
Used to connect the camera to its CCU.
<RXFDQFKRRVHHLWKHURIWKHIROORZLQJWZRW\SHVRIFDPHUDFRQQHFWRUV
[Camera Side]
[SMPTE type] [OPS Series]
Guide mark
Guide mark
1
3 1 4 6 5
6 5
3 4
2 2
Insertion Side Insertion Side
< SMPTE type > < OPS Series >

Camera side : EDW. 3K. compatible product Camera side : OPS-R
Cable side : FUW. 3K. Cable side : OPS-P
[CCU Side[
[SMPTE type] [OPS Series]
Guide mark
Guide mark
1
4 1 3 5 6
5 6
4 3
2 2 9
Insertion Side Insertion Side SPECIFICATIONS
< SMPTE type > < OPS Series >

Camera side : FXW. 3K. compatible product CCU side : OPS-PR
Cable side : PUW. 3K. Cable side : OPS-J
Pin No. Name Function I/O External Interface
1 OPT H - C Optical contact Camera -> CCU OUT
2 OPT C - H Optical contact CCU -> Camera IN
3 CONTROL (H) Control signal (H) CCU -> Camera IN
4 CONTROL (C) Control signal (C) Camera -> CCU OUT
5 POWER (H) Power (H) supplied from CCU IN
6 POWER (C) Power (C) supplied from CCU IN
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 223

Camera I/O Connector
■ Lens Connector
Used to connect each type of lens. The connector pin assignment differs among camera lens mount types.
-------- Receptacle --------
9 1
8 2
10
7 12 11 3
6 4
5
Camera side : HR10A-10R-12SC
Cable side : HR10A-10P-12PC (12-pin male plug)
Insertion Side
[BTA Mount]
RETURN VIDEO ON/OFF signal

1
RETURN ON: 0.5V or less Zout = 10M Ω or more
1 RET ON RETURN OFF: OPEN Zout = 1.5k Ω or less IN
Zin = 100k Ω ± 5% (10kΩ or more) V≦0.5V
Momentary operation
VTR START/STOP signal

VTR START: 0.5V or less Zout = 10M Ω or more
2
2 VTR TRIG VTR STOP: OPEN Zout = 1.5k Ω or less IN
Zin = 100k Ω ± 5% (10kΩ or more) V≦0.5V
Momentary operation
3 GND Grounding for LENS GND
Forced IRIS servo ON/OFF

SERVO ON : +5V ± 0.5V
4
4 Zout = 10k Ω or less OUT
IRIS SERVO
SERVO OFF : 0.5V or less V≦0.5V V=5V±0.5V
Zout = 1.5k Ω or less
or 100k Ω or more
Control output of lens iris

F2.8 : 6.2V ± 0.05V
(6.2V ± 0.1V)
5 F16 : 3.4V ± 0.05V OUT
IRIS CONT
(3.4V ± 0.1V)
CLOSE : 2.5V ± 0.2V
(2.1V to 2.9V)
Zout = 1k Ω ± 10% (Fixed)
DC+12V output for LENS

6 +12V LENS Normal operation range: DC+10V - +20V OUT
(DC+10V - +17V)
Control output of lens iris

F2.8 : 6.2V ± 0.05V
(6.2V ± 0.1V)
7 F 16 : 3.4V ± 0.05V IN
IRIS FOLLOW
(3.4V ± 0.1V)
CLOSE : 2.5V ± 0.2V
(2.1V to 2.9V)
Zin = 100k Ω ± 2% (100k Ω or more)
(continues to the next page)
224 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

Switching between REMOTE/AUTO of IRIS

REMOTE : +5V ± 0.5V
8
Zout = 1k Ω ± 10% (10k Ω or less)
8 IRIS REM/AUTO AUTO : 0.5V or less OUT
Zout = 1.5k Ω or less V≦0.5V V=5V±0.5V
or 100k Ω or more
Zin = 100k Ω ± 2% (100k Ω or less)
Input/output of answer signals from the external system 9

IN : +0.5V Ω or less Zout = 1.5k Ω or less
9 EXT ANS IN
OUT : OPEN Zout = 10M Ω or more
Zin = 100k Ω ± 5% (10k Ω or more) V≦0.5V
Control output of lens zoom

WIDE : 2.0V ± 0.05V
(2.0V ± 0.2V)
10 ZOOM FOLLOW TELE : 7.0V ± 0.05V IN
(7.0V ± 0.2V)
Zin = 100k Ω ± 2% (10k Ω or more)
Serial data reception (LENS ---> CAMERA)

+0.5V CMOS level
(VCC 5V ± 0.25V)
Control output of lens focus
11 SERIAL LENS→ Close end: 2.0V ± 0.05V OUT
CAMERA (2.0V ± 0.2V)
/FOCUS FOLLOW Infinite end: 7.0V ± 0.05V
(7.0V ± 0.2V)
Zin = 100k Ω ± 2% (20k Ω or more)
Serial data transmission (CAMERA ---> LENS)

SERIAL CAMERA→
12 LENS
+0.5V CMOS level OUT
(VCC 5V ± 0.25V)
(The values indicated in ( ) are standard values in 2/3" Camera/Lens.

IN : Camera <--- Lens
OUT : Camera ---> Lens
9
SPECIFICATIONS
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 225

■ VF Connector
$FRQQHFWRUXVHGWRFRQQHFWWKHYLHZ¿QGHU
Receptacle
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Camera side: HDR-EA26LMYPG1-SLE+
Insertion Side Cable side: HDR-EA26FAG1+
1 GND Ground for DC+12V power supply GND
3 +12V DC +12V power supply OUT
5 RS422_RX+ Serial control signal (P) (VF -> Camera) IN
18 RS422_RX- Serial control signal (N) (VF -> Camera ) IN
6 SIGNAL_GND Ground for Serial control signal (VF -> Camera) GND
19 IKEGAMI_VF IKEGAMI VF connection control signal IN
7 RS422_TX+ Serial control signal (P) ( Camera -> VF) OUT
20 RS422_TX- Serial control signal (N) ( Camera -> VF ) OUT
8 SIGNAL_GND Ground for Serial control signal (Camera -> VF) GND
21 NC ---- ----
9 NC ---- ----
22 R TALLY R TALLY signal OUT
10 G TALLY G TALLY signal OUT
23 Y TALLY Y TALLY signal OUT
11 NC ---- OUT
24 SIGNAL_GND GND GND
12 SDI+ Serial video signal + (HD SDI) OUT
25 SDI- Serial video signal - (HD SDI) OUT
13 SIGNAL_GND GND GND
26 SHIELD GND GND GND
226 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ D-Tap Connector
6XSSOLHV'&9 $PD[ ZKHQDQH[WHUQDOFRPSDFWPRQLWRULVXVHG
-2 +1 Camera side : D-Tap CN BASE

Cable side : D-Tap connector ( male)
○1 +12V DC +12V power supply OUT
○2 +12V_RET Ground for DC+12V power supply GND
9
SPECIFICATIONS
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 227

■ System extension (SE) connector

Connect the system extender (SE) and camera.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12
13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 2223 24
Camera side : QR/P4-24S-C(01)
SE side : QR/P4-24P-C(01)
○
1 AC234V(H) AC power supply (H) CAMERA -> SE OUT
○
2 SDI_N Serial video signal - OUT
○
3 VF_RS422_TX_P Serial control signal + Camera -> VF OUT
○
4 VF_RS422_TX_N Serial control signal - Camera -> VF OUT
○
5 /LS_ON IN
○
6 /SE_INT OUT
○
7 SE_RS422_TX_P Serial control signal + Camera -> SE OUT
○
8 SE_RS422_TX_N Serial control signal - Camera -> SE OUT
○
9 IRIS_FOLLOW Position information of lens iris IN
○
10 ZOOM_FOLLOW Position information of lens zoom IN
○
11 S_LENS_STS IN
○
12 GND GND
○
13 AC234V(C) AC power supply (C) CAMERA -> SE OUT
○
14 SDI_P Serial video signal + OUT
○
15 VF_RS422_RX_P Serial control signal + VF -> Camera IN
○
16 VF_RS422_RX_N Serial control signal - VF -> Camera IN
○
17 STBY+3.3V_C OUT
○
18 /SE_ON IN
○
19 SE_RS422_RX_P Serial control signal + SE -> Camera IN
○
20 SE_RS422_RX_N Serial control signal - SE -> Camera IN
○
21 IRIS_CONT Control signal of lens iris IN
○
22 FOCUS_FOLLOW Position information of lens forcus IN
○
23 S_LENS_CNT OUT
○
24 GND GND
228 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ DC OUT connector
2XWSXWV'&9 $PD[ IRUJHQHUDOXVH
4 1
Camera side : HR10A-7R-4SC(73)
3 2 Cable side : HR10A-7P-4PC(73) or equivalent
○1 DC +12V_RET Ground for DC+12V power supply GND
○2 NC
○3 NC
○4 DC +12V DC +12V power supply OUT
9
SPECIFICATIONS
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 229

■ INTERCOM Connector
Used to connect an intercom headset.
Each headset type has each connector shape.
The both carbon and dynamic types can be used for the intercom microphone.
3OHDVHUHIHUWR&KDSWHU,17(5&20$8',2IRUVZLWFKLQJEHWZHHQFDUERQDQGG\QDPLFVHWWLQJV
[7-pin type]
Receptacle
6
1
5 7
2
4
3 Camera side : NC7FD-LX (NEUTRIK)
Cable side : XLR-7-12C
Insertion Side
○1 LISTEN L (C) Shield for intercom receiver L output (H) GND 1
○2 LISTEN L (H) Intercom receiver L output (H) OUT 2 Receiver L
○3 TALK (C) Shield for intercom microphone input (H) GND 3
○4 TALK (H) Intercom microphone input (H) IN 4 Intercom microphone
○5 COMM COMM GND terminal GND
○6 LISTEN R (H) Intercom receiver R output (H) OUT 6 Receiver R
○7 LISTEN R (C) Shield for intercom receiver R output (H) GND 7
230 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

[5-pin type]
Receptacle
1
5
2
4
3 Camera head side : NC5FD-LX (NEUTRIK)
Cable side : XLR-5-12C (5-pin male plug) or equivalent
Insertion Side
○1 TALK (C) Shield for intercom microphone input (H) GND 1
○2 TALK (H) Intercom microphone input IN 2 Intercom microphone
○3 SHIELD Shield for LISTEN L / LISTEN R output GND 3
○4 LISTEN Lch (H) LISTEN L output (H) OUT 4 Receiver
○5 PGM Rch (H) PGM R output (H) OUT 5 Receiver
[4-pin type]
Receptacle
座
1 4
2 3
Camera head side : NC4FD-LX/NC4MD-LX (NEUTRIK)
Insertion Side

9
○
1 TALK (C) Shield for intercom microphone input (H) GND 1
Intercom microphone SPECIFICATIONS

○
2 TALK (H) Intercom microphone input IN 2
○
3 LISTEN (C) Shield for LISTEN output (H) output GND 3
○
4 LISTEN (H) LISTEN output (H) OUT 4 Receiver
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 231

■ MIC-1 and MIC-2 Connector

8VHGWRFRQQHFWIRULQSXWWRDPLFURSKRQH ȍEDODQFHGLQSXW
Camera main unit has female Camera main unit has male
connector seats. connector seats.
2 1 1 2
3 3

Camera side : Plug receptacle HA16PRM-3SE（71） Camera side : Receptacle HA16RM-3PE (76)
Cable side : XLR-3-12C (3-pin male plug) or equivalent Cable side : XLR-3-11C (3-pin female plug) or
equivalent
○1 MIC (SHIELD) MIC input shield ―
○2 MIC (HOT) MIC (HOT) line 600Ω balanced input

When AB power is supplied : DC 12V
IN
When +48 phantom power is supplied : DC 48V
○3 MIC (COLD) MIC (COLD) line 600Ω balanced input

When AB power is supplied : DC 0V
IN
When +48 phantom power is supplied : DC 48V
■ DC-IN Connector
This connector is external power supply for camera.
4 Camera side : XLR-4-32-F512

Insertion Side
○1 +12 V RET +12V input RET GND
○2 NC ――――――――――――― ―
○3 NC ――――――――――――― ―
○4 +12 V IN +12 V input (11V to 17V) IN
232 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ REMOTE Connector
Used to connect an external remote controller.
Receptacle
A G
B H F
C E
D
Camera side : PRC05-R8F
Cable side : PRC05-PB8M
Insertion Side
○A HED (+) Digital data output (+) from camera to remote

controller
OUT
○B HED (-) Digital data output (-) from camera to remote

controller
OUT
○C HEC (+) Digital data input (+) from remote controller to

camera
IN
○D HEC (-) Digital data input (-) from remote controller to

camera
IN
○E MU_REAR+12V DC+12V power supply (max. 2.0A) OUT
○F DGND Ground for DC+12V power supply OUT
○G RESERVE
○H RESERVE
9
SPECIFICATIONS
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 233

■ TRACKER Connector
75$&.(5LVDFRQQHFWRUWRPDNHLWHDV\WREXLOGDFUDQHER[DQGRWKHUH[WHUQDOV\VWHPV
Receptacle
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20
Camera side : HR10A-13R-20SB (73)

Cable side : HR10A-13P-20PC (73) or equivalent
Insertion Side
○1 PC_TXD_P CRANE / TRNUK DATA OUT OUT RS422 (P) *1
○2 PC_TXD_N CRANE / TRNUK DATA OUT OUT RS422 (N) *1
○3 PC_RXD_P CRANE / TRNUK DATA IN IN RS422 (P) *1
○4 PC_RXD_N CRANE / TRNUK DATA IN IN RS422 (N) *1
○5 GND Ground for DC+12V power supply, common GND GND for MU_REAR+12V
DC+12V
○6 MU_REAR+12V DC +12V power supply (Max : 1.5A) (When the DC - IN connector is powered,
its input voltage is output)
○7 R_TALLY R TALLY output OUT Open Drain
○8 G_TALLY G TALLY output OUT +V

○9 RET-1 RET-1 SW IN IN
○
10 RET-2 RET-2 SW IN IN
○
11 INC_MIC_ON PTT signal of the TRACKER MIC (Lo : ON, Hi-Z : OFF) IN
○
12 TRACKER_EN
Select the connector mode
(L : CRANE mode, Hi-z : TRUNK DATA mode)
IN
GND
○
13 RESERVE Reserve IN
○
14 RESERVE Reserve IN
○
15 TRACKER-1 INTERCOM-1 (Receive Audio) OUT
○
Unbalance Audio
○
0dBu / -20dBu
○
○
19 T_TALK_H INTERCOM-MIC (H) (Talk Audio) IN
High impedance balanced
○
20 T_TALK_C INTERCOM-MIC (C) (Talk Audio) IN
0dBu / -20dBu
Caution:
'$7$7581.DQG&5$1(OLQHVXVHV3LQVWRH[FOXVLYHO\
234 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

CCU I/O Connector

■ DATA TRUNK Connector
Communicates between the camera and the system by RS-422 via CCU.
--------- Receptacle ---------
5 4 3 2 1
CCU side : DELC-J9SAF-20L9E
9 8 7 6 Cable side : DE-9P-RR or equivalent (9pin male plug screw #4-40UNC)
Insertion Side
○1 N.C
○2 TR1 OUT (N) Digital Data Output (N) OUT 2
○3 TR1 IN (P) Digital Data Input (P) IN 3
○4 IN (S) Input Shield 4
○5 N.C
○6 OUT (S) Output Shield 6
○7 TR1 OUT (P) Digital Data Output (P) OUT 7
○8 TR1 IN (N) Digital Data Input (N) IN 8
○9 GND GND
■ TALLY OUT Connector

8VHGWRVHQG7$//<FRQWUROVLJQDO
--------- Receptacle ---------
CCU side : PRC05-RB5F1

Insertion Side Cable side : PRC 05-P5M or equivalent 9
SPECIFICATIONS
○A DC +12 V OUT DC +12V power output OUT
○B R TALLY Red Tally output (ON: GND) OUT
○C Y TALLY/COM TALLY
Yellow Tally output or COMMON TALLY
output (ON: GND)
OUT or
○D G TALLY Green TALLY output (ON: GND) OUT
○E TALLY GND Ground for TALLY signal GND
6HOHFWRQHIURP<7$//<RXWSXWRU&200217$//<RXWSXWIRUWKHSLQ&,WFDQEHVHWIURPWKH&&8PHQX
8VHRI&200217$//<287HQDEOHVWRFRQWUROERWK57$//<DQG*7$//<VLPXOWDQHRXVO\
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 235

■ REMOTE Connector
This is a connector used to externally control the microphone gain of the camera.
The hex jack screw for the Japanese domestic models is 2.6 mm, and the hex jack screw for oversea models are #4-40UNC as the
VWDQGDUGVSHFL¿FDWLRQV
--------- Receptacle ---------
CCU side : [metric] 17LE-13150-27(D3AB)-FA

[inch] 17LE-13150-27(D3CB)-FA
Insertion Side Cable side : DA-15PF-N or equivalent
○
1 +5.5V DC + 5.5V output OUT
○
2 MIC1_FINE_CTL MIC1 GAIN control voltage input 0 to 5.5V IN
○
3 MIC2_FINE_CTL MIC2 GAIN control voltage input 0 to 5.5V IN
○
4 NC
○
5 MIC1 GAIN STEP2 MIC1 GAIN STEP2 *1 IN
○
6 MIC1 GAIN STEP1 MIC1 GAIN STEP1 *1
IN
○
7 MIC1 GAIN STEP0 MIC1 GAIN STEP0 *1
IN
○
8 MIC1_REM_CTRL MIC1 GAIN CONTROL ENABLE *2
○
9 GND GND IN
○
10 NC
○
11 NC
○
○
○
○
15 MIC2_REM_CTRL MIC2 GAIN CONTROL ENABLE *2
IN
*1 MIC GAIN STEP CONTROL *2 MIC GAIN EXTERNAL REMOTE CONTROL

GAIN GAIN GAIN MIC1 MIC2
GAIN MIC GAIN CTRL
STEP2 STEP1 STEP0 REM_CTRL REM_CTRL
H H H -60 dB L L MIC 1 and 2 ON
H H L -50 dB L H MIC 1 ON
H L H -40 dB H L MIC 2 ON
H L L -30 dB H H INTERNAL
L H H -20 dB
L H L -10 dB
L L H 0 dB
L L L +4 dB
236 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ COMMUNICATION Connector
7KLVLVWKHFRQQHFWRUWKDWFRQQHFWVWKHFRQWUROLQSXWVIURPWKHH[WHUQDO,17(5&20V\VWHPSURJUDPYRLFHDQGH[WHUQDO7$//<
system.
The hex jack screw for the Japanese domestic models is 2.6 mm, and the hex jack screw for oversea models are #4-40UNC as the
VWDQGDUGVSHFL¿FDWLRQV
-------- Receptacle --------

[inch] 17LE-13250-27(D3CB)-FA
Insertion Side Cable side : DB-25PF-N or equivalent
○1 ENG C-S(H) ENG CH Intercom output (H) to the system from the CCU OUT
○2 ENG C-S(C) ENG CH Intercom output (C) to the system from the CCU OUT
○3 ENG(S) ENG CH Intercom Shield
○4 ENG S-C(H) ENG CH Intercom input (H) to the CCU from the system IN
○5 ENG S-C(C) ENG CH Intercom input (C) to the CCU from the system IN
○6 PGM-1(H) Program Audio Channel-1 input (H) IN
○7 PGM-1(C) Program Audio Channel-1 input (C) IN
○8 PGM-1(S) Program Audio Channel-1 Shield
○9 GND Ground GND
○10 Y TALLY IN Yellow Tally Input (+) IN
○11 R TALLY IN Red Tally Input (+) IN
○12 R TALLY COMM Red Tally Common
○13 GND Ground GND
○14 PROD C-S(H) PROD CH Intercom output (H) to the system from the CCU OUT
○15 PROD C-S(C) PROD CH Intercom output (C) to the system from the CCU OUT
○16 PROD(S) PROD CH Intercom Shield
○17 PROD S-C(H) PROD CH Intercom input (H) to the CCU from the system IN 9
○18 PROD S-C(C) PROD CH Intercom input (C) to the CCU from the system IN

SPECIFICATIONS
○21 PGM-2(S) Program Audio Channel-2 Shield
○24 G TALLY IN Green Tally Input (+) IN
○25 G TALLY COMM Green Tally Common
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 237

■ I/F Connector
7KHVHULDOFRPPXQLFDWLRQVWDQGDUG56'$7$7581.,QWHUFRPH[WHUQDOFRQWURODQGSUHYLHZVZLWFKFRQWDFWDUH
assigned.
--------- Receptacle ---------
Insertion Side

[inch] 17LE-13150-27(D3CB)-FA
Cable side : DA-15PF-N or equivalent
○ 1 NC ―
○ 2 TR2 IN (P) DATA TRUNK ch2 (P) (System ---> CCU ---> CAMERA) IN 2
○ 3 TR2 IN (N) DATA TRUNK ch2 (N) (System ---> CCU ---> CAMERA) IN 3
○ 4 TR2 (S) DATA TRUNK ch2 Shield 5
○ 5 TR2 OUT (P) DATA TRUNK ch2 (P) (CAMERA ---> CCU ---> System) OUT
6
○ 6 TR2 OUT (N) DATA TRUNK ch2 (N) (CAMERA ---> CCU ---> System) OUT
4
○ 7 NC ―
○ 8 HP IND CAMERA POWER ON INDICATOR OUT
○ 9 GND GND
○10 DC +12V OUT DC +12V power output OUT
○11 PREVIEW SW Preview switch OUT
○12 PREVIEW COM Preview switch common OUT
○13 NC ―
○14 NC ―
○15 NC ―
238 UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ AUDIO Connector
8VHGWRFRQQHFWIRUDXGLRRXWSXW ȍEDODQFHGRXWSXW
Camera main unit has male Camera main unit has female
connector seats. connector seats.
1 2 2 1
3 3
CCU side : Plug receptacle HA16RD-3P (76) Camera side : Receptacle HA16PRK-3S
Cable side : XLR-3-11C (3-pin female plug) or equivalent Cable side : XLR-3-12C (3-pin male plug) or equivalent
○ 1 SHIELD Audio line shield GND 1
○ 2 AUDIO (HOT) AUDIO LINE HOT IN 2
3
○ 3 AUDIO (COLD) AUDIO LINE COLD IN
■ OCP CSU Connector

Used to connect each type of control panel.
Receptacle
A G
B F
H
C E
D
CCU side : PRC05-RB8F1
Cable side : PRC05-PB8M or equivalent
Insertion Side

9
○A HED(+) Digital data output (+) from CCU to control panel OUT
SPECIFICATIONS
○B HED(-) Digital data output (-) from CCU to control panel OUT
A
○C HEC(+) Digital data output (+) from control panel to CCU IN

C
D
○D HEC(-) Digital data output (-) from control panel to CCU IN
F
○E +12V DC+12V power supply to control panel OUT
○F +12V_RET Ground for DC+12V power supply GND
○G NC
○H NC
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 239

UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)
7KLVFKDSWHUFRQWDLQVWKHUHYLVLRQLQIRUPDWLRQRIXVHUVSHFL¿FVSHFL¿FDWLRQRUGHVLJQFKDQJHUHTXHVWHGE\XVHUVRUDQ\FKDQJHV
done by Ikegami.
Read by comparing this information with the main part of the operation manual.
UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) 241

UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)
UHK-430/CCU-430
4K/HD
OPERATION MANUAL
2nd Edition : October 2017
Published in Utsunomiya Factory of
© October 2017 Ikegami Tsushinki Co., Ltd.

$OOULJKWVUHVHUYHG5HSURGXFWLRQRUGXSOLFDWLRQZLWKRXWSHUPLVVLRQRI
Ikegami Tsushinki Co., Ltd. of editorial or pictorial content in whole or
in part, in any manner, is prohibited.
6SHFL¿FDWLRQVDQGGHVLJQDUHVXEMHFWWRFKDQJHZLWKRXWSULRUQRWLFH
5-6-16, Ikegami, Ohta-ku, Tokyo, 146-8567, Japan
Phone : +81-(0)3-5700-4114 Fax : +81-(0)3-5748-2200
E-Mail : info_e@ikegami.co.jp
URL : http://www.ikegami.co.jp/en/
Ikegami Electronics (U.S.A.),Inc.

37 Brook Avenue, Maywood, New Jersey 07607, U.S.A.
Phone : +1-201-368-9171 Fax : +1-201-569-1626
E-Mail : engineering@ikegami.com, service@ikegami.com
URL : http://www.ikegami.com
Ikegami Electronics (Europe) GmbH

Ikegami Strasse 1, D-41460 Neuss, GERMANY
Phone : +49-(0)2131-123-0 Fax : +49-(0)2131-102820
E-Mail : info@ikegami.de
URL : http://www.ikegami.de
Ikegami Electronics (Europe) GmbH - UK

Unit E1, Cologne Court, Brooklands Close,
Sunbury-on-Thames, Middlesex, TW16 7EB, UK.
Phone : +44-(0)1932-76 97 00 Fax : +44-(0)1932-76 97 10
E-Mail : technical@ikegami.co.uk , sales@ikegami.co.uk
Ikegami Electronics Asia Pacific Pte.Ltd.

Tampines Central 5, #03-03 CPF Tampines Building,
Singapore 529508
Phone : +65-6260-8820 Fax: +65-6260-8896
URL : http://sg.ikegami.co.jp
Property of :

Uhk Ccu-430 Operation Us 02

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Uhk Ccu-430 Operation Us 02

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Products conforming to RoHS directive

CABLE STATUS ALARM CAM:400V T5A

OPT RX LEVEL CCU STATUS

1710 Edition (E)

PRODUCTS CONFORMING TO RoHS DIRECTIVE

* About RoHS Directive

● Applications exempted from RoHS directive compliance

UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) i

MAINTENANCE OF PRODUCTS CONFORMING TO RoHS DIRECTIVE

ii UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

INFORMATION TO THE USER

People’s Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard (SJ/T11364—2006)

UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) iii

Indicates that mishandling may cause an electric shock.

Indicates that mishandling may cause injury.

Indicates prohibited action.

iv UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

Regarding the Product

Regarding the Power

Regarding the power voltage supplied to CCU

Please refer to “4.3 Turning On the Power” for further instruction.

CCU input voltage setting

UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) v

Regarding the Product

Regarding the Product

Regarding the Power and the Lithium Battery

vi UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

Regarding the Fiber Connector and the Fiber Cable

Regarding the Camera Connector and the Fiber Cable

Cable Clamp Cable Clamp

7KHFDPHUDFRQQHFWRUDQG¿EHUFDEOHFRQQHFWRU SOXJ KDYHDVWUXFWXUHWKDWLVVXVFHSWLEOH

UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) vii

■ Notice for Use

■ Regular Maintenance Recommended

viii UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

HOW TO READ THE OPERATION MANUAL

■ Notes on the Manual

CAUTION: Things you have to be careful during operation. Be sure to read.

Note: Supplementary information or guidance

Reference: Sections where related information is available

Term: Explains the meaning of a term you need to know.

Indicates UHK-430 Camera (UHK-430S Sensor Unit and UHK-430M

CCU Indicate CCU-430 Camera Control Unit.

OCP Basically indicates OCP-300 Operation Control Panel.

MCP Basically indicates MCP-300 Maintenance Control Panel.

Fiber cable Indicates ¿EHUFRPSRVLWHFDPHUDFDEOH

Indicates the items enclosed by double quotes (“ ”) are to be selected

Quad Link $PHWKRGWRFRQVWUXFWD.LPDJHZLWKOLQNV

■ Illustrations and Displays

UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) ix

x UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

■ Structure of Operation Manual

Chapter 2 NAME and FUNCTION

Chapter 3 INSTALLATION and CONNECTION

Chapter 5 CAMERA SETTINGS and ADJUSTMENT

Chapter 6 CCU SETTINGS and ADJUSTMENT

Chapter 7 Helpful Technical Information

Chapter 8 TROUBLE SHOOTING and MAINTENANCE

UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) xi

PRODUCTS CONFORMING TO RoHS DIRECTIVE . . . i Chapter 3.

xii UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E)

4.5 Viewﬁnder Adjustment (VFL201D) . . . . . . . . 67 The setting status of the camera

UHK-430/CCU-430 1710 VER2 (E) xiii

7KHFDPHUDFRQQHFWRUDQG¿EHUFDEOHFRQQHFWRU SOXJ KDYHDVWUXFWXUHWKDWLVVXVFHSWLEOH

Fiber cable Indicates ¿EHUFRPSRVLWHFDPHUDFDEOH

Quad Link $PHWKRGWRFRQVWUXFWD.LPDJHZLWKOLQNV